XUV700 OM 03jan2022

Owner’s Manual
Issue Date: August 2021

Revision Date: October 2021
NOTE: Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided in this manual, and keep it in a safe place for future reference.If you have any doubt whatsoever
regarding the use or care of your vehicle, please visit your Mahindra dealer for atssistance or advice.
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD. GATEWAY BUILDING, APOLLO BUNDER, MUMBAI - 400 039 www.mahindra.com
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Mahindra vehicle.

We are privileged to welcome you to the Mahindra family.
Your vehicle represents Robust Quality, Ruggedness, Safety, Precision Workmanship and Distinctive Styling , which are our
traditional values.
This documents contains important information on vehicle operation, that will help you make full use of the technical features
available. To exercise better control on road, we suggest you to please take time to read, understand and familiarise with vehicle
and its features. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of
your vehicle.
When it comes to service, note that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer knows your vehicle best, has company trained Technical
Experts, Mahindra Genuine Parts and very much cares about your satisfaction.
We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.

Important Information – Quick Reference
We strongly urge that you read the information provided in pages referred hereunder which will help in road safety and prevent
inconvenience
1 Warranty Coverage............................................................................................. Refer WSIG* (P.g. 15)

2 Roadside Assistance .................................................................................... Refer WSIG* (P.g. 10)
3 Schedule Service (Free/Paid)................................................................. Refer WSIG* (P.g. 23)
4 Maintenance Schedule Chart................................................................................. Refer WSIG* (P.g. 24)
5 Lubricants And Capacities............................................................................. Refer WSIG* (P.g. 28)
6 Location Of Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)................................................. Refer (P.g. 1-7)
7 Location Of Fuse Box And Fuse Details............................................................ Refer (P.g. 10-10)
8 Changing A Flat Tyre................................................................ Refer (P.g. 10-17)
9 Understanding The Warning Lamps.......................................................... Refer (P.g. 3-35)
10 Use Of Seat Belts And Child Restraint...................................... Refer (P.g. 2-12)
11 Understanding The Airbag Function......................................................... Refer (P.g. 2-27)
12 If Your Vehicle Is Submerged..................................................... Refer (P.g. 6-8)
13 Driving Through Water.................................................................................. Refer (P.g. 6-8)
14 Opening And Closing the Bonnet......................................... Refer (P.g. 5-23)
15 Location Of Battery And Its Maintenance..................................... Refer (P.g. 11-8 & 11-16)
*Warranty and Service Information Guide
Table of Contents
1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION ...........................1-1 Child Restraint System (CRS) ................................2-21
Servicing and Summary Data..................................1-1 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .............2-27
Safety Symbols ................................................................1-1 3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES.................................3-1
General Safety Information and Instrument Cluster Overview .................................3-1
Instructions .......................................................................1-2 Drive Mode (If equipped)...........................................3-6
To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle .............................1-2 Instrument Cluster Control Switches..................3-7
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ....................1-7 Instrument Cluster screen flow .............................3-8
Engine Number...............................................................1-7 Drive Info............................................................................3-9
Front Overview................................................................1-8 Fuel Info ...........................................................................3-12
Rear Overview .................................................................1-9 Digital Speedo Meter (if equipped) ...................3-13
Instrument Panel/Door Trim Overview ..........1-10 Vehicle Info.....................................................................3-14
Roof Overview .............................................................1-11 Navigation (If equipped)..........................................3-15
Alexa Reference Guide.............................................1-12 Driver Assistance (ADAS) (If equipped) ...........3-16
ADRENOX Connect.....................................................1-13 Audio Info (If equipped) ..........................................3-16
2 SEATS AND SAFETY .................................................................2-1 Display Layout ..............................................................3-17
Seats......................................................................................2-1 Cluster Setting (if equipped) .................................3-18
Head Restraint..............................................................2-11 Alert History...................................................................3-25
Seat Belt ...........................................................................2-12 General Alerts ...............................................................3-25
Table of Contents
Partial Alerts ..................................................................3-30 Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System (if

Tyre Direction Monitoring System equipped)........................................................................5-11
(TDMS)...............................................................................3-31 Remote Battery ...........................................................5-21
Cluster Features ..........................................................3-32 Key Fob Tray ..................................................................5-22
Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument If PKE/RKE Key fob is Lost.......................................5-22
Cluster...............................................................................3-33 Engine Immobiliser System...................................5-23
Warning Lamps in the Instrument Opening and Closing the Bonnet.......................5-24
Cluster...............................................................................3-44 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing ..............................5-25
4 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ..........................................4-1 Manual Fuel Lid Override .......................................5-26
Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) ...........................4-2 6 STARTING AND DRIVING I...................................................6-1
Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR) .......................4-2 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle ........6-1
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) ..................................4-7 Starting the Engine........................................................6-2
Instrument Cluster Telltales for DPF & SCR Stopping the Engine .....................................................6-4
Systems ............................................................................4-10 Exhaust Gases .................................................................6-5
5 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE........................5-1 Driving Your Vehicle .....................................................6-5
Doors ....................................................................................5-1 Tips for Better Fuel Economy...............................6-10
Central Locking System ..............................................5-5 Ignition Switch (if equipped) .................................6-12
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ....................5-7 Horn ...................................................................................6-13
Table of Contents
Manual Transmission ...............................................6-13 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) (If

Automatic Transmission (AT) ...............................6-17 equipped)........................................................................6-46
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Operation (if Hill Descent Control (HDC) (if equipped)........6-47
equipped)........................................................................6-24 Hill Hold Control (HHC) (if equipped)...............6-48
Drive Modes (Only for Diesel Variant) .............6-25 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC) ..............6-49
Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start Roll Over Mitigation (ROM) ...................................6-49
System) (If equipped)................................................6-29 Brake Disc Wiping ......................................................6-50
Fuel-BS VI.........................................................................6-32 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP ......................................6-50
Brakes ...............................................................................6-34 Second Collision Mitigation System
Electric Parking Brake-EPB (if equipped)........6-36 (SCM)..................................................................................6-51
Auto Vehicle Hold/Auto Hold (AVH) (if Driver Drowsiness Detection System
equipped)........................................................................6-40 (DDD) .................................................................................6-51
Hazard on Panic Braking ........................................6-43 Wheels and Tyres........................................................6-54
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..............................6-43 Tiretronics (if equipped)..........................................6-63
Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD) .........6-44 Reverse Parking Assist System (RPAS).............6-76
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (if Rear View Camera ......................................................6-81
equipped) .......................................................................6-45 7 STARTING AND DRIVING II..................................................7-1
Steering ...............................................................................7-1
Table of Contents
Steering Controls - Audio (if equipped) .............7-2 Center Fascia Switch ................................................8-13
Cruise Control (if equipped).....................................7-4 Driver Side Switch Bank ..........................................8-14
Advanced Driver Assistance System (If Power Outlet .................................................................8-14
equipped)...........................................................................7-7 Wireless Mobile Charging (If equipped) .........8-16
Adaptive Cruise Control (Only for Automatic Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC) ...............8-17
Transmission variant)..................................................7-9 Lamps................................................................................8-20
Collision Mitigation System ...................................7-30 Hazard Warning Lamp .............................................8-28
High Beam Assist ........................................................7-48 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light
Traffic Sign Recognition...........................................7-51 Sensor (RLS) ...................................................................8-29
Lane Keep Assist System ........................................7-53 Follow-Me Home Lamp (FMH) Non RLS (if
Smart Pilot Assist System .......................................7-59 equipped)........................................................................8-30
8 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS I...................................................8-1 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp(LMV) (if
Control Switches.............................................................8-1 equipped)........................................................................8-31
Mirrors .................................................................................8-4 Remote Engine Start (If equipped) ....................8-31
Interior Rear-view Mirror (IRVM) ...........................8-5 Windshield Wipers .....................................................8-32
Storage Compartments..............................................8-6 9 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS II .................................................9-1
Microphone(as applicable) ....................................8-11 Skyroof ...............................................................................9-1
Sun Visor..........................................................................8-12
Table of Contents
Heating, Ventilation And Air-Conditioning Engine Compartment ...............................................11-8

System (HVAC) ..............................................................9-10 General Maintenance ............................................ 11-10
Surround View System (If equipped) ...............9-31 In the Engine Compartment .............................. 11-11
10 EMERGENCIES ........................................................................10-1 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle .................... 11-15
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................................10-1 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle ................ 11-15
Towing...............................................................................10-1 Battery ........................................................................... 11-16
Emergency Assistance..............................................10-3 Wiper Blades .............................................................. 11-17
Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks..........................10-5 Appearance Care and Protection.................... 11-18
Engine Overheating ...................................................10-6 Air Conditioning System Maintenance......... 11-23
Jump Starting ................................................................10-7 Vehicle Storage.......................................................... 11-23
Limp Home Mode.......................................................10-9 Winter Care ................................................................. 11-23
Fuses & Relays........................................................... 10-10 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement (if
Changing a Flat Tyre............................................... 10-17 equipped)..................................................................... 11-25
11 MAINTENANCE.......................................................................11-1 12 ANNEXURE ...............................................................................12-1
Dimensions ....................................................................11-1 Emission Control System – Multi Languages
Technical Specifications ..........................................11-2 Alerts..................................................................................12-1
Bulb Specification .......................................................11-4
General Owner's Information ..............................11-5
GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION
1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION
1.1 Servicing and Summary Data DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
We suggest that you record the vehicle servicing data in the
Warranty and Service Information Guide for future
references WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
We recommend you always use Mahindra Genuine Parts
when performing repairs on the vehicle.
For all issues concerning the vehicle and for any need of CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
Genuine spare parts, contact the Mahindra Authorised if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/
Dealer or property damage.
1.2 Safety Symbols

NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the
Carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/ vehicle, the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to
instructions given in this manual. which particular attention must be paid for optimum use of
Legend of the Symbols the vehicle.
To emphasis the information and procedures regarding If you see this symbol, it indicates “no,” “ do
safety, use, maintenance, etc., the following symbols are not,” “do not do this,” or “never”.
used throughout the manual:
© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-1

1.3 General Safety Information and Instructions plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter
the numbers in the VIN plate.
1. First-aid kit is placed in the glove box of the vehicle.
Ensure it is not taken out of the vehicle at any point of 6. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or
other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of
time.
vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive
2. Please note that throughout this manual, reference is at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the
made that “an accident” could occur. An accident center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the
could cause you or a bystander to sustain personal vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted
injury, or result in property damage. on the roof carrier.
3. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose 1.4 To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle
buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-
usage, you may experience a temporary drive disturbance.
4. The lifespan of Mahindra products depends on many This is a characteristic of the tyres and should be no reason
factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general for concern. The condition should correct itself within 5-15
may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and kilometers. of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the
significantly reduce its lifespan. The vehicle is also vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
subject to wear over a period of time. Please have
your vehicle regularly inspected by a Mahindra Driving and Drugs/Medication
Authorised Dealer or a qualified Technician . If the
inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the
immediately replace, or have the component serviced. use of prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication
(even cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or
5. The vehicle identification plates are the only legal medication, be sure that it will not affect your driving ability.
identification reference; hence it is necessary to keep
them in good condition. Never modify data on the
© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

1-2
Mobile Phones Warning Running-in

Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld Driving smoothly during first 1,000 kilometers. will help to
devices, computers, portable radios or other by the driver prevent abnormal and premature system wear. Proper
while driving is dangerous. In exceptional condition, if use of running-in will improve the life of drivetrain and vehicle
a mobile phone is necessary despite this warning, use a components.
handsfree system to ensure that the hands are free to drive
the vehicle. Even handsfree do not ensure distraction free A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1,000
drive. Please comply with the legal regulations in your kilometers. of running. This should be considered as a
country, concerning the use of communication equipment normal part of break-in and not interpreted as any problem
in vehicles . with the engine.
Driving Long Distances Mahindra Genuine Parts
When driving long distances, follow these tips to have a safe Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles. In
journey: the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend
that you use only Mahindra genuine parts.
• Take breaks at regular intervals
Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and
• Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive will not be covered by your Mahindra warranty.
safely
• Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to
different parts of the road The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non
genuine parts
• Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea
• Relax and stay calm

Mahindra Genuine Accessories the front and rear axle. Consult Mahindra Authorised
Dealer for specific weight information
A wide selection of quality accessories are available through
your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. These accessories have • Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended
been specifically engineered to allow you to personalize
your vehicle to suit your requirements and complement its • Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications
style and aerodynamic appearance. like wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the
performance of safety systems
Each accessory is made from high quality materials and
• Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios,
meets Mahindra's rigid engineering and safety
telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with
specifications. Every Mahindra accessory installed according
radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should
to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the
comply with the local regulations and should be installed
respective accessory warranty.
only by your Mahindra Authorised Dealer and can
Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for detailed potentially affect the vehicle performance.
information about accessories available for your specific Vehicle Safety
model variant.
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
• Always remove the ignition key when you park the
For maximum vehicle performance and safety vehicle
considerations, always keep the following information in
mind: • In case of PKE, please lock and take the key fob with you
• The company shall not be liable / responsible for any • Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors
damages / injuries, including consequential damages /
injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorised • Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must
aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely
in the wiring harness When adding accessories, lock all the doors
equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do
not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of

1-4
When Sleeping in Your Vehicle gear. If the engine is turned off in the middle of the
intersection or railway crossing, get someone to help you
1. Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In and move the car to a safe place quickly.
particular, if you stay or sleep in the car with the
engine running and the air conditioner or heater Do not Switch off the Engine While Driving
turned on, you can suffocate to death
Do not switch off the engine while driving. Otherwise, it
2. Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running makes the steering wheel heavier, influence the brake
puts you at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts performance and consequently dangerous
3. While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear System Safety Mode : The protective measures including
shift lever or accelerator and thereby cause an illumination of engine warning lamp and reduced engine
accident power are taken (engine turned off in extreme case) when
4. While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you there is a critical fault in the system or a malfunction in the
may accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby major electrical or fuel system. This indicates the system
overheating the engine and exhaust pipe and causing entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s drive
a fire system.
Hazardous Materials: Do not store any flammable items or • If the safety mode is activated, pull over and stop the
disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In vehicle to a safe location immediately and contact your
hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire. Mahindra dealer. Then drive slowly or have the vehicle
towed to a Mahindra Authorised Dealer according to the
Fire Extinguisher: For safety, we strongly recommend that dealer’s instruction and have your vehicle checked by a
you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for Technician
use at any time. Be familiar with how to use it
• If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not
When Passing the Intersection or Railway Crossing maintained due to the fixed engine rpm and engine can
stop. But even more importantly, continued driving with
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the this state may damage the drive system
vehicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you
can while using low speed gear and without shifting the

Do Not Modify This Vehicle: If unauthorised modifications equipment might lead to damages or failures of the vehicle’s
are made on the vehicle, the company is not liable for systems.
repairing the modified parts even during the term of
warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are End of Line Disposal
also not covered.
Composition: Vehicle is made from steel, Aluminum, Lead,
• The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number Copper, Wood, other plastics & miscellaneous parts. These
of precision parts that have passed through countless materials are reusable by recycling them through a proper
experiments and tests. procedure. Some are hazardous to environment and living
beings to be disposed as per local pollution board
• These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. regulations.
Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without
authorization, may under perform or cause critical Disposal: As batteries are made of lead, lithium & Iron
damage to the vehicle and human life phosphate with solvents as electrolyte which are harmful.
They can impact on environment and are to be disposed as
Protecting Our Environment: As a responsible citizens, all per local pollution board regulations. Certain components
of us have an important role to play in protecting our of this vehicle such as seat belt pre-tensioner, airbag and
environment. Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring battery may contain hazardous material. Special handling
hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and may be required for service or vehicle end-of-life disposal.
lubrication fluids) are important steps towards this initiative.
Similarly ABS & other plastic panels, materials used are to
Body Repairs: If your vehicle is in a collision, contact be disposed to accredited agencies for recycling.
Mahindra Authorised Dealer to ensure that it is repaired
with Mahindra Genuine Parts. Mahindra has collision repair Most of other materials are reusable, hence components
centers that meet strict requirements for training, are to be segregated as per their composition as hazardous
equipment, quality, and customer satisfaction. Some repair and non-hazardous, disposed to accredited recycling
shops and insurance companies might suggest using non- agencies. Hence it is advised to contact Mahindra
original equipment to save money. However, these parts do Authorised Dealer for further information
not meet Mahindra’s high standards for quality, fit and
corrosion resistance. In addition, non-genuine parts or

1-6
1.5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 1.6 Engine Number
VIN Plate VIN Punch Petrol Diesel
MANUFACTURED BY
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.
xxxxxxxxxxx
x
MODEL
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
xxxxxxxx
VEHICLE SR. NO.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ENGINE NO
XXXXXXXXXX
The engine number is punched on the LHS face of the

crankcase adjacent to the water pump.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of
your vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped
on the VIN Table riveted on to the bottom of the B-Pillar on
the driver side. It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN
The vehicle identification number is also Punched on the
floor under the driver seat of vehicle. Flip the cutout
provided in the carpet to view the VIN Punch.
Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal

to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.

1.7 Front Overview
A B C D
A Front Windshield Wiper

B Front Camera Module*
C Skyroof TM *
D Ski Rack
E Fuel Lid
F Flush Outer Door Handle
G Turn Indicator/ ORVM Camera*
H Turn Indicator
I Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)*
J Head Lamp Low Beam
K Fog Lamp*
L Cornering Lamp*
M Head Lamp Booster*
N Tow Hook Cap
O Head Lamp High Beam
P Front Radar Module*

Q Front Camera (SVS)*
Q P O N
M M L K J I H G F E
W62A01 *- if equipped

1-8
1.8 Rear Overview
A B C D E F
A Outside Rearview Mirror (ORVM)

B Turn Indicator
C Rear Windshield / Demister*
G D High Mounted Stop Lamp
H E Roof Antenna
F Rear Wiper*
G Tail Lamp (Tail Door Side)
H Tail Lamp (Body Side)
I Stop Lamp
I
J Reverse Lamp
K Reflector
J L Tow Hook Cap
M Reverse Parking Assistance Sensors (RPAS)
N Registration plate Lamp
O Rear View Camera
P Temporary Spare Wheel
M P O N M L K
W62A02 *- if equipped

1.9 Instrument Panel/Door Trim Overview
A B C D A
B
C
CRUISE
SET+
VOL +
ENTER
SET-
RESUME
START
Cruise
ENGINE
STOP
3
2
1
+
SET
-
+ AUTO
A/C
G
MAX REAR
MODE
A/C
- A/C
OFF
NO OFF
USB
+ AUTO
G E
DUAL A/C
MAX REAR
MODE
A/C
- A/C
OFF
L
+
VOL
-
SEEK
F E D
ON OFF OFF
DRIVE
MODE F
K A Lighting Control Stalk
J I H B Driver Side Switch Bank*
C Power Seat Controls*
A Glove Box G Engine START/STOP Button* D Driver Door Switch Bank
B Infotainment Display H USB Ports E Accelerator/Brake/Clutch Pedal*
C Speakers I Rear USB Power Outlet F Driver Seat Lumber Adjustment*
D Steering Wheel J Wireless Charger G Cruise/Cluster Control Switches*
E Hood Opening Lever K Center Fascia Switch
W62A07 F Steering Control - Audio L HVAC Controls* *- if equipped

1-10
1.10 Roof Overview

With Skyroof Without Skyroof
D A A
E B B B
F C
C
G
D
H
E
I
A Switches On Roof Console Lamp F Skyroof Controls A Front Roof Lamp

B G B Sunvisor
Sunvisor Map Reading Lamp
C Front Roof Lamp H Grab Handle C Mic
D Sun Glass Holder I Skyroof TM D Grab Handle
W62A04 E Vanity Mirror Lamp J Speaker E Centre Roof Lamp

1.11 Alexa Reference Guide
Alexa Built-in Quick Start Guide for XUV700

When you activate Alexa Built-in voice technology in your XUV700 , you Things to try with Alexa
can ask to play music, listen to audio books, hear the news, check the
weather, control smart home devices, get directions, find parking, and
more - all with your voice, and all while you keep your hands on the “Alexa, find a nearby gas station.” “Alexa, call Mom.”
wheel and eyes on the road. The more you talk to Alexa, the more she
adapts to your personal speech patterns, vocabulary, and preferences.
Start using Alexa in your XUV700

“Alexa, play music.” “Alexa, what else can I do in my
Open the menu in your XUV700, go to Alexa > Alexa Settings vehicle?”
1 and press "Get Started". To use Alexa, you must sign in to
Amazon. Therefore got to amazon.com/code and enter the
displayed code on your head unit.
To discover more features, download the Alexa app on your phone.
Open the menu in your XUV700, go to Alexa > Alexa Settings
2 and press "Get Started". To use Alexa, you must sign in to
Amazon. Therefore got to amazon.com/code and enter the
displayed code on your head unit.
Required Equipment
How to disconnect Alexa Voice Services in your XUV700
• Mobile phone
• Active Amazon Account Open the dashboard menu and go to Alexa > Alexa Settings > Sign-out and click "Confirm".

1-12
1.12 ADRENOX Connect 1.12.2 Login & Registration

The Adrenox connect mobile app provides Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:
information in your mobile phone about location
& status of the vehicle and allows to control
certain vehicle features in a secured way for both
Android and iOS platform.
Kindly use the ADRENOX connect mobile app for connected
car related features. Phone Number
Password
1.12.1 KYC ( Know Your Customer) Registration Forgot Password?
To activate connected car features including access to Adrenox

mobile App, KYC process must be completed successfully.
Login
• Customer must produce valid mobile number,

communication address & email ID for KYC registration. for Sign Up
registration purpose. W62A15
• Preferred mobile number entered during the KYC process • You can select sign up option from login page which
will be the login for Adrenox mobile app. redirects to sign up page
• After successful KYC registration, customer must download • Then enter registered Mobile number given in KYC form
the “ADRENOX connect” mobile application from Google for connected services and click on Generate OTP
Play store or iOS app store.
• OTP with a validity will be sent to the same mobile
number
• If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by
clicking on "Resend OTP"

• After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account” Change your password
• On successful verification you will be notified with a To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:
message " Account Verified"
• Tap on the top Left corner from home screen
• You will be directed to "Terms and Condition" with "I
Agree" option on successful authentication • Click on My Account and select Change Password
• Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm
password fields
1.12.3 Forgot/Change Password and Change Pin
• Fill all the required field and tap on save button
This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and
change PIN.
In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to
create PIN and password.
Forgot your password

In case you forget your password:
• Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page
• In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number
for connected services and click on Generate OTP
• Enter the OTP and click on Next button

• Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save
button

1-14
1.12.4 ADRENOX connect Features
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Alerts
When your car exceeds the set speed limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert
Over Speed Alert
configuration in mobile application
High Engine Temperature Alert Alerts when Engine temperature beyond the predefined limit
Tyre Pressure Alert Alerts on excessive/very low and high tyre pressure and navigate to nearby petrol station
Alerts when vehicle park lamp left in ON condition while locking the vehicle
Lamp Status Alert Notifies when the vehicle park lamp is left in ON condition and helps to turn OFF remotely
via mobile application
Vehicle Start/Stop Alert Notifies when normal vehicle start /stop event is detected
Notifies when any of the doors open while vehicle is moving and also when you trigger for
Door Open Alert
door lock and the door remains open unintentionally
Alerts when your vehicle moves out of a set boundary area
Geo-Fence Alert Helps you to create virtual boundary for any region and will be notified whenever your
vehicle moves in or out of that boundary
Unauthorised vehicle entry Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected
Alert
Identifies low fuel level and notifies in your mobile application. Helps you to nearby fuel
Low Fuel Alert
station
Route Deviation Alert Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined path
Time Fencing Alert Notifies you when any movement of vehicle is detected during set time period

FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Notifies you whenever the driver/ co-driver is not wearing the seat belt during vehicle
Seat Belt Alert movement in mobile application
Driver Drowsiness Alert Alerts the user when the driver is detected to be drowsy while driving
Suggests in advance to renew the Insurance as expiry date of Insurance approaches
Insurance expiry Alert
Notifies you in advance when the insurance is about to expire
PUC expiry Alert Notifies you in advance when the PUC is about to expire
Alerts when engine idling is detected for a set period of time. Time can be configured in
Engine Idle Alert
mobile application
Location Based Service
GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any
point of time
Live tracking
Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when vehicle is in movement
Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time to your family and friends
Save Route / Save Place Provision to save a route /place
Find my car Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate your vehicle
Share my car location Share your car's location with friends and family
Push to car Allows the user to push routes/location from the mobile app to the vehicle
Sync location on SUV Provides updates of any upcoming event by syncing with the calendar
Ecosense Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip
Trip History Provides detailed information about the trips
Weekly Report Provides details about various vehicle parameters for a defined time period

1-16
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Trip Replay Provides glimpse of the trip in a form of a short video
Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Mahindra
Pit Stops
Dealership and so on
Read Vehicle Status
Check door status Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door
Check tyre pressure Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure
Check lamp status Allows the user to view the current status of the lamp
Check ODO Allows the customer to check the odometer of the vehicle
My SUV info Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant and so on
Check AC Status Allows the user to view the current status of the AC
Check Distance to empty Helps to check distance to empty range i.e. the distance can be covered with the available
fuel
Seat Belt Status Helps the user to check the Driver/Co-Driver seat belt is buckled or not
Safety
In case of accident, Emergency call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to With
E-Call You Hamesha & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location.
In case of SOS is initiated, SOS call will be triggered from vehicle, SMS will be sent to With
SOS Button You Hamesha & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location
Road Side Assistance Allows the user to reach out for help in case of vehicle breakdown
Remote Function
Remote Skyroof control Allows the user to remotely control Skyroof using mobile app
Remote Start/ Stop Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app

FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start
Remote Climate control using mobile app
Remote Window Up/Down Allows the user to remotely control the Driver window (with anti-pinch) using mobile app
Provide access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is
Remote Door Lock/Unlock stationary
Remote Lamp On/Off Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app
Locate my SUV Allows the user to remotely locate the vehicle by turning on the horn and lights
APK Features
Horoscope Allows the user to view daily fortune as per his/her zodiac sign.
Just dial Allows the user to search for various services using the Just Dial app in the infotainment
Allows the user to search for various restaurants and cuisines using Zomato app in the
Zomato
infotainment
India Today Allows the user to browse through news using India Today app in the infotainment
Weather Update Allows the user to view weather information using the Accuweather app in the
infotainment
Travel Explorer Allows the user to search for amusement places and more using the Travel Advisor app in
the infotainment
Others
Allows the user to know the Estimated Time of Arrival of your vehicle at your current
ETA
mobile location.
Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice
In-Home Alexa commands)

1-18
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet
Valet Mode parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234
Any Query / Enquiry about the product, Get info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car
Contact us model. Dealers will get back to the customer on details
Smart Home Control Allows the user to control the smart appliances via vehicle location
Maintains a systematic log of the all the fuel filling events and provides a clear
Log Book - Fuel(Fuel Diary)
representation of the fuel filled and the amount spent
mGreetings Greetings to the user on special occasions
Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any AdrenoX Connect app notification
Do-Not Disturb
when mobile is detected in the vehicle
Journey Planner Allows the user to plan a journey by providing some basic information
Request app Access Allows the user to share the vehicle access to two more users
My Documents Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance, PUC etc
Allows the user to connect the mobile app profiles with the vehicle profile thereby
Profile Manager
providing sync between both
Allows the user to create time based/location- based events that remind the user at the
To-do list specified time
Allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch
Smart Wearables (applicable for both Android and iOS)
Pick up Reminder Allows the user to create an event that reminds the user at the specified time
Service Booking Allows the user to schedule a service by directing to the With You Hamesha app
Alerts the user via a personalised beloved ones voice prompt when the vehicle crosses the
Personalised Safety Alert
speed limit

SEATS AND SAFETY
2 SEATS AND SAFETY • The top curve of the steering wheel should align with
your chin for ideal road visibility
2.1 Seats
• Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your
wrists rest on the steering wheel
Sitting in Correct Position
• Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully
0 depressing the clutch pedal
The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control

of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the clutch pedal),
steering wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and
your view of the instrument panel controls.
W12E01
Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey: Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion.
The seat movement may be more than expectation and
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine cause the driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator
pressed against the seat back or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control
of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust
• The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 5 the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary.
positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above
specified position, with the top of the head restraint even Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with
with the top of your head the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat
position adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move,
• Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or
steering wheel. Maintain at least a Ten inch (10") distance serious personal injury.
from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest

SEATS AND SAFETY
While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the Front Seat Recline
seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.
To adjust the seat back, lift
2.1.1 Front Seat the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat,
Front Seat Slide lean back, and release the
lever at the desired
position.
To return the seat back, lift
Move the seat forward or
the lever, lean forward and
backward by lifting the
release the lever.
adjustment lever located
under the seat front and
release once the desired
position is reached. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear
collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.
If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and
apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or the shoulder
While adjusting the seat, make sure the latch engages fully strap may contact your neck.
and the seat is locked firmly in the desired position. An The more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of serious
unlocked seat may move in a sudden stop or collision, injury.
causing injury to the person in that seat. Push and pull on
the seat to be sure it is locked.
When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright

position, make sure you support the seat back while operating
the lever.

2-2
SEATS AND SAFETY
Front Seat Height Adjustment Driver Seat Lumbar Adjustment (if equipped)
The driver seat back

features lumbar
The driver seat height can adjustment. The lumbar
be raised or lowered with contour of the lumbar
the help of height adjust support can be adjusted by
handle. means of the adjusting
wheel on the outer side of
the seat cushion.
To RAISE the seat height, operate the seat height adjust Properly adjusted lumbar support provides adequate back
handle in the upward direction. Repeat this till the desired support essential during long journeys.
height is achieved.
To LOWER the seat height, push down the seat height adjust
handle while seated in the driver seat. Repeat this operation Do not use force, rotate the lumbar adjustment knob
until the desired seat height is reached beyond the extreme stop positions in either direction.
Do not adjust the height of seat while vehicle is in motion.

SEATS AND SAFETY
Power Seat with Memory (Driver Side only) (if equipped) Memory function- Storing seat position
The power seat switches Turn Ignition ON and adjust

are provided on the driver the seat to your desired
door panel. The Power seat position. Press the M button
3
provides advanced 6-way 3 followed by desired memory
2
electrical adjustments for 2 button (1,2 or 3) within 3
1
the driver seat. 1 seconds. This will store your
M
Lift Recline M preferred seating position to
Slider
memory, and you will get
acoustic confirmation
(Chime) from cluster.
It is equipped with electrically-operated power slider, power
recliner and power height adjustment mechanisms. The Memory function – Restoring seat position
shape of the switches guide you to the function it has been
In Ignition ON condition, user needs to press and hold any
assigned.
restore button (1,2 or 3) shall take the seat to previously stored
During vehicle running, Power seat movement is allowed for memory location and you will get acoustic confirmation
short duration considering user safety. If you need further (Chime) from cluster.
seat movement, release and press the switch once again. In Ignition OFF condition, short pressing/Press and hold any
restore button (1,2 or 3) shall take the seat to previously stored
memory location. During memory restore operation, pressing
any seat switch shall stop ongoing seat movement.
During memory restore operation, pressing any seat switch

shall stop ongoing seat movement.

2-4
SEATS AND SAFETY
Easy Entry and Easy Exit

The Driver seat is equipped with easy entry and exit • Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is
function. This helps user to enter and exit the vehicle by stationary, otherwise there is a risk of accident. The seat
moving the seat backwards and downwards automatically in should be adjusted so that the brake/ clutch pedal can
Ignition OFF and driver door open conditions. This can be be pressed fully.
enabled or disabled through the infotainment
• Be cautious when adjusting the seat, you may suffer
injuries without paying proper attention while adjusting
seat.
In Easy Entry and Easy Exit function, when the door is closed,
seat will go back to the same position as it was before opening • Driver side electric seat can be adjusted in ignition off
the door. also, children should never be left unattended in the
vehicle, as there is a risk of injury!
Activation and deactivation:
• Power seats will be operated even when the ignition
switch is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to
prevent battery discharge, we suggest that you adjust
your seats when the engine is running
• Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if
the seat comes in contact with any other object and
cannot be adjusted anymore.
• If the power seats are not operational, the seats should
be checked and fixed before driving
Go to Vehicle Setting in Infotainment system, Enter Access • Easy Entry/Exit function once enabled, remains active
tab, Enable or disable Easy Entry and Easy exit feature by until it is disabled. Be cautious during this operation as
taping sliding bar. the rear seat passenger could get injured.

SEATS AND SAFETY
• Do not put any luggage/water bottles below driver seat 2.1.2 Second Row Seats
as they can obstruct power seat movement or damage
seat mechanism/motor Second row seat is of 60:40 split configuration and also has
a foldable armrest.
• Do not remove vehicle battery while seat is in motion
Ergo Lever (Only Co-Driver Seat) (If equipped)
The Co-Driver Seat is

equipped with an Ergo
lever. This lever enables
you to move the
unoccupied Co-Driver seat
forward, in order to
increase the leg room
behind the Co-Driver seat.
Loading luggage on the seats is dangerous. The luggage can

In order to do this, while seated on the Driver seat/2nd Row become a projectile that could hit and injure passengers in
seat, operate the Ergo lever located on the backrest of the a sudden stop or collision. Luggage should always be kept
Codriver seat and push the seat forward manually. on the floor.
Do not operate the Ergo lever when someone is occupying To avoid serious injury, do not sit on or place objects on a
the Co-Driver seat. Doing so may cause injury to the Co- folded seat back while the vehicle is moving.
Driver since their leg can go and hit the instrument panel.

2-6
SEATS AND SAFETY
Second Row Seat Recline (if equipped) Second Row Seat Folding (Third Row Seat Entry/Exit Access)
The second row 40P seat can be tumbled forward to provide

To change the second row access to the Third Row Seat.
seat back angle, lean
forward slightly while
raising the recline lever on
the side of the seat cushion, • Operate the lever on the
lean back to the desired side of the seat. This
position and release the lever actuates the one-
recline lever. touch fold and tumble
mechanism of the 40P
seat.
Make sure the recline lever returns to its original position
and the seat back is locked in place by rocking the seat back
forward/ backward.
When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright

position, make sure you support the seat back while
operating the lever.
• To tumble the Second Row 40P seat while sitting on the

Third Row seat, pull the lever behind the 40P backrest.

SEATS AND SAFETY
• In order to use the 2nd Row Seat to load cargo, first If this happens, release the seat lock by pulling the lever and
tumble the seat as explained above. Then, push the seat repeat the procedure.
downward of the vehicle (>45 kg) until the two latches Be cautious when placing your hands around the seat
underneath the seat lock onto the floor. anchors. You could pinch your hands or fingers between the
seat anchor and the seat. Hold the edge of the seat when
lowering it into place. Never place your hands between the
seat anchor and the seat
To avoid Personal injury keep legs away from the seat

anchor when relatching the seat back to the fold position.
• To tumble the seat from the back folded (cargo)

condition, first make the seat back upright. Then operate
the one-touch fold and tumble lever.
The seat tumble mechanism cannot be operated when the

seat is in the folded position. W62D26
Return the seat back to its upright position in one

continuous motion to securely lock the seat and in turn
avoiding seat flipping forward suddenly leading to injuries

2-8
SEATS AND SAFETY
Second Row Seat Folding (For Luggage) Second Row Armrest (If equipped)
The 2nd Row 60P seat back The Second Row 60P seat features armrest with cup holder.
can be folded to load cargo • To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the
on top of it. Operate the top of the armrest (as shown).
lever on the side of the 60P
seat. This lever actuates the • When armrest is not required, push back the armrest
backrest fold mechanism. into the 60P backrest.
Release the lever once the
backrest has folded
completely.
To bring the seat back to upright position and push the seat
back until it locks into the desired reclining position.

SEATS AND SAFETY
Second Row Bench Seat (If equipped) 2.1.3 Third Row Seats (If equipped)
The second row seat can be folded forward to increase
luggage space. Access to or exit from third
row seat is possible by
• Pull the strap rearwards to unlock the seat back as shown completely folding the
in below image second row seat. Second
• Then push the backrest forwards to fold it. row seat features 60:40
split configuration. The
• To open the seat back, simply pull the backrest rearwards Second row 40P seat can be
until it gets locked in position. tumbled to gain access to
third row seat.
Refer to the previous sections for details regarding folding

of second row seats.
Third Row Seat Folding
To fold the third row seat, unlock the seat back by pulling
the lever on the rear of the seat back outwards. Then push
the seat back forward to fold the seat.
Similarly, lower the other half of third row seat to get a
completely flat surface. Both the second row and third row
seats can be folded flat to maximise the luggage space.

2-10
SEATS AND SAFETY
To Fold To Open
Always align top of the
head restraint with the top
of your head or as close to
it as possible. To raise the
head restraint, pull the
restraint up.
To lower the head restraint, press the lock knob and push the
head restraint down. The head restraint can be pulled out
completely by depressing the locking button while pulling the
To open the seat back, pull on the lever to unlock the backrest restraint out. Align the head restraint shafts over the holes on
and use the same lever to lift the backrest upward till it locks at the seat top and push the restraint straight down till you hear
the rear most position. When loading bigger pieces of luggage the lock click. Keep the seat back as upright as possible so the
behind the third row seat, the backrest can be locked at a more headrest is behind, not beneath, and almost touching your
upright position using the same lever. There are 6 locking head.
positions at 2 degree interval each. This provides seating space
for the 3rd row occupant as well as provides a slightly
increased volume for storing luggage.
Never drive with the head restraints not properly adjusted,
head restraints removed or inserted in a flipped condition.
2.2 Head Restraint With no support behind your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
The head restraint comprises the padded portion which
contacts your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the
top of the seat back. Vehicle seats are equipped with head
restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these Head restraints are provided for the front row and second row
head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of rear outboard & 3rd row occupants only.
collision.

SEATS AND SAFETY
2.3 Seat Belt • Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible,

consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the
2.3.1 General Warnings and Instructions seat.
At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any
cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the
edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be
sure they are tight and operational.
• All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their
seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize
U22E11
U22E10
the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an
accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and
can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.
• In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more • The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for
likely prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt adults must be properly used and maintained.
• In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up • For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to
straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The section of manual for child seat positions and use a child
lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just restraint systems
touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat
belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your • Passengers should not move out of or change seats while
chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the
neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the
your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of
and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.
pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you • Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any
and the seat belt. Improperly worn of a seat belt will reduce way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve
the protection in an accident. occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the

2-12
SEATS AND SAFETY
protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving.
of serious injury in a crash During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the
sudden forward movement of the wearer
• An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt
system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Prevention of seat belt Slow retraction:
Mahindra Authorised Dealer inspect the seat belt system
after an accident 1. Check if there any twist on in-board or out-board side of
safety belt.
• Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle,
such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop 2. Check if dust accumulated on outer parts such as
or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an Webbing , D-Loop, Tongue stopper and Tongue.
accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the
vehicle 3. Remove the dust from D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue &
Tongue stopper by compressed air or air blower.
4. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning
Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt safety belt parts D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue
will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious stopper. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could
injury. damage the seat belt assembly.
• Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not 5. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance. Safety
indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid
damage
belt assembly cleaning required if seat belt retraction
becomes very slow due to dust and soil accumulation on
• Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become safety belt assembly, then below cleaning procedure to be
difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need followed:
cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water.
Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These 1. Appropriate Procedure of disassembly of all pyrotechnic
chemicals will severely weaken the belts devices to be followed for pretensioner seat belt. The
Battery terminal to be removed before disassembly of
• Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts pretensioner, otherwise there will be error codes registered
when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the in Airbag ECU and Airbag ECU will show malfunction.

SEATS AND SAFETY
2. Open Pillar trims and take out Seat belt assembly on 10. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance.
bench by carefully disassembly of connector and Lap
Pretensioner/ Anchor wire assembly (if equipped). Kindly Seat Belts - Patients: Persons with serious medical
follow correct safety belt pretensioner handling procedure conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for
in case of pretensioner safety belts. Use clean and lint free specific recommendations before travel.
cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt assembly. Do Seat Belts - Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also
not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids could damage the wear seat belts. Consult your doctor for specific
Seat belt webbing and other parts. recommendations.
3. If seat belt movement is sticky due to dust accumulation.
Then please contact the dealer for help in cleaning. The lap belt should be worn
snugly and as low as possible
4. In case of soiling on the belt, use a mild soap solution over the hips. The shoulder
consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 liter of belt should be worn across
lukewarm water. your shoulder, but never
across the stomach area.
5. Care to be taken to prevent contact of soap water with When worn properly, the
Pretensioner . seat belt will protect both the
mother and the foetus in an
6. Clean dust accumulated on D-Loop, Webbing and overall W12E22
accident or emergency stop.
assembly by close inspection of D-Loop and Webbing using
lint free cloth.
7. After cleaning safety belt they should be dried by lint free
dry cloth. A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across
the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the
8. After cleaning kindly inspect Webbing movement through foetus and/or the pregnant mother.
D-Loop slot for any sticky movement of webbing . Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be
9. Assemble the safety belt using correct torque. Re- transferred from the belt to the wearer, in a collision,
assemble all trim parts. resulting in serious personal injury.

2-14
SEATS AND SAFETY
Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using 2.3.2 Seat Belt Configuration
one seat belt for more than one person at a time is
dangerous. The seat belt will not be able to absorb the
impact forces properly leading to serious injuries. To protect you and your
Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the passengers in the event of
occupant's lap. This could lead to serious injuries. an accident, it is highly
recommended that the seat
Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to: belts should be used by all
occupants inside of your
• Reduce the possibility of being out from your vehicle vehicle.
during an accident.
• Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower Seat Belt Types with respect to Location
body and legs during an accident
• Hold the driver in a position which allows better control Seat Location Seat Belt Type
of the vehicle
Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner &
Children who are too large for child restraint systems Driver Seat load limiter (RPLL), & Anchor
should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat Pretensioner
belts. The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner &
and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be rout Co-Driver Seat load limiter (RPLL)
across the child's shoulder, not across neck or face. If you Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor
are unable to position the belt across the child's shoulder, 2nd Row LH (40P)
(ELR)
the child should be seated in a booster seat. Frequently
check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor
2nd Row RH (60P) (ELR) & Lap Seat belt
position. A squirming child could cause the seat belt to
come out of position. Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor
3rd Row LH / RH (ELR)

SEATS AND SAFETY
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely
extend and retract with occupant movement, yet locks the This vehicle is provided with
belt during a sudden stop or upon impact. a anchor pretensioner for
driver seat (in the sill board
Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL): A area) and is used to help to
pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of protect occupant in the
a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat Seat belt Pretensioner
sever crash events .
belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount Seat belt Anchor
Pretensioner
W62D59
they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal
crash.
Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling
Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted down of the metallic cable and removes slack in in seat belt.
injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains the
occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this
point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as
To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action
not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.
of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder
keeping it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the
2.3.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner seat belt on pelvis.
In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not
locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same
driver’s and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the position with impact direction will be deployed together
driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt with side air bag
pretensioner combined with the seat belt and airbag further Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again.
increases safety. Have the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an
Authorised dealer.

2-16
SEATS AND SAFETY
Operation of pretensioner protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they
do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
When a severe frontal

impact occurs, seat belt
pretensioners pull back the • Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat
seat belts immediately to belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a
restrain the occupants to collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle
their seats.
• Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull
Y4C028 the webbing out of the retract
Operation of load limiter

• Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a
time
• Seat belts and airbag’s can significantly minimise
possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly
After frontal collision, the protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury
load limiter releases the • Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety
seat belt to prevent the systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems
occupant from being including seat belts should be checked and repaired by
injured due to belt force. only a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service
centre
Y4C030
• An infant or small child should always be restrained in

Fastening the seat belt an infant or child restraint
Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in
case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can

SEATS AND SAFETY
2.3.4 Fastening the Seat Belt (3-Point type) Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it
remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock
(restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the

ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp
W12E23
illuminates and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened.
Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “Instrument Cluster Features”
chapter for further details.
2.3.5 Fastening the Seat Belt (2-Point Lap type)
CORRECT SEAT BELT

POSITIONING
W12E24
Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in

the seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of CORRECT SEAT BELT
POSITIONING
CORRECT SEAT BELT
POSITIONING
the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. An
audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the
buckle. Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt
across your hips. The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack This seat belt is applicable to the second row middle
in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the passenger seat. Insert the tongue into the buckle until it
belt to extend and let you move your body around freely. snaps. Position the lap belt on the hips as low as possible.

2-18
SEATS AND SAFETY
2.3.6 Seat Belt Release (both 3-Point & 2 Point) 2.3.7 Driver Seat Belt Reminder Indication
The driver seat belt reminder warning symbol

lamp will blink in instrument cluster if driver
doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be
continuous until belt is buckled. Chime will be activated
when vehicle travels more than 500 metres or attains 25
PR
ES
Kms/Hrs of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be
S
ON for 95 seconds
CORRECT SEAT BELT CORRECT SEAT BELT
POSITIONING POSITIONING
2.3.8 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS)

& Seat Belt Reminder Indication
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and
allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract
smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
PODS detects the presence
of occupant in the
Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may passenger seat.
PODS Sensor
prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause
damage to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat
belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal W62D69
injury.
If Occupant is present on passenger seat and
not wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder
warning symbol lamp will glow on the center
fascia switch provided in vehicle instrument
panel and will be continuous until the seat belt is buckled. It

SEATS AND SAFETY
should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight 2.3.9 Seat Belt Height Adjuster
hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with
this warning symbol, a Chime in Cluster will be ON for 95
seconds. Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also You can adjust the height of
may deteriorate the detection senor performance, don’t use the shoulder belt anchor
the non recommended/non authorized seat covers. for maximum comfort and
safety of both front seats. If
the height of the seat belt is
Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may too near your neck, you will
glow in case of child is present in passenger seat. not be getting the most
effective protection.
Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without
child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is
designed to harness person taller than 140cm Always The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that
ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder
on passenger seat.We strongly urge that children should be nearest to the door and not your neck.
in middle row using the child seats with the ISO FIX
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise
the height adjuster to an appropriate position while
pressing the height adjuster button. Release the button to
lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster
to make sure that it has locked into the position.
Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat.
Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.

2-20
SEATS AND SAFETY
2.4 Child Restraint System (CRS)
How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor/ISOFIX Rods • When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system (rod), all unused
vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched
1. ISOFIX Marking gjkkllool 2. Latch anchor/ISOFIX rod securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing
must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking hold of un-retracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to
reach the un-retracted seat belts which may result in
• The ISOFIX lower latch strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the
anchors (rods) are child restraint.
located in rear seats
bottom position. Their • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only
locations are shown in those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under
the illustration no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts,
harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the
W52E18
vehicle
• Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor
lower latch anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat
installation manual.
• Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child
restraint There are two top tether
rods/rear anchors on the
ISOFIX system is a standardized method of fitting child seats seat base back side of the
that eliminates the need to use the standard adult Seat belt rear row front facing seats.
to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more
secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier
and quicker installation. W62D25
1. Remove the headrest from the rear row seat

SEATS AND SAFETY
2. Place the child restraint on the rear row seat • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child
3. Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the restraints
top tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child
restraint by adjusting the webbing of the child • The tether strap may not work properly if attached
restraint system (CRS) tether connector. Follow the somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear
clear instructions provide in the CRS manual anchor provided on seat back.
• Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of
rear row seat which is not the correct methods and may
• The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to cause risk.
secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the
ISOFIX rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the • Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed.
child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to child restraint.
break, causing serious injury or death. • Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders
• If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle the operations of front seat which may cause problem to
and a child is not properly restrained in the child front occupants.
restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in
a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installation
• Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are
Firmly latched to the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. In this
case, you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications
provided on seat.
• Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an
unexpected personal injury.

2-22
SEATS AND SAFETY
Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Seating Positions
TYPE B
TYPEA
Y4C048 Y4C049 Y4C050 Y4C051
Seating position
Rear Intermediate
Mass group Restraint Device Figure Front Rear Outboard Intermediate
Outboard
Passenger Centre Second row Centre
(LH/RH)
LH/RH
Group 0
Rear Facing Child Seat X X X UF/IUF X
Up to 10 kg
Group 0+
Rear Facing Child Seat X X X UF/IUF X
Up to 13 kg
Group I
Forward Facing Child Seat X X X UF/IUF X
9 to 18 kg
Group II
15 to 25 kg Booster Seat X X X UF/IUF X
Group III
22 to 36 kg Booster Seat X X X UF/IUF X

SEATS AND SAFETY
Table of Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions
TYPE B
TYPEA
Y4C048 Y4C049 Y4C050 Y4C051
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX
Positions
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions

Mass group Size Class Fixture
Rear out board
F ISO/L1 X
Carry cot (Newborn Baby)
G ISO/L2 X
Group 0: up to 10 kg (~9 months) E ISO/R1 IL/IU
E ISO/R1 IL/IU
Group 0+: up to 13 kg (~0 – 2 years) D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 X
D ISO/R2 IL
C ISO/R3 X
Group I 09 to 18 kg (~9 months – 4 years) B ISO/F2 IUF
B1 ISO/F2X IUF
A ISO/F3 IUF

2-24
SEATS AND SAFETY
Key of letters be inserted in the above table Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation
category approved for use in this mass group. instructions provided in manual carefully before use.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). Anchorage Location
These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or
‘semi-universal’ categories.
IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with
ISOFIX & Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg.
X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this ISOFIX
mass group and/or this size class.

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint
System (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint
Top Tether
System (height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape
Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm) Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint shown in the figure.
System
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint
System
Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System
F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System
• Never transport them unless they are properly restrained
(carry-cot) • Use restrained system which meet safety standard
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System
(carry-cot) • Follow directions provided by the manufacturer

SEATS AND SAFETY
Warning for Child Restraint procedure and use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the booster seat.
• Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for
better safety of your child. Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage
• Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and • The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the
property damage due to the defect of child restraint supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after
system. engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the
child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The
• Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break,
the weight and size for your baby. causing serious injury or death.
• Use the child restraint system at recommended seating • If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a
location only and follow the instructions. child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child
could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow
• Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation.
below:
• Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched
1 GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10 KG 4 GROUP II : 15 ~ 25 KG to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound
and color indications.
2 GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13 KG 5 GROUP III : 22 ~ 36 KG
• The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached
3 GROUP I : 9 ~ 18 KG somewhere other than the correct seat back anchor provided
on the rear seat base back side behind the seat carpet. Follow
• Group 0 & 0 + : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the the instructions provided on the seat back for the details of
rear seat (use of ISOFIX with Base & Support Leg is anchor location.
recommended).
• Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by
• Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear rocking it in different directions.
seat (use of ISOFIX & Top Tether is recommended).
• Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an
• Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with unexpected personal injury.
seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation

2-26
SEATS AND SAFETY
2.5 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Airbags
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, Your vehicle has the following airbags:
pre-tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to
provide further protection to the vehicle occupants in A: Knee airbag for the
addition to the primary protection provided by the seat driver (if equipped)
belts and seat belt pre-tensioners. E
B: Front Passenger Airbag
E
The primary components of the system are the sensors C: Driver Airbag
which measure the crash severity. In the event of a D
significant frontal impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in C
B D:Two side (seat) impact
D
conjunction with the seat belts and help reduce injuries airbags (if equipped)
mainly to the driver's or front passenger's head/chest. A E: Two curtain airbags (if
W62B03
equipped)
Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An

airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the 2.5.1 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag
seat belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint
All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their
System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
seat belts irrespective of presence of airbag to minimise the
and front passenger seating positions. The indications of the
risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.
system's presence are the letters “SRS AIRBAG” embossed
Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the
belts are worn. passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is
less than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the
vehicle.

SEATS AND SAFETY
Driver Airbag
Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag
and yourself. It cause injuries.
2.5.2 Knee Airbag (If equipped)

SET+
VOL +
ENTER
SET-
RESUME
START
ENGINE
STOP
3
2
1
The driver’s knee airbag is located on the dashboard under the
steering wheel
REAR
A/C ECON
A/C
NO OFF W12F01
START
ENGINE
USB STOP
Front Passenger Airbag 3

2
1
REAR
A/C ECON
A/C
SET+
VOL + ENTER
SET-
RESUME
START
ENGINE
STOP
3
2
1
NO OFF
+ AUTO DUAL
A/C
MODE
MAX
- REAR
REAR
OFF
A/C ECON
A/C A/C
A/C
USB
DRIVE
NO OFF OFF MODE
USB
SET+
VOL +
ENTER
SET-
RESUME
START
ENGINE
STOP
3
2
1
If the driver’s posture is improper while driving, the knee air bag
REAR
A/C ECON
A/C
NO OFF W12F02
might not protect the driver’s knee area when the airbag deployed.
USB
Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear

impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not
deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed
deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.

2-28
SEATS AND SAFETY
2.5.3 Side Impact Airbag (If equipped) your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be
seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.
Your vehicle is equipped
with side impact airbag in
both the front seats. The • In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be
purpose of the airbag is to deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the
provide the vehicle's driver collision occurs
and/or the front passenger
with additional protection • The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt
during side impacts or systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat
belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
collisions.
The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions
severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle
occupants
• For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to
avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all
seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat
belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on
the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The
passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps
• Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could
reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system
The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain
side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, • Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side
speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in impact airbag
the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat
belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags
• Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag
and yourself
inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of

SEATS AND SAFETY
• Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact
airbag inflates
Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag
inflation
An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash.

Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front airbags • In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed
independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the
necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an accident. collision occurs
• In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best

2.5.4 Side Curtain Airbag (If equipped) protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear
occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts
The side curtain air bags are contained between right above properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper
the front and rear doors and the end of the vehicle roof. child restraint system in the rear seat
The Side Curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails • When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must
on the A & B pillars. They are designed to help protect the heads of be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to
the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in position the child restraint system as far away from the door
certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbag are designed to side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a
deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. locked position
The curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in all side impact
situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in
• Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto
doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when
rollover situations.
they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain
airbag

2-30
SEATS AND SAFETY
2.5.5 Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation If your select Airbag ON/OFF the following indicator will
appear.
The passenger air bag activation/deactivation option is
available in instrument cluster menu. Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator
Select Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation option in This Warning indicator glows on center fascia
SETTINGS menu to activate/deactivate (not inflatable) the switch on IP when passenger airbag “OFF”
front passenger airbag as per below reference images position.
Passenger Airbag ON Indicator
A This Warning indicator symbol glows on center
CRUISE
B fascia switch on IP when selecting the

+
passenger airbag “ON” option to enable the
SET
C passenger airbag.
-
D
RESUME
2.5.6 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp
Airbags do not require any regular

maintenance or service. The airbag system
malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition
3 is ON, and it turns OFF after about two seconds
2 as self check confirming normal operations of airbag system
1 and malfunction lamp.
This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors,
indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.

SEATS AND SAFETY
If either of the following conditions occur, there is a thorough inspection of the airbag and seat belt systems, no
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could
Immediately contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. have been damaged, and may not work as intended in the
future, resulting in serious injury.
• The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON
or glows beyond six (6) seconds after switching the
ignition ON 2.5.7 Airbag Inflation/Deployment
• The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward
• The lamp comes ON intermittently deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward
deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the
system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical
reaction which quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.
Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could
affect the performance of airbag system. In particular, Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad
changes to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the
fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, airbags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of
seats or steering wheel (especially covers, pads or other the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a
trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the
need to make any modifications to accommodate any passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and
disability you may have, please contact your Mahindra chest injury.
Authorised Dealer..
After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts
Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility
cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not and the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.
function as intended. Take the vehicle to an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer. Deployment of the airbags happen in a milliseconds,
producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and
Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take residue along with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a
your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some

2-32
SEATS AND SAFETY
time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and
or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also
water as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's
irritation. Exit the vehicle as soon as possible after the hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the
accident. airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight
and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back
as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still
Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break. allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle
The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the
seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other
parts of the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is
• Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre- moving.
tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area
or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden
operation of the system or disable the system, which
could result in serious injury
• Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag
cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after
deployment. The airbags inflate only once
• Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats
with any object (e. g. dash panel covers, seat covers)
which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly The driver or front passenger who is too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during
• The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the airbag deployment.
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to
the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe
injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are

SEATS AND SAFETY
• Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted

occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates.
• The driver must sit as far Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and
back as possible from the occupant safety contained in this manual
steering wheel while still
maintaining control of the • Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats
vehicle could interfere with the operation of the supplemental
restraint system or side impact airbags
W12F03
• Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under
• The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the the front seats could interfere with the operation of the
dashboard supplemental restraint system sensing components and
wiring harnesses
• Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to
be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious 2.5.8 Child Restraint and Airbag
injury
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat
• Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, protected by an airbag in front of it
on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs
comfortably extended and your feet on the floor In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the
front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag
• All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the
inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
seat belts
• All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the
vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by following position. On the front passenger’s sun visor
seat belts
• Front airbags can injure occupants who are improperly
positioned in the front seats

2-34
SEATS AND SAFETY
2.5.9 Airbag Deployment
The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose

only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.
Front Airbag
Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision
protected by an airbag in front of it! depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the
Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front front collision.
passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could
be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and children
should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or
seat belts in the rear seat.
Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats, and
securely lock the child restraint system in position with the help of
ISOFIX. CORRECT SEAT BELT
POSITIONING
Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest place
for children of any age to ride.

SEATS AND SAFETY
2.5.10 Airbag Non-deployment Frontal Side Swipe Impact:
Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the
cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases: deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.
Collision with Utility Poles or Trees : In an angled collision, the

force of impact may direct
Airbags may not inflate if the occupants in a direction
the vehicle collides with where the airbags would
objects such as utility poles not be able to provide any
or trees, where the point of additional benefit, and thus
impact is concentrated to the sensors may not deploy
one area and the full force any airbags.
of the impact is not
delivered to the sensors.
Under-ride Situations :
Frontal Impact : Running under a truck's tailgate may not provide the
decelerations necessary for airbag deployment.
300
Frontal impact beyond 30º
range from head-on to the Airbags will not inflate in
vehicle. this “under-ride” situation
300 where deceleration forces
that are detected by
sensors are significantly
low.

2-36
SEATS AND SAFETY
Rear-end Collisions : Rollover:
Frontal airbags are not Airbags will not inflate in

designed to inflate in rear rollover accidents where
collisions, where occupants airbag deployment would
are moved backward away not provide protection to
from the airbags by the the occupants. However,
force of the impact. In this side impact and curtain
case, inflated airbags would airbags may inflate only
not be able to provide any when severe side impact
additional benefit. causes rollover.
Potholes or Stepped Surfaces :
Driving into a big pothole,

stepped surface or hitting
the far side of a hole/incline
will not inflate the airbag.

SEATS AND SAFETY
2.5.11 Airbag Service
Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the

airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally
deploy causing serious injuries, or will not deploy when there is
a need. Always take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer for inspection and repairs.
Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend

removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag
related parts or sensors by any individual or garages which are
not recommended. Airbags could accidentally activate and
cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy when there is a
need. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Dealer if these parts must
be removed.
Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle

with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach an
Mahindra Authorised Dealer to do these jobs.
Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel

airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed,
the vehicle should be towed to the nearest Mahindra
Authorised Dealer for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or
reinstall the cover.
Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas,

use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with
plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the
airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.

2-38
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES
3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES 3.1 Instrument Cluster Overview
Type 1

Type 2
A B C D E
04:20 AM Drive Info 18 oc

3 4 100 120
Trip - A 80 140
X 1000 rpm km/h
2 5 60 160
Distance 8888.8km
40 180
1 6 Time 88:88hr
Avg. Speed 220km/h 20 200
ENGINE!
7
Hold : Reset 220
999999km
E F 5 C H
I H G F
A Tacho Gauge C Trip Computer E Speedo Gauge G Odometer I Fuel Gauge
B Time D OAT F Temperature Gauge H Gear Shift Indicator

3-2
3.1.1 Speedometer Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime when the
vehicle speed reaches 120 kmph and chime will continue playing
High Low until vehicle speed is reduced to 114 kmph. Below this speed
primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 kmph.
3.1.2 Tachometer
High Low
The speedometer indicates actual vehicle speed in

kilometers per hour.
The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used. If the

size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the factory, the
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of
speedometer might not display the correct road surface speed and RPM (revolutions per minute). Each division is 1000 RPM.
distance travelled. Operating the engine at very high RPM may lead to
excessive engine wear and low fuel economy. Maintain
Over Speed Alert Buzzer steady engine speed below 2500 RPM and do not accelerate
or decelerate abruptly.
Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 2 minutes
when the vehicle speed reaches 80 kmph. once primary level
chime is triggered, it will continue playing until speed is reduced to
76 kmph or goes beyond 120 kmph.

The fuel level gauge functions only when the ignition is switched
ON. It gives the status of the fuel level in the fuel tank. F indicates
Do not over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause severe the tank is full (60 +/- 2 liters), E indicates the tank is empty.
engine damage and would be treated as abuse of the engine which is
not covered by warranty. When the fuel level reaches the reserve, the last bar will be
displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 12 liters). when
the fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display
and low fuel telltale will be blinking . The amount of fuel required
Tacho red band range: to fill the tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a
Gasoline 5500 - 7000 rpm small amount of reserve fuel always remains in the tank.
Diesel 5000 - 7000 rpm On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the
fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual.
Diesel (High Variant): Tacho red band shall change based on Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the
engine parameters last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient
fuel, contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as possible.
3.1.3 Fuel Level Gauge
High 3 4 04:20 AM Low Drive Info 18 oc When100 all

120 the bars in the display starts blinking/flashing,
80
contact 140
X 1000 rpm Trip - A km/h the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the
2 5 60 160
Distance 8888.8km earliest.
40 180
1 6 Time 88:88hr It is highly recommended to start the fueling at ignition OFF
Avg. Speed 220km/h 20 condition and turn on the ignition only when fueling is
200
ENGINE!
7
Hold : Reset finished to get correct fuel level.
220
999999km
IGN ON fuel filling may lead to inconsistency and can cause
E F 5 C H for DTE fluctuation.

3-4
3.1.4 Temperature Gauge burns. Wait for the engine to cool down before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
The engine coolant temperature gauge functions only when the Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated engine. This will
ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine lead to damage of engine components and engine seizure.
coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes
in weather, load on engine and driving pattern.
3.1.5 Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped)
If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward “H”
mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage the
engine. Allow engine to cool. In such situations switch OFF the AC
and observe any improvements in the temperature gauge. If not,
stop the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. Check the This Screen shows the
coolant level in the coolant reservoir and top-up if required. If the outside ambient
engine is still overheating, contact your nearest Mahindra temperature and we can
Authorised Dealer. change units based on
infotainment setting.
High
3 4 04:20 AM Low
Drive Info 18 oc 100 120
Trip - A 80 140
X 1000 rpm km/h
2 5 60 160
Distance 8888.8km
40 180
1 6 Time 88:88hr 3.1.6 Gear Information
ENGINE!
7
Hold : Reset Gear information
220 shows the actual gear the vehicle is
999999km currently in.
E F 5 C H
Based on the various parameters, it will also provide an up
shift / down shift recommendation for better fuel economy.
Never remove the Degassing tank cap when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and could splash on to skin/eyes causing severe

Type 1 Type 2 Operating 3.2 Drive Mode (If equipped)

3 4 04:20 AM Drive Info 18 oc Conditions
100 120
2 X 1000 rpm
5
Trip - A
60
80
UP/DOWN 140
km/h
160
8888.8km
1 6
Distance
Time 88:88hr 40 arrows 180
Avg. Speed 220km/h 20 recommend 200 to Drive modes shall change

ENGINE!
7
Hold : Reset
999999km up shift 220

/ down driving characteristics by
E F 5 C H shift the drive changing elements such as
gear. Engine power, Traction
control, Climate control and
Steering weight settings.
3.1.7 Odometer
The odometer records and displays the total distance The vehicle has selectable drive modes like Zip, Zap, Zoom
travelled in Km. Odometer cannot be reset. and Custom which have their own distinct pre-set
configurations. The selection of drive mode is made via
Type
3 1 4 04:20 AM Type 2
Drive Info 18 oc 100dedicated
120 button or switches.
Trip - A 80 140
X 1000 rpm km/h
2 5 60 160
Distance 8888.8km Drive selection menu part of infotainment and cluster will
1 6 Time 88:88hr 40 display the
180 current drive mode.

ENGINE!
7
Hold : Reset 220
999999km
Refer Drive modes in the “Starting and Driving chapter” for
E F 5 C H further details
Odometer Odometer

3-6
3.3 Instrument Cluster Control Switches The right most steering wheel switches are used to control
the instrument cluster menus.
The instrument cluster menus can be changed using the
cluster control switches on the Steering wheel or the Driver
A
side switch bank.
CRUISE
CRUISE
B
Driver side switch bank is located on the right hand side of
VOL + +
SET
-
SET+
the Instrument Panel.
VOL + RESUME
VOL +
+
C
SET-
-
RESUME
START
ENGINE
D
STOP
B A 3 RESUME
2
1 E
D C
START
ENGINE
STOP A: Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu
REAR
A/C ECON
A/C
B: UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction

A: Menu button: Horizontal scrolling i.e., change in menu
C: OK button: Select a option
FF B: UP button: Used to scroll vertically up direction
D: Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction
C: OK button: Select a option
E: Favorite button: Select a Favorite option
D: Down button: Used to scroll vertically down direction
USB

3.4 Instrument Cluster screen flow
Fuel Digital Vehicle Driver Display Warning

Drive Info Navigation Assistance** Audio** Setting
Info Speedo Info Layout** History
Trip A , Digital Full Screen Setting 1 Warning 1

DTE , Normal ,
TPMS** Navigation** ACC ,TSR , Audio
Drive time , AFE , Speed** Minimal ,
Average /Partial LKA info Setting 2 Warning 2
IFE Information
speed Navigation**
Power &
DEF Setting X Warning x
Trip B , Torque
Level**
Drive time ,
Average
speed ECO AWD
Score** Animation**
Clock &
Date
Driver ** Notice :
Attention **If equipped
level
Up button : Allows menu to navigate Anticlockwise if already menus triggered from menu button
Down button : Allows menu to navigate Clockwise if already menus triggered from menu button
REGEN**

3-8
3.5 Drive Info Trip meter can be reset by long press of OK. Resetting trip
will reset average speed and drive time associated with the
particular trip.
Drive info can be accessed
by pressing MENU button
in Steering Wheel/Driver It is recommended to reset the trip meters when battery is
side switch bank. disconnected and reconnected
Use OK button to enter
Drive info page. 3.5.2 Drive Time
Drive Duration is the

3.5.1 Trip Meter elapsed time from the start
of this trip cycle.
Drive time is part of trip
page. Drive time will reset
along with trip reset.
Two trip meters are available with max range of 9999.9 km.
These are available in drive info menu and can be accessed
using UP/DOWN switch.

3.5.3 Average Speed 3.5.5 Driver Drowsiness Index (If equipped)
Drowsiness detection is a safety technology that can

Average Speed is calculated prevent accidents that are caused by drivers who fell asleep
based on the total distance while driving.
covered and time taken
from the start of this trip
cycle. Average speed info is Cluster will display the 5
part of trip page. Average level of driver attention
speed will reset along with level based on drive Pattern
trip reset.
5 Attention Bars - Indicates
that the driver is
Completely Awake.
3.5.4 Clock & Date
The time on the clock & date is in sync with the

infotainment. Any change in infotainment will reflect on
the cluster. Refer settings for changing clock type.
that the driver is Quite
Awake.

3-10
Refer DDD section in “Starting and Driving the vehicle”

chapter for more details
that the driver is Neither
Awake nor Sleepy. 3.5.6 REGEN (If equipped)

that the driver is slightly
sleepy and can stay awake
with effort.
This page will appear only when vehicle is capable of Park
regeneration (DPF telltale ON or Blinking) along with REGEN
telltale.
1 Attention Bars - Indicates Refer fuel emission control section for more details on Park
that the driver is extremely regeneration.
Sleepy and cant stay awake

3.6 Fuel Info 3.6.2 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)
Fuel info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in AFE is calculated based on the last AFE reset cycle.
Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
AFE can be reset by long
press of OK button in
Steering wheel/driver side
It displays data related to switch bank.
fuel consumption pattern
of vehicle. Additional options to
change AFE reset to every
Use OK button to enter Fuel ignition ON or after every
info page. fuel refill are present in the
settings menu.
3.6.1 Distance to Empty (DTE) 3.6.3 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE)
Instantaneous Fuel
Economy is calculated
based on your current
Distance to Empty is the driving pattern. Higher
approximate distance that value on display means
can be covered with the vehicle is consuming less
available fuel. fuel, lower value on display
implies it is consuming
more fuel.

3-12
3.6.4 DEF Level (If equipped) 3.7 Digital Speedo Meter (if equipped)
Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle

numerically. It provides an immersive experience by having
option to switch off the lights of Speedometer and
Instrument cluster will Tachometer.
display the amount of DEF
present in the DEF tank
3.6.5 ECO Score (If equipped)
Digital speedometer can be accessed by pressing MENU

It displays the average Eco button in Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
Score from your Ecosense
screen in the Infotainment. Use OK button to enter Digital Speed page.

3.8 Vehicle Info
Vehicle info can be accessed by pressing MENU button in

Steering wheel/driver side switch bank.
It displays data related to

vehicle information like TPMS ,
Roll & Pitch and AWD Torque
distribution.
Use OK button to enter Vehicle
info page. Refer Tiretronics chapter for more details.
3.8.2 Power & Torque

3.8.1 Tyre Pressure (if equipped)
Tyre Pressure is an electronic system designed to monitor

the air pressure inside pneumatic tyres. This screen indicate the
current power and torque
This system will alert the driver if the tyre pressure falls with respect to max power
below the low pressure or raises above high pressure which can be achieved.
warning limit for any reason. Including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tyre. The
Tiretronics will continue to alert the driver and will not turn
off untill the tyre pressure is inflated to the recommended
pressure.

3-14
3.8.3 AWD Torque Distribution (If equipped) Partial Screen Navigation Turn by Turn Navigation
This screen indicate the

current torque flow while
driving.
To enter Full navigation if you are at partial Navigation screen, Long

Press the OK switch to view full map.
3.9 Navigation (If equipped)
Full Screen Navigation
Navigation can be accessed
by pressing MENU button in
switch bank. It displays data
related to map view which
is displayed in
infotainment. Use OK
button to enter Navigation
page.
To enter partial navigation if you are at Full Navigation screen, Long

Cluster will display the Navigation information Like Turn By Press the OK switch to view partial map.
Turn Navigation and Full / Partial Map view from Android
auto (If available) or native navigation.

3.10 Driver Assistance (ADAS) (If equipped) Cluster will display the below features in Driver Assistance Menu:
1. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 3. Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)
2. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

Driver Assistance can be
accessed by pressing MENU
button in Steering wheel 3.11 Audio Info (If equipped)
switches.
Use OK button to enter Drive
page Audio can be accessed by
pressing MENU button in
switch bank.
Driver Assistance Menu Non Driver Assistance Use OK button to enter
View Menu View Audio page
This below pages will display current media source which

is playing your music like AM / FM, USB & Bluetooth.
Long press up button shall enter into LKAS setting (if equipped)
Refer “Advanced Driver Assistance System” chapter for more details.

3-16
3.12 Display Layout Information Skin: Cluster shall display all the information
with different visual layout.
Cluster selected Themes:
Display Layout can be

accessed by pressing MENU
button in Steering wheel/
driver side switch bank.
Display Layout page
Display layout provides
immersive experience by
having different skin option
Minimal Skin: Cluster shall display minimal information
based on user choice.
which is required for less informative.
Normal Skin - Default Skin
Display Layout shortcut : Long press menu button shall enter into display
layout directly

3.13 Cluster Setting (if equipped) 3.13.1 Driver Assistance (If equipped)
Settings can be accessed by 1. Navigate to Setting menu

pressing MENU switch using MENU button.
To enter inside settings, press ok.

Use UP / DOWN button to navigate setting features 2. Press OK to enter setting.
Following settings are available: Press Up/Down button to
navigate to Driver
1. Driver Assistance (if applicable) 2. AFE Auto Reset Assistance option.
3. Passenger Airbag 4. Blind View Monitoring(if applicable)

5. Drowsiness Detection(if applicable)
6. TPMS – Auto Learn (if applicable)
7. Tyre Fill Assist (if applicable) 8. Sound
9. Clock Type 10. Factory Reset

3-18
3.13.2 AFE Reset

3. Press OK to enter Driver
Assistance option. Use Up/
Down button to navigate
driver assistance features
and press OK button to 1. Navigate to Setting menu
select the corresponding using MENU button.
feature options.
4. Use Up/Down button to

2. Press OK to enter setting.
navigate to the options and
Press Up/Down button to
press OK button to select
navigate to AFE Auto Reset
the corresponding option.
option
Above procedure is applicable for all other Driver Assistance 3. Press OK to enter AFE
features. Auto Reset option. Use Up/
Down button to navigate to
Refer to Advanced Driver Assistance System chapter for the option. Press OK to
more details. select.

After Ignition : After a predetermined time where the 3. Press OK to Select

vehicle’s ignition is OFF the AFE will reset. following screen will
appear. Use Up/Down
After Refuelling : Refuelling at ignition OFF and then driving button to navigate to the
will reset the AFE. option. Press OK to select, a
pop-up will appear to
3.13.3 Passenger Airbag confirm the selection
4. Press OK to select a
1. Navigate to Setting menu option. Confirm your
using MENU button. selection by selecting Ok or
Cancel.
2. Press OK to enter setting.

Press Up/Down button to
navigate to Passenger
Airbag option

3-20
3.13.4 Blind View Monitoring (if equipped) 3.13.5 Drowsiness Detection(if equipped)
1. Navigate to Setting menu 1. Navigate to Setting menu

using MENU button. using MENU button.
2. Press OK to enter setting. 2. Press OK to enter setting.

Press Up/Down button to Press Up/Down button to
navigate to Blind View navigate to Drowsiness
Monitoring Option Detection Option
3. Press OK to Enable / 3. Press OK to Enable /

Disable the Blind View Disable the Drowsiness
Monitoring Option. Detection Option.

3.13.6 TPMS-Auto Learn (if equipped) 3.13.7 Tyre Fill Assist (if equipped)


navigate to TPMS-Auto navigate to Tyre Fill Assist
Learn Option Option
3. Press OK to Enable / 3. Press OK to Enable /

Disable the TPMS-Auto Disable the Tyre Fill Assist
Learn Option. Option.

3-22
3.13.8 Sound
Turn Indicators, Notifications Sound and Lane Departure 4. Use Up/Down button to
Warning (If applicable) are having options to select different navigate to the option.
sounds and Volume level adjustment. Press OK to select.
1. Navigate to Setting menu 5. Use Up/Down button to

using MENU button. Select the volume Level.
Press OK to enter Volume
Option.
2. Press OK to enter setting. 6. Up/Down button to

Press Up/Down button to select the volume levels.
navigate to Sound Option. Press OK to select. Once
selected it will return to
previous page.
3. Press ok to enter Sound

Option. Use Up/Down
button to navigate to the
option. Press OK to enter
Sound Options

3.13.9 Clock Type 3.13.10 Factory Reset


navigate to Clock Type navigate to Factory Reset
Option. Option.
3. Press OK to Select
3. Press ok to enter Clock following screen will
Type option. Use Up/Down appear. Use Down button
button to navigate to the to select Confirm. Press OK
option. Press OK to select. to start factory reset
process.

3-24
Live warnings shall displayed in the cluster center display

area and warning count will decrease if viewed in the
1. To go to the main settings screen from any settings menu, warning history page.
use Up/Down buttons to go to the top of the menu screen
and press the OK button.
2. In the settings screen, if no option is selected for a long
time. The screen will go to the previous displayed screen.
3.14 Alert History
3.15 General Alerts

Alert History can be
accessed by pressing MENU Display Operating Conditions
button in Steering wheel/
driver side switch bank.
This alert is displayed when any doors
are open and show the door
Alert History page
identified as open.
Alert history allows to check This alert is displayed when the check
any active applicable engine warning telltale is ON and
vehicle warnings in the engine is running.
instrument cluster display.

Display Operating Conditions Display Operating Conditions
This alert is displayed when engine This alert is displayed when low fuel
temperature high telltale is ON and warning telltale is ON or blinking and
engine is running. engine is running.
This alert is displayed when an ABS This alert is displayed when the
related malfunction is detected. engine oil pressure warning telltale is
50 ON and engine is running.
This alert is displayed when low brake This alert is displayed when either of
fluid is detected and engine is driver or passenger (if occupied)
running. seatbelt is unbuckled.
This alert is displayed when the park This alert is displayed when water is
lamp is ON and the ignition is turned detected in fuel filter and engine is
OFF. running. It is applicable for the diesel
variant only.

3-26
This alert is displayed when This alert is displayed when Skyroof is

passenger airbag is turned OFF. left open at ignition off.
The alert is displayed when ignition is

This alert is displayed when brake off, driver door is open and the driver
EBD related malfunction is detected. has forgotten their phone in the
wireless charging tray.
This alert is displayed when the ESP This alert is displayed when AWD
malfunction is detected and engine is system related malfunction is
running. detected.
This alert is displayed when EPS This alert is displayed when Zip drive
related malfunction is detected mode is activated.

The alert is displayed when the driver

This alert is displayed when Zap drive becomes very drowsy and is not able
mode is activated. to stay awake. The alert indicates the
driver to take an immediate break.
This alert is displayed when

This alert is displayed when Zoom malfunction in Attention Assist
drive mode is activated. system is detected.
This alert is displayed when any front

This alert is displayed when Custom brake pad is detected as worn out
drive mode is activated. and needs to be replaced.
Instrument cluster shall monitor

some of the internal parameters and This alert is displayed when the Hill
if any malfunction is detected it will Descent Control function is not
display the “Contact Dealer” alert. available because of a malfunction in
the system.
Contact a Mahindra Authorised
Dealer immediately when “Contact
Dealer” alert is displayed in cluster.

3-28

This alert is displayed when a coin or
This alert is displayed when the Hill metallic object is placed on the
Hold Control function is not available wireless charging tray & the phone is
because of a malfunction in the kept on the object leading to poor
system. charging of phone. This will also be
displayed if the phone is detected in a
incorrect position on the charging
tray. Adjust the phone to allow it to
This alert is displayed when the charge optimally.
vehicle is driven above 120 kmph.
This alert is displayed when a NFC
enabled card is placed on the wireless
charging tray & a phone is placed on
top of. Kindly remove the card to
This alert is displayed when you try to protect the card.
move the vehicle and the park brake
is still engaged.
This alert is displayed when the
Skyroof is open and vehicle speed in
high.
This alert is displayed 200 Kms before
the scheduled service limit. Rain Sensor/Non Rain Sensor
Variant: This alert will displayed
when low wipe is ON for more than
10 seconds or high wipe is ON for
more than 5 seconds in both RLS &
Non RLS variants.

3.16 Partial Alerts Display Operating Conditions
Display Operating Conditions

This message comes when cruise
mode is turned ON.
This message comes when auto light
is turned OFF.

mode is turned OFF.
This message comes when auto light
is turned ON.
This message comes when brake
pedal is pressed when in cruise mode
or if trying to activate cruise control
This message comes when auto wiper when vehicle speed is below the
is turned OFF. cruise threshold.

mode is ON and accelerator pedal is
pressed to overtake.
This message comes when auto wiper
is turned ON.

3-30
Display Operating Conditions <Level 5>

This message comes on when HDC
function is enabled by pressing the
HDC switch and the conditions for
HDC are met . The brakes will then
maintain the vehicle speed while
descending the Hill
This message comes on when the Hill

Descent Control is disabled manually <Level 3>
by pressing the HDC Switch.
This message comes on when the Hill

Descent Control is enabled manually
by pressing the HDC Switch and is
ready to control, but the conditions
for HDC are not met yet.
<Level 0>
3.17 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)
Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when
vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle. It
tells you about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at
very beginning of manoeuvring the vehicle. TDMS works only when
vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle
speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and clutch is not engaged

Operating Conditions Blind view monitoring system displays the video from the
camera placed in the side mirrors when turn indicators are
Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) ON.
depending on the alignment degree when the ignition
switch is turned to "ON" position from "OFF" position Favorite Function
Working conditions: Favorite button short press, Cluster will display the screen
which was already saved as favorite
1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.
User can set as favorite any one of the menu screen (Vehicle
2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral and info, Fuel info, Digital speed, Drive info, Navigation, Driver
clutch is not engaged. Assistance, Audio, Display Layout & Setting Level 1) except
settings (Level 2,3,4) REGEN function & Warning history.
3.18 Cluster Features
Favorite Feature Non–Favorite Feature
Blind View Monitor (If equipped)
Left Side Right Side
Each time user make a screen as favorite by pressing

Favorite button long press during the previously added
favorite screen will be replaced by the current screen.

3-32
3.19 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
BOOST AUTO
AEBS
BOOST OFF
ZIP

Few Tell Tales grouped in to same slot and this will be cyclic based on tell tale status.

3-34
Lamp Lamp Status while

Sr. Symbol Warning Lamp/
Pre- Engine running Action/Remarks
No. Telltale
check
Indicates left turn lamp is blinking
Slow or Fast Slow Blinking: Normal operation
1 Left Turn Indicator No Blinking Fast Blinking: One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused.
Have the bulb replaced
Indicates right turn lamp is blinking
Slow or Fast Slow Blinking: Normal operation
2 Right Turn Indicator No Fast Blinking: One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused.
Blinking
Have the bulb replaced
3 Cruise Control telltale* No Continuously ON Indicates vehicle is in Cruise mode
Automatic Emergency Indicates temporary or permanent fault in Automatic

4 Braking System No Continuously ON Emergency braking system. Contact a Mahindra
Malfunction* Authorised Dealer immediately.
Water-in-Fuel Warning Continuously ON Indicates water-in-fuel. Drain the water from filter or
5 No contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
telltale*
SLOW BLINKING: Vehicle is armed with the remote

Continuously ON / FAST BLINKING/CONTINUOUSLY ON: Indicates a system
6 Immobiliser lamp No malfunction
Blinking
Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately


No. Telltale
check
Indicates malfunction of the ABS system. Contact a

7 ABS Warning telltale Yes Continuously ON Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Either one of the below conditions:

Park Brake / EBD / Low 1. Park Brake might be engaged
Brake Fluid Telltale / Continuously ON 2. Brake fluid level might be low
8 Yes 3. There is a malfunction in brake EBD.
EPB* / Brake pad worn
4. Front Brake Pad wear worn out. Please contact
out* Mahindra Dealer immediately.
9 Parking Lamp telltale No Continuously ON Indicates Park Lamp is ON
Indicates malfunction of the airbag system. Contact a

10 Airbag Warning telltale Yes Continuously ON Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a

11 HHC Malfunction* No Continuously ON Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Door Ajar Warning Continuously ON

12 No Indicates any doors, boot or hood are open
telltale

3-36

No. Telltale
check
Low Fuel Warning Continuously ON/ Indicates fuel level has reached the reserve level. Refuel
13 No Blinking immediately
telltale
14 ESP OFF telltale* No Continuously ON Indicates ESP has been switched OFF
BLINKING: Indicates ESP has taken control of the vehicle

ESP Malfunction Continuously ON or stability
15 Warning telltale* Yes Blinking
CONTINUOUSLY ON: Indicates a malfunction in the ESP
system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer
immediately
Front Fog Lamp Continuously Lamp

16 No Indicates front fog lamp is ON
telltale* ON
Indicates low/high tyre pressure or possible malfunction

Continuously ON or in Tiretronics. Refer to Tiretronics section in
17 Tiretronics telltale* No Blinking INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES/WHEELS AND TYRES
chapter for further details
Seat Belt Warning If telltale is not turning OFF even after fastening the seat
18 No Continuously ON belt, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for
telltale assistance


No. Telltale
check
It indicates that either DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF
SCR/DEF malfunction Continuously ON has been filled or DEF Dosing is malfunctioning. Follow
19 No the instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL
telltale*
SYSTEM”
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running
condition then DPF regeneration has not happened.
20 DPF telltale* No ON/Blink Follow the instructions mentioned in the “EMISSION
CONTROL SYSTEM”
21 Glow Plug telltale* No. Continuously ON Indicates glow plugs are active.
22 Head Lamp High Beam No Continuously ON Indicates Head lamp high beam is ON
Telltale will be ON till engine starts. After engine starts, if

Continuously ON or is still ON there is a potential malfunction related to
23 OBD telltale Yes Blinking emission system, contact an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer immediately
Indicates malfunction on Electronic Power steering

24 EPS Warning telltale* Yes Continuously ON system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer
immediately
Low Engine Oil Telltale will be ON in ignition ON But engine is OFF. In

engine ON condition, it indicates engine oil pressure is
25 Pressure Warning No Continuously ON low. Check oil level and top-up or contact an Mahindra
telltale Authorised Dealer for assistance

3-38

No. Telltale
check
Continuously ON or Indicates a potential malfunction in the EMS, contact an

26 ENGINE ! Check Engine telltale Yes Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Blinking
Battery Charging Indicates malfunction in charging system. Contact

27 No Continuously ON
System Warning telltale Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance
High Engine Coolant Continuously ON or Engine temperature very high. Contact Mahindra
28 Temperature Warning No Blinking Authorised Dealer immediately
telltale
ON: Regeneration is required
29 REGEN telltale* NO ON/Blink Blink: Regeneration is in progress
Telltale is used to indicate an AT fault. Telltale

Continuous ON means AT Fault. Contact Mahindra
Authorised Dealer immediately if the MIL Lamp doesn’t
Continuously ON or turn off after an ignition reset.
AT Warning telltale*
30 ! No
Blink Blinking Telltale implies overheating of clutch due to
abuse conditions. This is only to warn the customer and
to prevent clutch damage. Telltale will turn off once the
clutch temperature has becomes normal.
HDC Malfunction Continuously ON Indicates malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact a

31 No Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
telltale*


No. Telltale
check
32 Rear Fog lamp telltale* No Continuously ON Indicates Rear fog lamp is ON
CONTINUOUSLY ON: Engine is in auto stop mode

START Engine Start/Stop Continuously ON or Blinking: Stop/Start is about to stop the engine FAST
33 A No Blinking BLINKING: Stop/Start is inhibited due to unhealthy
STOP
telltale*
battery conditions
Automatic Emergency
AEBS Continuously ON
34 Braking System OFF No Indicates AEB system is turned off by user.
OFF
telltale*
No Continuously ON Indicates LKA system is in Standby state
Lane Keep Assist Continuously ON or Indicates LKA system is in Active state Blinking: LKA
35 System*(LKA) No Blinking system providing Warning to the user
LKAS System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is

Continuously ON or displayed if there is a problem with LKAS system.
No Blinking Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly

3-40

No. Telltale
check
No Continuously ON Indicates LDW system is in Standby state
Lane Departure Continuously ON or Indicates LDW system is in Active state Blinking: LDW
36 Warning System*(LDW) No Blinking system providing Warning to the user
LDW System fail/Malfunction. This warning message is

Continuously ON or displayed if there is a problem with LDWS system.
No Blinking Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
Blinking: Camera not calibrated properly
No Continuously ON Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Standby state
Continuously ON or
37 Smart Pilot Assist* No Blinking
Indicates Smart Pilot Assist is in Active state
Smart Pilot Assist system fail/Malfunction. This warning

message is displayed if there is a problem with SPA
No Continuously ON system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer
immediately


No. Telltale
check
Continuously ON Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in standby

No state.
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system is in active

No Continuously ON state.
Adaptive Cruise
38
Control*
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system temporarily
No Continuously ON not available due to temporary abnormal condition.
Check if radar is blocked and clean.
Indicates malfunction of Adaptive cruise control system.

No Continuously ON Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
Indicates Auto headlamp booster is in active state when

39 Auto High Beam Boost* No Continuously ON the vehicle speed crosses 80kmph with high beam ON
BOOST
40 High Beam Assist* No Continuously ON Indicates high beam assist function is enabled/active.
AUTO

3-42

No. Telltale
check
AUTO No Continuously ON Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in standby Mode.

HOLD
AUTO Continuously ON
41 Auto Vehicle Hold* No Indicates Auto Vehicle Hold in Active Mode.
HOLD
AUTO Indicates malfunction of Auto Vehicle Hold. Contact a

No Continuously ON Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
HOLD
Indicates malfunction of AWD. Contact a Mahindra

42 AWD Malfunction* No Continuously ON Authorised Dealer immediately
Indicates malfunction of Electric Parking Brake. Contact

43 EPB Malfunction* Yes Continuously ON a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
* if equipped / select models or variants only

3.20 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster 3.20.3 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if equipped)
3.20.1 Turn Lamps The water-in-fuel warning lamp illuminates

when the accumulation of water in the fuel
The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster filter reaches the maximum permissible limit.
flash showing the direction indicated by the The fuel filter needs to be drained. Contact a Mahindra
turn signals. A sudden increase in the rate of Authorised Dealer.
flashing indicates failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs.
Have them replaced as soon as possible.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with the Water-in-Fuel
3.20.2 Cruise Indicator (if equipped) Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel
system component damage, which will not be covered by
The lamp indicates the status of the cruise the warranty.
mode. Lamp ON indicates the vehicle is in
cruise mode by pressing the SET + button on 3.20.4 Immobiliser
the steering wheel switch bank.
Blinking indicates that the accelerator pedal is pressed Immobiliser Lamp flashes intermittently (few
when in cruise mode allowing for an overtake. secs. frequency) once the ignition is switched
OFF and the vehicle security system is armed
When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel switch bank (when locked using the RKE).
is pressed, cruise mode is deactivated and the lamp goes
OFF indicating that the vehicle is not in cruise mode. Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine
immobiliser system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer
If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise immediately.
mode or does not go OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise
mode, there is a possible malfunction in the lamp or the
cruise control system. Have the vehicle checked by a
Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

3-44
3.20.5 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction there is malfunction in EBD. If the lamp illuminates while
Lamp driving, do the following:
If the ABS malfunction lamp is ON when driving A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the brake as
ABS will not operate. But the brake system will well as ABS warning lamps.
still operate conventionally. In this condition, • Check if the parking brake/ Electric parking brake is
the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle engaged. If yes, disengage it
checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as
possible. • Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid
to the required level
However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp
are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in • Check if front brake pad is worn out. If yes, replace the
the ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have front brake pads
the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer.
Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before removing the cap. Make
sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into the reservoir. Do not leave
the cap off for more than a few minutes. Any contaminants, impurities or
if ABS malfunction lamp and parking brake warning lamp moisture in the brake fluid can affect brake operation, resulting in an
are simultaneously ON, there is a severe malfunction in the accident.
ABS. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving, the brake system might
not be working properly. The pedal might be harder to operate or might go
In this case, the ABS function is not available, but the closer to the floor and it can take longer to stop. Pull off the road carefully
conventional brake system is properly working and stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mahindra
Authorised Dealer for checks or repairs.
Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON or when you suspect
3.20.6 Parking Brake Lamp brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in serious injuries. Have
your vehicle towed to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
The lamp illuminates when Parking brake is When the EBD system is not functioning the vehicle could be unstable
engaged or when brake fluid level is low or during the hard braking. Therefore you must pay attention to the driving
conditions while this warning light.

3.20.7 Electric Parking Brake Malfunction (EPB) (If Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:
equipped)
• Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started
The EPB Lamp illuminates, when there is a • Lamp does not illuminate at all
malfunction in EBP. The lamp illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes • Illuminates while driving
off after about 4 seconds. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately when
the airbag warning lamp indicates a system malfunction.
The airbag may not deploy when needed, which could result
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly or
a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre unnecessarily, which may result in personal injury.
If you must park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector lever to the P position
3.20.10 HHC malfunction (if equipped)
3.20.8 Park Lamp HHC Malfunction Lamp comes on when the
ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off
The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever after about 4 seconds. if there is any
park lamp is switched ON through malfunction in hill hold control system of the vehicle.
Combination switch. When ignition is switched
OFF and if park lamp is ON with driver door open, and alert
will be audible.
There are chances of vehicle rolling down when starting on a hill. No
assistance will be available from ESP system.
3.20.9 Airbag Warning Lamp If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at
a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre
If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash
intermittently, contact an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer immediately.

3-46
3.20.11 Door Ajar Warning Lamp 3.20.14 ESP System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when While driving, if the ESC system warning lamp
any of the doors including the hood and back blinks, it indicates that ESP has taken control of
door are open during ignition ON. The buzzer the vehicle stability. If the lamp remains ON, it
chimes when the vehicle speed more than 2 kmph. The indicates the malfunction in the ESP System. Contact the
lamp and chime goes OFF when all the doors are closed nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
properly.
3.20.12 Low Fuel Warning Lamp If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked
and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra
When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below Service Centre
the reserve limit, the low fuel warning lamp is
illuminated. Refuel sufficiently and the lamp 3.20.15 Front Fog Lamp (if equipped)
goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after
refuelling, contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer. The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status
of the front fog lamp. The front fog lamp can
3.20.13 ESP OFF Lamp (if equipped) be switched ON only when the parking lamp is
ON.
The ESP OFF lamp illuminates when the ESP
has been switched OFF manually.
Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.
This lamp comes on when the ignition switch is
turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds.
Pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch (for more than 3
seconds) turns on the indicator lamp indicating that the ESP
function is deactivated.

3.20.16 Engine Stop/Start Lamp (If equipped) 3.20.18 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
START The Engine Stop/Start lamp flashes when the The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the
A vehicle/engine is about to stop through the buzzer chimes reminding the driver to fasten
STOP
Engine Stop/ Start System. The lamp the seat belt when the ignition is ON and
illuminates continuously when the vehicle/engine has been vehicle running condition. The lamp will continue to
switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On restarting illuminate till the driver fastens the seat belt properly.
the vehicle / engine again by using the clutch/key, the lamp
goes out.
3.20.19 DPF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)
3.20.17 Tiretronics (if equipped) If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running
condition then DPF regeneration has not
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION : Tiretronics lamp Blink happened. Follow the instructions mentioned
for approx. 90 sec & then Continuous ON. in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
3.20.20 DEF Indicator Lamp (If equipped)

SYSTEM WARNINGS: Tiretronics lamp Continuous ON.
If the DEF indicator is ON in the engine running
condition then DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION: System fail to function normally has been filled or DEF Dosing is
due to system failure/Sensor failure. malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mentioned in the
‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’.
SYSTEM WARNING: indicated Low/High Tyre pressure, High
Temperature, Air Leakage.

3-48
3.20.21 Glow Plug Indicator (If equipped) 3.20.24 OBD Check Lamp
Glow plug indicator illuminates when the The OBD check lamp illuminates when the
ignition is turned ON and Glow plug is ignition is switched ON and remains ON till the
activated. It automatically goes OFF when the engine is started indicating normal status. If
glow plug reaches the required temperature. Contact a the lamp remains ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.
Mahindra Authorised Dealer, if it illuminates while driving.
There may be a malfunction in:
3.20.22 Head Lamp High Beam • The fuel management system

• The emission control system
The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates
whenever the head lamps are switched ON to • Systems which affect emissions
high beam or when the head lamp flash is
used. Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions.
Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
3.20.23 Auto Head Lamp Booster (If equipped)

3.20.25 EPS Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The Auto Head Lamp booster telltale will come
on when vehicle speed crosses 80 kmph with The lamp Indicates malfunction on Electric
BOOST High beam ON Power steering system. Contact a Mahindra
Authorised Dealer immediately.
The booster telltale will turn OFF automatically when vehicle
speed comes below 75 kmph
When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven with increase
in steering effort.

3.20.26 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp engine immediately. Contact the nearest Mahindra
Authorised Dealer for necessary repairs.
The low engine oil pressure warning lamp
illuminates when the ignition is switched ON
and goes OFF when the engine is started. If the 3.20.28 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or
illuminates while driving, stop immediately, check the oil The battery charging system warning lamp
level after 2-3 minutes. If low, add engine oil to the “MAX” illuminates when the battery is not being
level and check status. If problem persists, contact an charged or when there is a malfunction in the
Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately. alternator.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and
goes out as soon as the engine is started. If the lamp
Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure warning continues to remain ON even after starting the engine, it is
lamp ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and an indication that the battery is not being charged or there
loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and/or is a malfunction in the alternator. Check the alternator drive
serious personal injury. belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive belt is okay, switch
OFF all unnecessary electrical equipment and recheck.
Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further
assistance.
Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning
indicator ON. This may result in engine damage, which will
not be covered by the limited warranty. 3.20.29 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp
3.20.27 Check Engine Lamp The high engine coolant temperature warning
lamp flashes when the coolant temperature is
Indicating normal status. The lamp blinks or above 113ºC . It starts to flash when the
ENGINE ! illuminates continuously if there is a fault in the temperature reaches 113ºC and will be continuously ON
engine management system. Switch OFF the with buzzer alert when the temperature reaches 115ºC.

3-50
The bars in the temperature gauge also flash in the same • If the Indicator lamp is blinking continuously, reduce the
frequency as the high temperature warning lamp when the vehicle speed until the lamp stops blinking. Contact the
above set temperature thresholds are reached. Mahindra dealer as soon as possible.
3.20.32 HDC Malfunction (if equipped)

Do not continue driving the vehicle with an overheated
engine. This may result in engine damage, which will not be The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is
covered by the limited warranty. turned ON and goes off after about 4 seconds.
Hill Descent Control or HDC malfunction
warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC
3.20.30 Regen Indicator Lamp (If equipped) system. Contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
if it is continuously ON, It indicates the DPF
Manual Regeneration is required. It will blink
when Manual regeneration is in progress. Follow the If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked
instructions mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM’. and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Authorised Mahindra
Service Centre
3.20.31 AT Warning Lamp (If equipped)
3.20.33 LDW System Warning Lamp (if equipped)
• This warning lamp comes on when the ignition
! switch is turned on and it goes off when the
engine is started.
If there is a problem with the LDW system, a
message (Lane Departure Warning unavailable)
will appear for a few seconds. If the problem
• If the lamp stays ON or comes ON while driving, some of continues the LDWS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate .
the Transmission control components including sensors We recommend you to Contact a Mahindra Authorised
and devices may be malfunctioning. Dealer for further assistance.

3.20.34 LKA System Warning Lamp (if equipped)

Illuminates LDW system is in Standby mode
If there is a problem with the LKAS system, a
message (Lane Keep Assist unavailable) will
appear for a few seconds. If the problem
Illuminates LDW system is in Active state continues the LKAS failure indicator (yellow) will illuminates.
We recommend you to Contact a Mahindra Authorised
Dealer for further assistance.
LDW system is in Not Working/
Illuminates
Fail state
Illuminates LKA system is in Standby state
When there is a problem with the system, do one of the Illuminates LKA system is in Active state
following::
• Check if the system is affected by the weather. (e. g. fog,
heavy rain, etc.) LKA system is in Not Working/Fail
Illuminates
state
• Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
• If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to
contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further
assistance. When there is a problem with the system, do one of the
following:
LDW System Warning Lamp with blinking:
If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, means heavy rain, etc.)
this warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact a Mahindra
Authorised Dealer immediately. • Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.

3-52
• If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera
contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further sensor or cover is blocked with dirt /snow or if there is
assistance. permanent failure.
LKA System Warning Lamp with blinking: • Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by
using a soft cloth.
If the Front Camera (FCM) is not calibrated properly, this
warning lamp blinks continuously. Contact a Mahindra • Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
Authorised Dealer immediately.
• If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to
contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further
3.20.35 Automatic Emergency Braking ON/OFF assistance.
Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The warning light illuminates on the LCD 3.20.37 High Beam Assist Lamp (if equipped)
AEBS
OFF display, when user turned OFF the AEB system.
The driver can monitor the AEB ON/OFF status This warning light illuminates when the driver
on the LCD display. If the warning light remains ON when sets HBA ON/OFF via cluster and Auto Light
the AEB is activated, we recommend you to have the system
AUTO Switch to ON and Head Lamp Switch to High.
checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further
assistance
3.20.36 Automatic Emergency Braking Warning/ heavy rain, etc.)
Malfunction Lamp (if equipped) • Check if there is foreign matter on the Front camera lens.
This warning lamp Indicates temporary or If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact
permanent fault in Automatic Emergency an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
braking system.

3.20.38 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact
Lamp (if equipped) an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance.
Indicates Adaptive cruise control system Indicates permanent failure of Adaptive cruise
temporarily not available due to temporary control system. Contact a Mahindra Authorised
abnormal condition. Dealer immediately.
3.20.39 Smart Pilot Assist Warning Lamp (If

Illuminates ACC system is in Standby state equipped)
The warning light illuminates on the LCD

display when SPA system is in fail/Malfunction
Illuminates ACC system is in Active state
ACC system temporarily not

Illuminates available due to temporary Illuminates SPA system is in Standby state
abnormal condition
ACC system is Not Working/Fail SPA system is in Active state

Illuminates Illuminates
State
The warning light illuminates When the radar/camera SPA system is in Not Working/Fail
sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow. Illuminates
state
• Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by
using a soft cloth.

3-54
The warning light illuminates When the radar sensor/

Camera sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow or if AUTO
Illuminates There is a malfunction in AVH
there is permanent failure. HOLD
• Check the radar sensor and cover and clean them by
using a soft cloth. AUTO
Illuminates AVH is in Standby mode
HOLD
If the problem is not solved, we recommend you to contact
an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further assistance. AUTO
Illuminates AVH is in Active mode
HOLD
3.20.40 All Wheel Drive Malfunction (AWD) (If • When the AUTO HOLD switch is operated, the AUTO
equipped) HOLD system will be switched to READY mode and the
"AUTO HOLD" indicator on the instrument cluster will be
The warning light illuminates on the display illuminated in white.
when AWD system is in Malfunction
• Operating the AUTO HOLD switch again turns off the
indicator and deactivates the AUTO HOLD system.
3.20.41 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) (If equipped)
The AVH Lamp illuminates, there is a malfunction in AVH. If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp is turned on, have
the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or
Authorised Mahindra Service Centre

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
4 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel,
confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.
Your Vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to
meet all applicable emission regulations. Three-Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)
There are three emission control system which are as It is an exhaust after treatment component that is designed
follows. to convert carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC),
nitrogen oxides (NOx) into carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
1. Crankcase emission control system (N) and water (H2O).
2. Evaporative emission control system Emission Control System for Diesel vehicles
3. Exhaust emission control system The emission control system is a highly effective system
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control which controls exhaust emissions from the engine and
systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle crucial for meeting emission norms specified by law.
inspected and maintained by an authorised Mahindra Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control
dealer. systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.
Emission Control Systems for Petrol vehicles 1. Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)
It is a highly effective system that controls exhaust

2. Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)
emissions from an engine. It is crucial for meeting emission 3. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
standards specified by law.
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control
Your vehicle is equipped with a three-way catalytic converter systems, it is mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and
(TWC) for meeting BS VI emission norms. maintained by a Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The
maintenance schedule in the Warranty & Service
For optimal functioning of the emission control system, it is Information Guide need to be followed.
mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by
a Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule It is also extremely important to use correct grade of fuel,
in owner’s manual should be followed. Confirming to IS 1460:2017 BS VI Specification.

4.1 Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) MaxiCLEAN DEF is available at all the Authorised Mahindra
Dealers in packs of variable capacities. Individual DEF Packs
A diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) is an after-treatment may have specific filler neck, for filling DEF in the vehicle.
component that is designed to convert carbon monoxide While refilling DEF, take care to avoid spillage on your body
(CO) and hydrocarbons (HC) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and or outer panels of the vehicle to avoid any stains or
water (H2O). inconvenience.
4.2 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR)

It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is an advanced active the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not
emission control technology system that injects a liquid- to use DEF which does not meet the above specification.
reducing agent through a special catalyst into the exhaust Further, this may lead to emission non-compliance and
stream of a diesel engine. The reductant is called as Diesel warranty getting void.
Exhaust Fluid (DEF). The DEF sets off a chemical reaction
that converts nitrogen oxides into nitrogen and water which
is then expelled through the vehicle tailpipe.
• Use Genuine DEF MaxiCLEAN always.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) MaxiCLEAN
• Incase of non-availability of the above mentioned
To enable the SCR system to work efficiently and to ensure MaxiCLEAN Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS
emission compliance, it is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used.
DEF meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.
• Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with
Replenishing DEF is part of regular maintenance service. water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the
DEF consumption is highly dependent on driving conditions/ necessary specifications and the after treatment system
pattern and it may be necessary to refill the DEF reservoir of your vehicle may be damaged.
in-between the scheduled service if need be, You are
• Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never
advised to monitor DEF Indicator Tell Tale and symbols/text
exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/
messages displayed on the Cluster.
component failure.

4-2
• DEF quality and purity can be ensured only if it is stored authorized M&M dealer to determine the appropriate repair
as per recommendations. Hence ensure to store DEF in a procedure.
cool, dry place.
Handling of DEF
• Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water.
This may cause damage to the after treatment system. • Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin,
eyes, or clothing
• While refilling DEF be careful not to allow any foreign
particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to • Keep DEF out of the reach of children
get inside the system. These may clog or damage the • In case if any part of the body comes in contact with DEF,
system. clean affected area immediately with plenty of water
• While refilling DEF, use only the pipe supplied with the • If DEF comes in contact with eyes, flush with plenty of
MaxiCLEAN. Do not use any funnel or container. Any water immediately and seek medical help.
contamination with Diesel or oils will cause malfunction
of the after treatment system. • If DEF is swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water, drink plenty of water immediately and seek
• If DEF accidently spill over vehicle components or metal medical help.
surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and
water. DEF residues will corrode the components, metal • Refrain from storing DEF refill containers inside the
surfaces and painted body panels. vehicle. Ammonia vapors may escape from the container
which have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating
• DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the to the skin, mucous membranes and eyes. Inhaling
diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, ammonia vapors may cause irritation to the eyes, nose
engine/fuel system could get damaged. and throat, as well as cough.
• In such a case, do not start the engine and immediately • When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may
contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for escape. Therefore ensure to refill DEF in a well- ventilated
assistance. area only.
Contamination/ Incorrect DEF: If incorrect or
contaminated fluid is filled inside DEF Tank, contact an

• If Diesel Exhaust Fluid is spilled on metal surfaces rinse

and clean immediately with water. Failure to do so may
leave permanent corrosive stains on the metal surfaces
which cannot be removed. 2. Press the key fob unlock
DEF Operating Condition: DEF will freeze at -11°C (12.2°F). button and Press the fuel
This is a natural phenomenon. The DEF system in the lid gently once to open.
vehicle is designed considering this and does not require
any external heating or additives to avoid freezing.
3. Rotate the DEF filler cap in anti-clockwise direction and

The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system purges to prevent remove.
damage from freezing. Do NOT disconnect battery power
within 20 minutes of switching the ignition key off. Failure to 4. Fill DEF from the Container Pack. Each container pack has
comply may result in vehicle or property damage. a unique mouth and filling provision. Ensure utilizing the
same to avoid spillage. Example. 10 Liter Pack provided with
Refilling DEF: Your Vehicle DEF Filler Neck is located beside filler tube.
the Fuel filler Neck. The DEF storage tank is located under
the body. 5. Fill DEF as required. Maximum Storage capacity is 20
liters. Minimum quantity to be filled is 6.0 liters.
Following below are the steps to refill the DEF:
6. Rinse with water or use sponge wetted with water to
1. Park the vehicle on level ground and switch OFF the clean the components/surfaces in case the DEF spills over.
ignition.
7. Put the DEF filler cap back in its place and tighten in the
clock wise direction, then close the fuel lid shut.
8. Switch the ignition ON

4-4
9. Verify that there is no warning regarding DEF low level. If

the DEF Level Low warning is still appearing, check if enough
It is unlawful to tamper with or remove any component of the
quantity is filled, If still problem persist contact the nearest
after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to use DEF
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately. which does not meet the specification. Further, this may lead to
emission non-compliance and warranty getting void.
10. DEF is being monitored through iSmart tool during
regular service at dealership and the required quantity will
be filled accordingly. 4.2.2 DEF Level Indication
When DEF level in the tank falls below pre-defined values,

warnings are flashed in stages as explained below:
It is highly recommended to DEF filling always at Ignition off
condition only Irrespective of the warning stages, once DEF level is low, a
minimum of 6.0 liters of DEF needs to be filled. If the
4.2.1 SCR Alerts warnings continue even after refill, contact the nearest
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Introduction
E31 E32 E33
DEF telltale will turn ON and an error message
with code will be displayed on the cluster
screen due to any of the following reasons:
• DEF level low
• Incorrect DEF detected
• DEF dosing malfunction

E34 E35 4.2.3 DEF Quality
If SCR system detects the quality of DEF inside the tank is

not meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification, warnings
will be flashed in stages as explained below:
E11 E12 E13
In absence of DEF level low warning, refilling is not

recommended.
Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never be
more than 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/
component failure. Only a Authorised Mahindra Dealer will
be able to correctly determine the quantity of DEF present E14 E15
inside the tank. Hence if you are refilling the DEF yourself, fill
only 6.0 liters in case the DEF Low level warning is flashed.
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF level, refill
the DEF tank. Failure to refill may cause engine start
restriction.
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF quality,

visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra dealer to have this
repaired. Failure to repair the system may cause the engine
start restriction.

4-6
4.2.4 DEF Dosing Malfunction 4.3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
If SCR system detects any malfunction due to failures in The Diesel particulate filter (DPF) is an integral part of the
components or tampering, warnings are flashed in stages as vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems and it removes
explained below: the soot (Particulate matter) from the exhaust gas. Unlike a
disposable air filter, the DPF is a regenerative filter.
Regeneration is triggered automatically according to vehicle
E21 E22 E23 driving conditions which burns the accumulated particles/soot
from the DPF. The process is called as DPF Active
Regeneration.
However, if the vehicle continues to be driven in the below
conditions the accumulated soot may not be automatically
removed because of low exhaust gas temperatures.
1. Heavy traffic driving conditions, especially in the city

E24 E25
2. Frequent short trips
3. Low speed for a long time
When more than a certain amount of soot gets deposited,
the DPF telltale turns ON along with the DPF clogged alert.
If the DEF telltale turns on due to dosing malfunction, visit

an Authorised Mahindra Dealer to have this repaired.
Failure to repair the system may cause engine start
restriction.

If the DPF telltale turns ON when driving the vehicle, it DPF Park Regeneration
indicates that the DPF regeneration has not occurred
successfully. At this moment, we suggest DPF regeneration DPF park regeneration is the procedure to start a DPF
must be done as mentioned below: regeneration when the vehicle is stationary from the
instrument cluster. Follow the below steps to perform Park
Take the vehicle to an empty stretch of road/highway and Regeneration. The DPF park regeneration is only possible
drive for 20 – 30 mins @ speeds above 60 km/hr until the when the REGEN telltale is ON in the instrument cluster.
telltale turns off.
• Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open
space and free of any flammable material.
• Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by • Shift the gear lever to Neutral with the engine running
local jurisdiction while driving. and apply the parking brake.
If the DPF telltale starts blinking, perform DPF park • Access the Drive info menu in the instrument cluster and
regeneration following the below procedure. press the down button to go to the REGEN screen, REGEN
screen will appear only when the REGEN telltale is ON.
If the OBD telltale is ON & DPF telltale blinking. Stop the
vehicle and contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra dealer
for assistance.
Continuous driving with DPF telltale blinking may lead to

failure of exhaust system components
• REGEN screen will go OFF if REGEN telltale turns OFF.

4-8
• When in the REGEN screen of the drive info menu, long

Press OK button on the steering wheel or the driver side
switch bank to start park regeneration. • During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the
vehicle close to any flammable materials as you may
• Once regeneration starts, “In Progress” text will appear observe hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.
below REGEN. The engine idle speed will increase
indicating regeneration has started. • To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away
from exhaust system.
Park Regeneration process will not start if CHECK ENGINE

LAMP or OBD are ON in the cluster. Take your vehicle to a
Authorised Mahindra dealer for assistance.
When Park regeneration is happening do not press the
Accelerator, Brake, Clutch pedals or change the gear from
Neutral or Park as this will abort the regeneration process.
• Park Regeneration can take up to 30 minutes to

complete. Once completed the REGEN telltale in the Diesel Fuel
instrument cluster will turn OFF. The engines idling speed
also returns to normal. It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel
fuel confirming to IS 1460: 2017 spec only.
• To abort the Park regeneration in case of any emergency, If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10
turn OFF the ignition or press any of the Accelerator, PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause
Brake or Clutch Pedals. damage to the DPF system and will not be covered under
• If the Park Regeneration gets aborted by itself or does warranty.
not start, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for
assistance.

4.4 Instrument Cluster Telltales for DPF & SCR

Systems

3 4 100 120
Trip - A 80 140
X 1000 rpm km/h
2 5 60 160
Distance 8888.8 km
40 180
1 6 Time 88:88 hr
Avg. Speed 220 km/h 20 200
ENGINE!
7 220
999999 km
E F 5 C H
ZIP
A B C C A B
A B C
(and) REGEN
DPF Indicator Lamp REGEN Indicator Lamp DEF Indicator Lamp OBD Check Lamp
For other regional languages, Kindly refer the Annexure chapter at the end of this manual.

4-10
(and) REGEN
DPF Indicator Lamp REGEN Indicator Lamp Error Code Alert Message in Cluster Action to Taken
E31 DEF LEVEL LOW ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 2400 KM Fill DEF within 2400 km
E32/E33 DEF LEVEL LOW, ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 800 KM /...KM Fill DEF within 800 km
DEF Indicator Lamp OBD Check Lamp
E34 NO RESTART ALLOWED, FILL DEF Fill DEF immediately
E35
NO START ALLOWED, FILL DEF Fill DEF immediately
Warning Lamp Engine Action
Indicates
Status Peformance to be taken E11 INCORRECT DEF, DETECTED / WRONG DEF, DETECTED Refill with Correct DEF
1. Go to the highway and drive
ON DPF is
above 60 kms/hr for 20-30 min
E12/E13 INCORRECT DEF, ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 800 KM /...KM / Refill with Correct DEF
(or)
Normal starting 2. Perform Park Regeneration
WRONG DEF ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 800 KM /...KM
to choke (or) E14 NO RESTART ALLOWED, CHECK DEF Refill with Correct DEF
REGEN ON 3. Take the vehicle to Mahindra
Authorized Dealer
E15 NO START ALLOWED, CHECK DEF Refill with Correct DEF
Limp DPF almost Perform Park Regeneration
Blinking (or)
home fully choked
DEF DOSING MALFUNCTIONING Contact Mahindra Dealer
Take the vehicle to Mahindra E21
ON
REGEN Authorized Dealer
E22/E23
DEF DOSING MALFUNCTIONING,ENGINE WILL NOT START IN 800 KM /
Contact Mahindra Dealer
DEF DOSING MALFUNCTIONING,ENGINE WILL NOT START IN ... KM
Blinking E24 NO RESTART ALLOWED , DOSING MALFUNCTIONING Contact Mahindra Dealer
Limp DPF Take the vehicle to Mahindra
home fully choked
Authorized Dealer
ON E25 NO START ALLOWED , DOSING MALFUNCTIONING Contact Mahindra Dealer

Do's & Don’ts • Do not refill the DEF with Engine ON or ignition ON state
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) • When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may
escape. Refill DEF in a well - ventilated area only.
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO
22241 specification can be used. • Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin,
eyes, or clothing
• Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with
water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
necessary specifications and the after-treatment system
of your vehicle may be damaged. During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the
vehicle near any flammable materials as you may observe
• Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This hot emission gases from exhaust pipe.
may cause damage to the treatment system.
To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from
• Total DEF quantity inside the DEF tank should never exhaust system.
exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/
component failure. Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local
jurisdiction while driving.
• While refilling DEF inside tank be careful not to allow any
foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or
lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage
the system.
• DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the
diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel,
engine/fuel system could get damaged
• If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal
surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and
water. DEF residues will corrode the components and
metal surfaces, painted body panels

4-12
OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE
5 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE i). Manually operated
XUV700 comes with RKE or PKE depending on the variant.
Your key tag number is given • Unlock the center

on the tag attached to the key. locking with RKE /PKE
It is recommended that you key fob unlock button
record the key tag number and (Refer center locking
store in a safe place. The keys chapter for details)
XXXX
operate all locks in your
vehicle including those of the
doors and ignition with
X
steering lock.
X
X
X
U82G08
• Push the flush handle

once as shown the
Never leave the key in the ignition switch with children in the image
vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start the engine,
operate power windows and other controls, or move the vehicle,
resulting in personal injuries to the by stander and/or children
seated inside.
• Door handle will popup
as shown
5.1 Doors
5.1.1 Flush Outer Door Handle

• Pull the handle firmly
XUV700 comes with the flush outer door handle. It comes outwards and open the
with two types: door.
i). Manually operated ii). Electrically operated

• Door handle will return 5.1.2 To Open a Door from Inside

to the original position
automatically when the
handle is released after Pull the door lever away
opening the door from the door and push the
door outward to open.
ii). Electrically operated
unlock the center locking with RKE /PKE key fob unlock
button (Refer center locking chapter for details) 5.1.3 Locking / Unlocking Individual Doors from
Inside
• Door handle will popup Pull the door lever away from the door and push the door
automatically as shown outward to open.
without touching the
handle
A B
A: Lock
• Pull the handle firmly B: Unlock
outwards and open the
door.
Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the
respective door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock or
• Door handle will return to its original position when the press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.
vehicle is locked by RKE / PKE key fob or the vehicle
speed exceeds 7 kmph
Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking
system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to
Central Locking section for further details.

5-2
5.1.4 Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from For unlocking insert the key and rotate it in clockwise gently (don’t
Outside (Mechanical Handle) apply abusive load). Take out the key to return the handle to
nominal position and pull back the handle to open the door.
For locking, Pull the handle and same time press the door with
Push the handle slightly as knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle goes to
release mode) insert the key and rotate the key anti-clockwise
shown in the image.
gently. Take out the key and leave the handle to nominal position.
Pull the handle once to ensure locking happen properly.
Pull the handle firmly

outwards and grip & pull A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors
the handle further to gain manually from outside. Locking the driver door from outside
access for the key. activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors
of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
The driver door can be

manually locked/unlocked 5.1.5 Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from
from outside by using Outside (Electrical Handle)
conventional key. The key is
bidirectional; you can insert
it into the keyhole either Push the handle slightly as
way. Turn the key anti- shown in the image.
clockwise to lock or
clockwise to unlock the
door.
Conventional locking is on driver door side only, No key lock set on
codriver door.

nominal position. Pull the handle once to ensure locking

Push handle as shown in
happen properly.
the Picture and grip & pull
the handle further to gain
access for the key.
A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the
doors manually from outside.
The driver door can be
manually locked/unlocked Locking the driver door from outside activates the central
from outside by using locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle.
conventional key. The key is Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
bidirectional; you can insert
it into the keyhole either
5.1.6 Locking / Unlocking the Tailgate
way. Turn the key anti-
clockwise to lock or
clockwise to unlock the
door. Press the Tailgate release
button for 1 second on the
Conventional locking is on driver door side only, No key lock remote to unlock the tail
set on codriver door. door. The hazard lamp flash
For unlocking insert the key and rotate it in clockwise gently three times indicating the
(don’t apply abusive load). Take out the key to return the same.
handle to nominal position and pull back the handle to open
the door.
For locking, Pull the handle and same time press the door
with knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle
goes to release mode) insert the key and rotate is anti-
clockwise gently. Take out the key and leave the handle to

5-4
2. Slide the mechanical key to the left side and hold the
Then press the tail gate key in the same position to open the tail gate.
release switch on the
bottom of the tailgate 5.2 Central Locking System
within 45 second as shown
in the illustration and pull All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or
tailgate to open. unlocked from the driver door.
To close the tailgate, lower the tailgate half way down and 5.2.1 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from
allow it fall on its own weight. The door will be locked Outside
automatically.
To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using
the conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise
5.1.7 Tailgate Safety Release Lever respectively in the driver door keyhole.

with the emergency tailgate If any door was unlocked or not closed completely when
safety release lever located central locking activated. It will only get locked when the
on the bottom of the door is completely closed..
tailgate inside. In an
emergency condition the Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done
passenger can open the using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter
tailgate from inside the for more details.
vehicle.
The tailgate can be opened by the following steps:
1. Insert the mechanical key into the hole.

5.2.2 Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from 5.2.3 Child Safety Rear Door lock (If equipped)
Inside
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right-side child safety
rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the
A B Press the driver door lock
rear door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s)
tab down (A) to lock or lift
can only be opened from the outside.
the lock tab up (B) to unlock
To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the
all doors simultaneously.
lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the
activation of the child lock.
Anti-Lock Out To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, pull the
lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the
Master Actuator Lock at Door open (Except Driver Door)
deactivation of the child lock.
— If any door is opened and driver door is in closed
condition:
• Vehicle speed is below 7 kmph - On actuating master A
actuator lock manually, master actuator will get lock &
unlock immediately for the first time. On actuating A: Activate/Lock
master actuator lock again, vehicle will get locked. B:De-activate/Unlock
B
• Vehicle speed above 7 kmph - On actuating master
actuator lock manually, vehicle will get locked for the first
time itself.
If driver door is open and master actuator lock is If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that
performed, vehicle will not get locked the child safety locks have been disabled.
Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear
door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in
the rear seat.

5-6
5.3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System 5.3.3 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE
A
A: LED
Press the LOCK button on
B
B B: Lock the RKE key fob for locking
C
C
C: Tailgate Release / Search and arming the vehicle.
D
D
D: Unlock
W62G95
Hazard lamps flash once - if all the doors in the vehicle are
5.3.1 Precautions while Handling Remote Key locked and armed successfully using RKE.
Hazard lamps flash five times along with an alarm - if
• Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off
any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.
RF signal
• Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a
long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under
If alarm is in mute condition only the Hazard lamps will
direct sunlight
flash. If alarm to be activated then Press Lock & Unlock
• Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic button together to unmute the alarm. Now both Hazard
washer lamps flash and alarm will work.
5.3.2 Remote Key Status LED
LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about

the Remote lock/unlock/trunk button input.

5.3.4 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE • All doors are closed properly
• Vehicle speed is greater than 7 kmph
Auto Locking ON DOOR OPEN — Once the auto lock has
Press the UNLOCK button been activated, if any door is opened, then the auto lock will
on the RKE key fob to reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes
unlock and disarm the below 5 kmph and further crosses 7 kmph
vehicle.
Auto Locking ON MASTER ACTUATOR UNLOCK — Once
the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then
the auto lock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the
vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 7
Hazard lamps flash twice - if there was no theft attempt kmph
during the lock (armed) period.
Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice (If equipped)- if there 5.3.6 Auto Unlocking
was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following
Hazard lamps flash four times along with an alarm - if
conditions:
there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
• When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR In the
event of a crash
Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed
properly or left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times 5.3.7 Auto Re-locking
to indicate the same.
Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when;
5.3.5 Auto Locking • No door status change for 45 seconds after unlocking the
vehicle using RKE/PKE
All doors will get locked automatically when;

5-8
5.3.8 Search Function 5.3.9 Mute/ Unmute Function
Press the Tailgate button

on the key fob 2 times
within 2 seconds to locate The chirps can be muted /
the vehicle in a parking lot. unmute. Press the LOCK &
Search alarm can also bring UNLOCK buttons together
attention to the vehicle and for 3 sec. to toggle between
surrounding area, warning MUTE / UNMUTE mode.
about an intruder or seek
for help.
When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate unmute to mute
condition. Hazard lamp & chirp will flash once to indicate
along with an alarm for 30 sec. In this mode:
Mute to un-mute
• Pressing any button on the key fob again switches OFF
the alarm
In the unmuted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto
• Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE
disarms/unlocks all doors Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period
(4 Chirps). In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and
alarm chirps would not be audible.
The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked
conditions of the vehicle.

5.3.10 Theft Alarm 5.3.11 RKE Operating Range
Vehicle enters alarm mode when there is a change in door

status/ignition status provided the vehicle was locked
through RKE. Using RKE key fob , you can
lock/arm or unlock/disarm
Hazard Lamp and Alarm will flash 27 seconds. the vehicle from distances
approximately 9 m (30 ft)
After the alarm period, there will not be any alarm again till This is in open area.
any further change in the door/ignition status.
The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked

using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key If there is reduction in RKE range, please follow the steps
will also activate the security system. below:
When the vehicle is armed by RKE, opening the door from the
. Check the distance: The RKE may be too far from the
inside by operating the door inner handle or opening the door
from the outside using the key will be treated as unauthorised vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad
activating the vehicle security alarm. If this occurs, the alarm can weather
be disarmed by either pressing the ‘UNLOCK’ button on the RKE or . Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be
turning ON the ignition followed by a successful authentication. blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right,
hold the RKE higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a
radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport
transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in
range of RKE
. Check the RKE battery: See battery replacement procedure,
given later in this section
. If the RKE is still not working correctly, contact an
Mahindra Authorised Dealer

5-10
5.4 Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System (if equipped)
Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System enables you to enter or • While locking and unlocking the vehicle Passively, the
exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock distance between the Smart Key and the corresponding
the doors. You can start/stop, lock or unlock the vehicle door handle must not be greater than 3ft (1m).
using PKE. To do this, you only need carry the PKE key fob
with you. • Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off
RF waves
• Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a
A long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under
A: LED direct sunlight
B
B
B: Lock
• Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an
C
C
C: Tailgate Release / Search ultrasonic washer
D
D
D: Unlock • The PKE can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static
W62G95
electricity
Carrying the PKE along with you, you can lock or unlock the
The front side of the PKE key fob has three control buttons: doors and tail door and even start and stop the engine
Unlock (D), Lock (B) and Tail gate release (C) buttons. There without inserting the key. Functions of the buttons on a PKE
is also a emergency key release button, which releases a is similar to the remote keyless entry.
mechanical key for emergency purposes (E. g. when PKE
battery is low). To remove the metal key, press and hold the Locking the vehicle – Through Flush Handle (Electrical
release button and pull the mechanical key out. Handle)
1. Carry the PKE
2. Close all the doors

• On attempting to lock by pressing the button in door

handle, an alert will displayed in cluster, if the steering is
3. Push the handle to lock not locked
the vehicle
• With the one PKE Key fob inside, on locking the vehicle
using other key fob/2nd key fob, the key which is kept
4. The hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate the inside would get deactivated completely for the security
locking (5 blinks and 5 chirps will be provided if engine of the vehicle. To make the key active again, the vehicle
bonnet is open while locking) should be unlocked either using PKE or by pressing
remote unlock using the other key fob with which
previously the vehicle was locked.
• Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from • On performing PKE passive lock with key fob in your
the outside door handle possession in ignition ON state, "Key Not in Vehicle" alert
will be triggered in cluster along with chirp & hazard
• Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the door lamps flash for 5 times and vehicle will remain in unlock
handle with the PKE key fob in the proximity (PKE key fob state.
should be nearer to the triggered side). For E.g., locking/
unlocking of the driver door is possible only if PKE is • On performing key fob remote lock with all doors closed
around the driver area in ignition ON state, no alert will be triggered and vehicle
will remain in unlock state.
• Even after pressing the outside door handle button, if the
Unlocking the vehicle:
doors do not lock, a chime is heard along with the
hazard blinking for 5 times, then one of the following 1. Carry the PKE Key fob
situations are possible reason:
2. Press the button in the door handle
– PKE Key fob is left inside the vehicle
3. All doors would unlock and Front DRL & Tail lamps
– One of the doors not closed properly flash twice.

5-12
• Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from • Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from
the outside driver door handle the outside door handle
• Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the door • Tail door can be unlocked by pressing the button in the
handle only when the key is in same side of the driver tail door only when the key is in range from the tail door
door handle is pressed
Mute/Unmute the Alarm/Beeps
Unlocking the Tail door alone:
The chirps can be muted /
1. Carry the PKE Key Fob unmute. Press the LOCK &
UNLOCK buttons together
for 3 sec. to toggle between
MUTE/UNMUTE mode.
Hazard lamps will flash once
2. Press the trunk release to indicate unmute to mute
button in the tail door and condition. Hazard lamp &
pull the tail door chirp will flash once to
indicate Mute to unmute.
3. Tail door would unlock and hazard warning lights will Only the door open beeps and alarm can be muted. The PKE alerts
cannot be muted.
blink 3 times
4. On closing the door, tail door would get locked
automatically

5.4.1 Engine START/STOP Switch ( SSS) (if equipped)

Even with the failure in the start/stop switch, vehicle's
normal function may work which depends on the severity of
the failure. Please visit the nearest Mahindra Authorised
The engine can be started
VOL +
SET+
ENTER
Dealer to rectify the problem immediately.
or stopped by pressing the
SET-
RESUME
START
Start Stop Switch (SSS), with Engine start/stop Switch positions:
ENGINE
STOP the valid PKE Key Fob inside 3
the vehicle. To operate the engine start /stop switch to its intended
2
1
function, PKE Key Fob should be inside the vehicle.

OFF: To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and press the
engine start/stop button once. Status LED in the engine start
REAR /stop button goes OFF to indicate the OFF position.
A/C
Whenever the doors are opened or the door handle button
is pressed, the engine start/stop button will be illuminated
and will go off after few seconds.
If the Engine is not switching off after pressing the Engine
Upon any fault Start Stop switch (One Press), then press and Hold start/stop
identification by the system switch for more than 3 seconds ( Long press SSS) or rapidly
USB
in the start/stop switch press & release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3
(SSS), an alert would be seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition (IGN) status is
provided in the instrument changed to ACC position. Vehicle ACC mode will get off after
cluster for few seconds. 30 second OR user is opening Driver door. However, you
Please visit the nearest can still lock the vehicle using mechanical key. Contact the
Mahindra Authorised nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer at the earliest
Dealer immediately to
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering
rectify the problem.
column lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine
start/stop button is in OFF position to protect against the

5-14
theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the remaining ON) without engine running, can drain the
driver door is opened or 30 seconds after engine start stop battery. Switch OFF the system if engine is not to be started
Switch changes to OFF position. If the steering wheel is not for long duration.
locked properly when you open the driver door and on
attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the
the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again following conditions:
(by toggling Engine Start/Stop button). If the problem is not • If the electronic steering lock is not getting unlocked
solved, we recommend to take the vehicle to nearest
Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately. • A warning would be displayed in the cluster screen for
few seconds.
Ignition ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the engine
start/stop button when the switch position is in OFF/ACC
without depressing the clutch pedal and with the PKE Key . If the steering wheel
Fob inside the vehicle. Status LED in the engine start/stop doesn’t unlock properly,
button will turn red to indicate the IGN ON position and the press the start/stop
vehicle is ready for starting. button while turning the
steering wheel right/left to
OFF ACC ON release the tension on the
lock.
VOL + VOL +
SET+
SET-
ENTER
VOL +
SET+
SET-
ENTER
Still if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact
SET+
SET-
ENTER
the nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.

RESUME RESUME RESUME
START START START

ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE
STOP STOP STOP
3 3 3
• When engine start/stop button is ON or engine is in

2 2 2
1 1 1
running condition with vehicle at standstill and if any

door is opened & closed, the system checks for the PKE
A/C ECON
REAR
A/C
A/C ECON
REAR
A/C
A/C ECON
REAR
A/C
Key fob.
OFF
Keeping the system in the ignition ON position for longer
OFF OFF
time (will be noticeable by the LED lamp of the SSS

NO NO
USB USB USB

If the PKE Key Fob is not

inside the vehicle, an alert If engine start/stop switch is pressed without pressing the
in the instrument cluster clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) pedal, engine will not start, and the
is displayed along with vehicle power modes will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→
hazard lamps flash & ON
chirp for 5 times to If the engine start/stop switch is pressed from the OFF position
indicate that key is not directly, along with the clutch (MT) / Brake (AT) in depressed
detected inside the vehicle position, there may be a small delay in the engine cranking.
` This is normal and is not a fault.
Bring the PKE Key Fob inside the vehicle or keep the key in Never press the engine start/stop switch while the vehicle is in
the detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle. motion except in an emergency. This will result in the engine
turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake
Starting the vehicle systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking
function, leading to an accident.
Manual Transmission: To start the engine, press the clutch
and press the engine start/stop button once with the key Even if the key fob is not there in the cabin. The engine will keep
running, until it is switched off, after that it can not be
inside the vehicle. The engine can be started from any
restarted in absence of the key Before leaving the driver seat,
position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch. always make sure engine start/stop switch is in OFF position
Automatic Transmission: To start the engine, Gear Lever and always take the PKE Key Fob with you. If the Ignition
shall be in Park Position, press the Brake pedal and press remains ON and the doors are locked. The central locking
system will give 3 chirps and flashes to indicate. This can cause
the engine start/stop button once with the key inside the
battery to be drained off.
vehicle. The engine can be started from any position (OFF /
ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch. As a emergency procedure (if any failure of brake or clutch
switch). If the SSS is pressed continuously for more than 10
seconds then the engine can be started.
Ensure the gear lever is in neutral/Park position before Emergency stop: To turn the engine OFF in an emergency,
starting. press and hold the engine start/stop button for more than 2

5-16
seconds or rapidly press and release the engine start/stop Back-up Mode : When the key fob battery is critically low to
button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle detect the key fob inside the vehicle or the battery is dead
ignition is changed to ACC position. or not available. This mode is triggered by the PKE to
understand the condition to Switch ON ignition and to start
BACK up Start: If the key fob battery is low, the key may not the vehicle engine.
be detected on pressing SSS and SSS LED will be blinking in
red color. In such a situation, press the start/stop button
once while the status LED in the button is blinking Red and If key fob battery is
the below error message is displayed in the instrument detected low by the PKE
cluster. system, an alert would be
triggered. Change the
battery by following the
procedure as mentioned in
Now place the key fob in
the section for battery
the key fob tray with the
replacement.
Clutch (MT)/Brake (AT) pedal
`
pressed and then push the
Start-Stop switch twice to
Start the engine.
Key fob battery low can be detected only if the key has been
` continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key outside the
vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the
drained battery cannot be detected.
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob
in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop switch
LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will
be displayed again in the cluster. In this case, if you press
the Start/Stop switch again vehicle will start in Back-Up
mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.

5.4.2 Vehicle locking/Unlocking in an Emergency jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate
Situation distance between the two devices
If the PKE Key Fob does not operate normally, you can lock • Another vehicle PKE key fob is being operated close to
your vehicle
or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:
• PKE Key Fob kept inside the glove box or top bin in the
instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep
Refer to Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside the PKE Key Fob in the visible zone or in your pocket for
(Mechanical/Electrical Handle) section for more details. getting it detected
It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. • Keep the PKE key fob away from the water or any liquid.
Vehicle can be started by any unauthorised person. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure
to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your
A maximum of 2 Keys can be registered to a vehicle. If you lose manufacturer’s vehicle warranty
a key, we strictly recommend to contact Mahindra Authorised
Dealer immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.
The PKE Key Fob may not work if any of the following Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever
occurs: leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle
ignition in ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security.
• If the vehicle is close to a radio station, airport, or an area
where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions Do not hand over the PKE Key Fob to any unauthorized
which can interfere with the normal operation of the person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may
PKE/RKE be compromised in doing so.
• The PKE Key Fob is near a mobile or a cellular phone or

some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal
from the PKE/RKE could be blocked by normal operation
of your cell phone or smartphone . Avoid placing the PKE/
RKE and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or

5-18
5.4.3 PKE Alerts Display Operating Conditions
Display Operating Conditions The warning will be triggered when

Key fob is not getting detected by the
The warning will be triggered when system. Users need to keep the key in
the vehicle Ignition is in ON condition the armrest Key fob Tray and then
with the Brake pedal pressed & the press the start/stop switch to turn ON
user is pressing SSS to start Vehicle & the vehicle.
Gear position is not in park or
The warning will be triggered when
neutral. (If equipped)
vehicle ignition in OFF condition.
When user tries to lock the vehicle
Display Operating Conditions using driver door PKE trigger switch,
but key is inside the vehicle.
vehicle Ignition ON or Engine running
condition, user is pressing SSS to turn
vehicle is in cranked or in ignition ON
OFF Vehicle & Gear position is not in
condition, but key is not inside the
park. (If equipped)
vehicle.

Start Stop switch is Malfunction .
Kindly contact the nearest Mahindra
dealer

Display Operating Conditions 5.4.4 Steering Lock Alerts

The warning will be triggered when A warning will be displayed in the
Key Fob battery is Low. Instrument cluster. If the steering
wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press
the start/stop button while turning
the steering wheel right/left to release
This is information to user In Ignition the tension on the lock.
on to start Car by pressing Brake
pedal along with SSS Press AT variant. If the electronics Steering Wheel not
getting locked even though all locking
conditions are satisfy then this
warning is displayed.
This is information to user In Ignition
on to start Car by pressing Clutch A warning will be displayed in the
pedal along with SSS press MT Instrument cluster. If the steering
variant. wheel lock unit has system failure. in
this case please contact Mahindra
dealership to check system failure.
A warning will be displayed in the
Instrument cluster. If the steering
wheel does not pair with PKE ECU. in
this case please contact Mahindra
dealership to check system.

5-20
5.5 Remote Battery the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the
halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check
Battery Specification operation of the Remote.
Battery Voltage 3V
Battery Capacity 225 mAh While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the
Battery Model No. battery.
2032
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Remote Battery Replacement housing or the printed circuit board.
If the Remote operation is inconsistent when any of the Pull out the battery and discard the same. Insert new
buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the Remote battery of same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure
battery is weak. the positive side of the batteries face up. Align both the
halves of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check
operation of the Remote.
The Batteries are Lithium Ion batteries. They should be kept
+
CR 2032
The rear side of the Remote away from children.
3V
is snap fitted. Flip open the

3V
32
20
CR
key blade and use two

fingers on the side of the
This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is
fob and gently pry open the swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two
32
3V
20
CR
+
battery cover. hours and lead to death.
Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery
`
compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and keep
Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently pry out the away from children. If you think that batteries have been
swallowed or stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help
battery to and discard the same. Insert new batteries of 3V immediately.
type (Battery No. 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure

5.6 Key Fob Tray LED will blink in red color, with the above error message will
be displayed again in the cluster.
In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again before
the above error message in the instrument cluster goes
away the 2nd time, the vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if
the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AT) pedal is pressed.
5.7 If PKE/RKE Key fob is Lost

W62F01 W62F02 If you have lost the programmed PKE/RKE Key fob , contact
Mahindra Authorised Dealer for procuring a new Smart Key.
The Key fob is to be kept in the above shown key fob tray
when the system requests, like in the case of the below While programming a new key set, you will have to submit
error message in the instrument cluster. all the keys available with you, to an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer.
This message is displayed

only when the PKE system Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time)
fails to detect the key fob to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum
which is inside the vehicle timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days
when the user is trying to after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the
Switch ON the ignition. Mahindra Authorised Dealer to understand the formalities
involved.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to
deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the engine.
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Mahindra
in the key fob tray below the armrest. The Start-stop switch Authorised Dealer for de-activating the function of the lost

5-22
or stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access tell tale lamp will illuminate and the engine cannot be
using the misplaced key. started.
Only PKE/RKE transmitters programmed to your vehicle • The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been
electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of taken out of the ignition/vehicle in PKE.
your vehicle.
5.8 Engine Immobiliser System If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously
illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a
An Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that system malfunction. Contact an Mahindra Authorised
prevents the vehicle from being operated by an Dealer immediately.
unauthorised person. The Engine immobiliser prevents the
engine from being started unless it recognizes signals from With the correct coded key in the vehicle and pressing the
the correct coded key. When a wrong key is inserted or a SSS ON, automatically recognizes and authenticates the
theft attempt is detected, the alarm is set off, and the system. It enables the engine to start.
hazard lamps flash along with a siren.
The system is automatically activated when the key is
removed from the ignition. In the event of the vehicle not starting with the correct key,
switch off the ignition for a minimum of 1 minute and
attempt to start the vehicle again.
5.8.1 Features of the Immobiliser System:
• Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in

Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobiliser
possession of the correct vehicle key
system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications can affect
• The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.
removed from the ignition/vehicle in PKE. At every
ignition ON, if the vehicle does not recognize the correct
key code, the engine check lamp will blink and security

The security system will be activated when the vehicle is locked

2. Lift the bonnet a little to
using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors with the manual key
will also activate the security system. access the safety latch
holding the bonnet striker.
Using the ignition key blade to open the diver door, when the This safety latch is located
vehicle was locked and armed with PKE/RKE key fob, in this
condition if any of the door is opened which results in door switch
below the bonnet at the
status change will be treated as unauthorised by the system setting center.
and this will trigger the alarm. Press the unlock button on the PKE/
RKE key fob to off the alarm. `
5.9 Opening and Closing the Bonnet

3. Lift the safety latch and
The bonnet release lever is in the driver side foot well area, lift the bonnet.
below the instrument panel. To open bonnet follow the 4. bonnet is supported by a
steps below:
SET+
SET-
ENTER
stay rod.
RESUME
3
2
1
START
ENGINE
STOP
VOL +
SET+
SET-
RESUME
ENTER
3
1. Pull the lever below the
driver side instrument
2
1
A/C ECON
REAR
A/C
Be careful while opening the bonnet immediately after a drive; the engine
NO OFF
panel to release the compartment will be very hot

bonnet.
USB
Always double check to be sure that the bonnet is firmly latched before
driving away. If it is not latched properly, the bonnet can open while the
W62E116 vehicle is being driven, causing a loss of visibility, resulting in an accident
` Do not move the vehicle with the bonnet in the raised position, as vision is
obstructed

5-24
To close the bonnet, follow the below steps: 5.10 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing
1. Remove the stay rod supporting the bonnet by slightly Follow the below steps to open the Fuel lid:
lifting the bonnet
2. Bring the bonnet near to its self-opening/closing
position
3. Now, push the bonnet to close and ensure the
primary latch is engaged 1. Press the UNLOCK
4. Before driving off, check bonnet is locked properly button on RKE/PKE.
with primary latch fully engaged
`
Bonnet Open Hazard - When the bonnet is open and vehicle
is in unlock condition:
• Hazard lamps flash continuously to alert the user that
the bonnet is open 2. Then press the fuel lid
gently once to open.
• Hazard cluster telltale also flashes
To stop the warning, do any one of the following:
• Close the bonnet `
• Press the hazard button TWICE
• Change the turn signal stalk position
• Drive the vehicle > 10 km/hr.

Diesel Petrol
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before
starting the vehicle.
Fuel filler lid cannot be released whenever the vehicle locked

condition.
` ` 5.11 Manual Fuel Lid Override
Follow the below process to open the fuel lid manually in

case of any issue in electrical circuits:
Diesel should be filled in Petrol should be filled in
diesel filler cap. petrol filler cap. 1. Press and Open the trim cover on Left side of luggage
compartment.
Diesel should not be filled in blue (DEF) filler cap.

2. Unhook and Pull the blue
3. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to open. Refuel and color knob as shown in the
put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise illustration to unlock the
direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid fuel lid manually.
shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with
body.
`
3. Then press the fuel lid gently once to open.

5-26
4. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise to open. Refuel and

put the cap back in its place and tighten in the clockwise
direction till three distinct clicks are heard. Close the fuel lid
shut and press the fuel lid once again to make it flush with
body.
Ensure the fuel cap and lid are securely closed before
starting the vehicle.
Do not pull the cable with high force or pull excessively as it
may damage the locking mechanism.

STARTING AND DRIVING I
6 STARTING AND DRIVING I

Never start your vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area.
6.1 Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep the garage door open or
start the engine in an open area.
Before starting the vehicle, inspect the interior and exterior of
the vehicle; for any damages, leaks, loose parts, foreign Mirror Adjustment: Ensure that the rear view mirror and
objects/debris. In case of any abnormality noticed, Contact both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of
Mahindra Authorised Dealer. the road behind.
Before starting your journey, check and ensure proper Exterior Lamps: With the help of someone observe and
functioning of safety devices/components like brake system, confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you
steering system, all lamps & tyres. Also ensure no critical work on the controls from the driver seat. Also, check
warning lamps are ON in the cluster. In case of any safety functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.
device/component not functioning as intended or any critical
warning lamps found ON in cluster, contact Authorised Door Latches: Check for positive closing, latching, and
Mahindra service center and get it rectified before starting the locking of all doors, both from inside and outside.
journey.
Fluid Leaks: Check the area under the vehicle after an
Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat overnight parking for fuel, power steering fluid, brake fluid,
belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat /
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. If leaks are observed
steering adjustments when the vehicle is in motion. Start the
contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
vehicle only when seated and belted in the driver's seat
Engine idle speed is controlled by engine management system.

When the engine starts, idle RPM runs higher than normal in order
to warm the engine. The engine idle speed RPM reduces once the
engine warms up.

6.2 Starting the Engine Manual Transmission-MT

Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their seats and have 1. Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button
buckled their safety belts. For more information on seat, headrest or through ignition key
positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer “Seat Belts” section.
2. Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position. if found in
any other position
Before cranking the engine 3. Apply parking brake / EPB, if found not applied
• Make sure the gear shift lever is in Neutral/Park mode 4. Do not press the accelerator.
• Ensure that the parking brake / EPB is engaged. Turn the 5. Depress the clutch pedal and press the start stop
key to IGN position but do not turn the key to start button or Turn the key momentarily to the START
position to crank the engine
Automatic Transmission-AT
6. Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button
1. Turn the ignition ON by pressing the start stop button or key
or through ignition key
2. Shift the gear shift lever to Park or Neutral position, if
found in any other position Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.
3. Apply parking brake / EPB, if found not applied If the engine fails to start, attempt to restart after about 10
seconds. If the engine fails to start even after repeated
4. Do not press the accelerator attempts as per the procedure given above, contact the
5. Depress the brake pedal and press the start stop nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
button or Turn the key momentarily to the START To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 seconds before
position to crank the engine attempting to restart the engine.
6. Once the engine starts, release the Start Stop Button
or key.

6-2
5. Drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the

accelerator pedal simultaneously
If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster cables, a
booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start. Automatic Transmission-AT
Jump-starting a vehicle can be dangerous if done
improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure” section
1. Release the parking brake / EPB (Electric Parking
Brake)
in this manual for correct procedure.
2. Depress the Brake pedal
If the engine still fails to start, contact an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer for assistance. 3. Shift the gear lever to D or R or M
Ensure the following when the engine is running: 4. Drive by releasing the brake pedal and depressing the
accelerator pedal simultaneously
• All warning lamps are OFF
Engine Idling - In Cold Weather: Avoid full throttle operation
• Low oil pressure lamp is OFF when the engine is cold and prolonged idling at low ambient
Engine Idling: The idle speed is controlled automatically, temperatures. Long periods of idling is harmful to engine.
Combustion chamber temperatures can drop to low
and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
temperatures, where the fuel injected may not burn
After idling for a few seconds, follow the below steps to completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish
drive away: to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and
Manual Transmission-MT causing rapid wear to the engine.
1. Release the parking brake / EPB (Electric Parking For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the engine
Brake) during cold weather conditions, use suitable fuel (Petrol/Diesel)
which will be available at filling stations during winter months.
2. Depress the clutch Check with your fuel retailer for details.
3. Shift the gear lever to 1st gear Coolant in the radiator will survive up to ambient
temperature of -15 degree C. If the ambient temperature is
4. Release the brake pedal

expected go below -15 degree C, during operation, the • Engage the parking brake / EPB
engine will require a different coolant/coolant
concentration. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer for • Move the gear shift lever to 1st gear position (reverse
assistance. gear if parking on an incline).
• Slowly release the brake pedal
6.3 Stopping the Engine • Lock your vehicle when leaving
Your vehicle is powered by a turbo engine. Before turning the Automatic Transmission
engine OFF, always allow the engine to return to normal idle
speed and run for few seconds. This assures proper cooling • Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal
and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly • Turn front wheels towards the road curb
necessary after any hard driving.
• Engage the parking brake / EPB
• Shift the gear lever to Park “P” position
To reduce the risk of personal injury, before turning OFF the
engine and leaving the vehicle, always follow the below • Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock
mentioned safety tips. position and remove the key
Manual Transmission-MT • Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle
(for PKE only)
• Keep your right foot on the brake pedal
• Slowly release the brake pedal
• Turn front wheels towards the road curb
• Lock your vehicle when leaving
• Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock
position and remove the key
• Press the start stop button once to switch off the vehicle Alert will be displayed in the infotainment screen if the gear
(for PKE only) shifter is not in P position. Engine will not switch off unless
shifter is in P position.

6-4
6.4 Exhaust Gases
Protection against exhaust gas entry into the vehicles Never keep the engine running when the vehicle is parked in
interior is considered in the design of the exhaust system. an area which is not properly ventilated. This could lead to
serious respiratory problems and/or death
• Vehicle exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide, Carbon
Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxides, Hydrocarbons and Particulate
Matter. These are potential environmental and health 6.5 Driving Your Vehicle
hazards
6.5.1 Pedals
• Avoid inhaling the exhaust gases. Carbon Monoxide is a
colorless and odorless gas and can cause MT AT
unconsciousness or even death
• If the exhaust system is damaged for any reason or you
notice a change in the exhaust noise, have the vehicle
checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately
• Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in an
enclosed area where ventilation is poor for the exhaust
C B A
gases B A
W62K34
• Since the engine compartment and exhaust system
components are hot and can ignite a fire, do not park or
A: Accelerator Pedal B: Brake Pedal C: Clutch Pedal
leave the vehicle with the engine idling over dry grass,
leaves, paper, rags or any combustible material

6.5.2 General Driving Precautions • Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving
conditions. You must follow the speed limits
• While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people,
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous
risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or material that might be present behind the vehicle
damage to your vehicle. • Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the
• Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual vehicles center of gravity and make your vehicle more
carefully unstable
• Before you start driving, check proper operation of the • Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may
brakes and steering system handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra
precautions, such as slower speeds and increased
• If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
unusual vibration, or if you have any concerns loaded vehicle
whatsoever, or if any warning lamps illuminate or
buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as • Always slowdown in gusty crosswinds. Because of its
soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more
necessary remedial action. Contact your Mahindra sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car.
Authorised Dealer if necessary Slowing down will allow you to have much better control
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle • When driving in off-road or on rugged terrain, do not
drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike
• Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle
practices rollover causing serious injury. You are also risking
expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and
• Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in chassis
tyres
• Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on
rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in

6-6
abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return
the vehicle to a safe direction of travel
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.
g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be
a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the 6.5.3 Off-Road Driving Precautions
way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating
inputs • When driving in off-road or on rugged terrains, never
over speed or make sharp turns. This may cause loss of
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavements made control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury
slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice
• Always maintain steering wheel control, Sudden changes
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion
down, but avoid severe brake or steering application.
Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after • Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed
reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either
sharply while returning to the road surface know the terrain or map-out your route before driving in
the area
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the
road and slow down gradually before returning to the • Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day
pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down of off-road driving that has taken you through rough
or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly terrain, sand, mud or water
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden
sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency.
Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control.
Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in
vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration or braking which could result in an increased

6.5.4 If your vehicle is submerged • Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient or friction
resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tab the brake
If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged up to over the bumper pedal while driving to remove the film of water
Contact your Mahindra 6.5.5 Driving Through Water

Authorised Dealer
immediately. Have the vehicle Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
towed to nearest Mahindra water, there are a number of precautions that must be
Authorised Dealer to check considered before entering the water.
any entry of water into the
engine
Never drive through still water that is higher than the
bottom of the axle hubs. Not following this instruction will
All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required allow water to enter vehicle components causing internal
to be changed in case of water ingress and contamination damage to the components, affecting drivability, safety,
emissions, and reliability.
When driving through water, drive very slowly and at
Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from constant speed, less than 8 kmph. Drive with out pressing
Mahindra Authorised Dealer technician. accelerator pedal and control speed using only the brakes.
At higher speed waves can be generated by the front of the
• Never drive through water when it flows above the vehicle. These water waves may enter air intake, causing
bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center
severe engine damage or cause a vehicle to get stalled.
line
You must slow down while driving through shallow water.
• The engine could get damaged internally if attempts are Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield,
made to cross through deep water impairing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a
water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing
loss of control in the vehicle.

6-8
• The ground under the water might not be firm which inspection after each day of off-road driving that has
could result the water being deeper than expected when taken you through water
driving the vehicle through it
• Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in 6.5.6 Flowing Water
water. It helps in preventing water getting inside the
exhaust pipes If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow
• When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail rate is reduced. The flowing water can erode the streambed
pipe to immerse in water causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine
• Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to
rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the compensate for drifting.
differentials, transmission, and transfer case, reducing
the oil's lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in 6.5.7 After Driving Off-Road or through Water
water, the lubricants should be replaced as required
• Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
in shift quality, locking up of your transmission does most on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damaging the inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken
transmission you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
• Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in around brake • After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage damage. Completely inspect the underbody of the
brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle for any damages
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be • Check for accumulations of plants or bushes. or
improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying polyethylene / plastic. These could be a fire hazard at
light pressure on the brake pedal high temperatures.
• When driving through water, traction or brake capability • Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid
may be limited. Always perform a maintenance leakages

• Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned 6.6 Tips for Better Fuel Economy
• We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the Fuel mileage (efficiency) depends on the average speed of the
Mahindra Authorised Dealer for any water entry into the vehicle, number of times the gears are shifted/Clutch pressed and
transmission / axle or the engine. number of times the brakes are applied. Vehicles operating in city
traffic condition /bumper to bumper traffic will exhibit lower fuel
mileage as compared to vehicles operating in open highways with
higher average speeds.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not have DOs
full braking power when needed leading to accidents. If you
have been operating the vehicle in off-road conditions, get the • Ensure that your vehicle is maintained as per
brakes checked and cleaned as necessary. recommendation (Refer to Warranty and Service
Information Guide)
• If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel • Ensure that the tyre pressures are as per
imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible recommendation (Ref to sticker on door pillar or
Page 6-56 or Warranty and Service Information Guide)
• After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids
and lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle • Ensure parking brakes are released fully
oils) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated
• Use Engine Start-Stop feature to the maximum
(Ref Page no 6-29), if applicable
• Drive with all the windows closed to reduce aerodynamic
drag
• Accelerate smoothly with a light foot on the accelerator

6-10
• Anticipate stops and slow down in coasting mode before Managing the Air conditioner for optimum fuel
applying brake efficiency
• In manual transmission, shift gears at the right speeds Recommended AC modes for obtaining optimum fuel
(Ref page 6-15 for gear shift indication prompts) efficiency.
Don'ts
MX/AX3/AX5 AX7/AX7L
• Fitting roof carrier will increase drag and reduce fuel
mileage
• Driving at speeds above 80 Kms/hr reduces fuel mileage
• Do not rest the left foot on the clutch pedal in manual
transmission vehicles as it will reduce the fuel mileage as
well as damage clutch/transmission components
How to Measure /Read Fuel Mileage Values?
• Do not attempt to use brakes with the left foot in
Automatic transmission vehicles • The Fuel mileage value is displayed in the cluster as AFE
(Average Fuel Economy) in Kms/lit.
• The AFE can be set to multiple modes.
• Refer to Page 3-12 for the procedure for resetting AFE
modes.

6.7 Ignition Switch (if equipped) vehicle is being driven, ignition switch remains in the ON
position.
An illuminator ring is
provided on the face of the
ignition switch to help in Do not leave the ignition in ON when the engine is OFF. This
locating the ignition switch could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.
at night. The ring will
illuminate the moment the START - This position is to start the engine by cranking the
driver door is opened and starter motor. This is a momentary position. When the key is
will remain glowing till the turned to start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once
driver door is closed. the engine is running, release the key, and the key reverts
back to ON position and the starter motor disengages from
the engine.
The different positions of the ignition switch are:
LOCK - This is the ignition and steering lock position. The
vehicle circuits and engine is completely switched OFF. The Do not continue cranking after the engine has started.
steering wheel is also locked, and the key can be removed
from the ignition only in this position.
ACC - The steering is unlocked and can be rotated. In this If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel from
position, all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode side to side and try again.
when you want to listen to music, etc., with the engine
temporarily switched OFF. The key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When
the key is removed, the steering column lock is activated,
ON - All electrical circuits are enabled. Some of the warning and the steering wheel cannot be turned.
or information lamps illuminate in this position. While some
of the lamps will go out after a few seconds, some will
continue to remain ON till the engine is started. When the

6-12
Never return the key to the LOCK position or try to remove If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 sec, Horn will
the key when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key get deactivate after 10 sec.
allows the steering wheel to lock. You will lose the control of
the vehicle and may cause serious accident. Remove the key
only when the vehicle is parked. 6.9 Manual Transmission
The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat

6.8 Horn rough. This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts
will develop with the initial few hundred kilometers of
Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the running.
horn.
The horn functions even when the ignition has been 6.9.1 Gear Lever
switched OFF.
Horn will get activated Your vehicle is fitted with

when horn switch/pad is manual transmission
pressed having six forward and one
reverse gear. This shift
VOL +
SET+
SET-
RESUME
ENTER
It will get deactivated when pattern is imprinted on the

horn switch/pad is released
START
gear lever knob.

ENGINE
STOP
3
2
1
or after 10 sec of
A/C ECON
REAR
A/C
continuously pressing.
NO OFF
USB
The transmission is fully synchronized in all forward gears,
so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily
accomplished. The clutch pedal should be depressed fully
while shifting, and then released slowly.

6.9.2 Gear Recommendation 6.9.3 Neutral Position
Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to This position stops the transmission of power from the
drive the vehicle. engine to drive axle. With the gear lever in neutral and
brakes released, the vehicle can move freely by pushing or
Based on the various parameters, it will suggest to change towing. The engine can be started in this mode. It is always
the gear for better fuel economy with up/down recommended to keep the brake pedal depressed in this
recommendation. position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when the vehicle
is standstill for longer durations with the engine idling.
Display
High
3 4 04:20 AM Low
Drive Info 18 oc 100 120
80 140
2 X 1000 rpm
5
Trip - A
60
Coasting
km/h
160
the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral and
Distance 8888.8km engine ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of panic
40 180you will not have the power of engine braking to
1 6 Time 88:88hr braking,
Avg. Speed 220km/h 20 slow down
200 the vehicle. This may lead to personal injury or
ENGINE!
7
Hold : Reset accident.
220
999999km
E F 5 C H
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral

position. Always engage manual parking brake/EPB before
Operating Condition leaving the vehicle, to prevent any vehicle movement
leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to
The numeral is the suggested gear. The Up or down arrow is vehicle.
to upshift or downshift. When no arrow, it indicates vehicle
is in which gear.

6-14
6.9.4 Gears 1-6 Downshifting -Diesel
Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic Vehicle Road Speed
conditions or as per requirement. The current gear selection Shift Range Engine RPM Range
(kmph)
is indicated in the cluster.
2–1 14
3–2 25
Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear lever
4–3 40 1000–1200
from the current position to any desired position. Perform
up-shifts or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump 5–4 52
gears. 6–5 61
6.9.5 Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds Upshifting - Petrol
Upshifting - Diesel Vehicle Road Speed

Shift Range Engine RPM Range
(kmph)
Vehicle Road Speed 1–2 18
Shift Range Engine RPM Range
(kmph)
2–3 30
1–2 16 3–4 44 1600–2300
2–3 27
3–4 42 1600–2000 4–5 54
4–5 54 5–6 70
5–6 70

Downshifting -Petrol 6.9.6 Reverse
Vehicle Road Speed

Shift Range Engine RPM Range This gear is to enable the
(kmph)
vehicle to move in the
2–1 14 reverse direction. Move the
gear lever into this position
3–2 25 only after the vehicle has
4–3 40 1000–1200 come to a complete stop
and the gear lever is in
5–4 52 neutral position.
6–5 61
The reverse lock ring located immediately below the gear
shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift
Shift gears at suitable engine or road speeds to safeguard lever to the reverse (R) position.
the transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s
frequently.
To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of reverse
gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and
When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be the engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you to wait
sufficient to prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the approximately for three seconds in neutral gear to shifting
manual parking brake/EPB in addition to shifting the gear into or out of reverse gear.
lever into gear. It is also recommended to turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
For brief stops, e. g. at traffic lights, keep the gear shift in
neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For
prolonged stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the

6-16
engine and apply the Parking brake/EPB. When stopping the 6.10 Automatic Transmission (AT)
vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not hold it with the clutch/
accelerator; use the brake to avoid unnecessary clutch 6.10.1 Gear Selector Lever
wear/heat build up.

DRIVE
NO OFF OFF MODE
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with with 6 Speed automatic
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear transmission having Electric
lever, which could result in an accident or serious injury. P
R
controls with an Adaptive
+ N
M
- D Transmission Control
On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift to obtain Strategy.
braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control.
This adaptive Transmission strategy offers optimal
6.9.7 Uphill and Downhill Driving transmission operation and shift quality in different driving
conditions.
To prevent the engine from high stress at a low RPM when
driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, The transmission electric are self-calibrating. Therefore, the
downshift when necessary to maintain engine RPM within first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough.
the best torque range. Similarly, while driving downhill, This is a normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will
downshift to utilize the engine braking in an optimum develop within the initial few hundred kms of running.
manner.
P : Park position M : Manual Shift
R : Reverse position M+ : Manual up-shift
N : Neutral position M- : Manual down shift
D : Drive position

Shift Logic Table 6.10.2 P : Park Position
Movement Possibility
DRIVE
NO OFF OFF MODE
Yes-Brake pedal + knob Use this position to park

P-R
button your vehicle, warm up the
R-N No P
engine, or stay in a location
R
+ N for an extended length of
N-D No M
- D
time.
D-M No
M-D No
D-N No To shift in to any other position, first depress the brake
pedal, then press knob button and move the TGS to R or N
N-R Yes-Only knob button
or D as desired.
R-P Yes-Only knob button
The current gear lever position is indicated in the centre of • Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into “P”
the cluster display.
• Never shift to “P” when the vehicle is moving, To avoid
damage to transmission
• If the lever is shifted to P when the vehicle has not come
to stop and in forward motion, then a ratchet noise will
be heard. This is not abnormal. However we do not
recommend moving to P till the vehicle has come to
standstill . As repeated such instances can damage the
internal parts

6-18
• To shift from the “P” position to another position, the 6.10.4 N : Neutral position
ignition switch must be turned to “ON” and the brake
pedal should be depressed. Any forcible attempts to
move the selector lever from “P” without the two
At this position, the engine
procedures may damage the selector lever
DRIVE
NO OFF OFF MODE
does not transfer power to

the wheels and the vehicle
6.10.3 R : Reverse position will not move on a flat road.
However, for safety, apply
P
R
+ N
M
- D
the brake when the gear is

Use this position to drive in this position.
the vehicle in reverse
DRIVE
NO OFF OFF MODE
To shift into “R” from “P” or

“N” (with the knob button
press), completely stop the
P
R
+ N
vehicle and depress the • Warm up the engine for approximately 3 minutes when
M
- D
brake pedal. When the shift the ambient temperature is below -15° C. Otherwise,
lever is in “R”, parking aid shifting of gears in Forward or Reverse direction may not
system will be automatically be smooth
activated.
• If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this
neutral position, depress the brake pedal firmly
• Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N”
• Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving when the vehicle is in motion
• Please note that the vehicle may slowly move backward
when the selector lever is at “R”
Depress the brake pedal while shifting the gear lever from
“N” to “D” or “R” for your safety.

• Please note that the vehicle may creep forward on level

ground when the selector lever is in “D” even without
For shifting R to P, press the knob button and for shifting to pressing the accelerator pedal and this behavior is
N or D, only shift lever to moved. Refer the shift logic table known as forward creep
for more clarity.
6.10.6 M : Manual Shift

6.10.5 D : Drive position
DRIVE
To shift to manual mode

NO OFF OFF MODE
Use this position for normal

NO OFF OFF
DRIVE
MODE
driving conditions. The move the lever in left side

transmission is from “D” position. Driving
automatically shifted from P
R
gear can be adjusted by
operating the shift lever in
+ N
1st gear up to 6th gear

M
- D
P
R
+ N
M
- D according to the level of front or back direction.
depression on the
accelerator pedal
In manual shift mode, the user can upshift or downshift
from 1 to 6 forward gears by moving the shift lever in front
or back direction.
• Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the Shift up: Move the shift lever forward towards + direction
vehicle immediately after shifting into “D” or the and release once to shift up one gear.
transmission will be damaged. Wait for D symbol to
come in the cluster before pressing the accelerator pedal Shift Down: Move the shift lever backwards towards -
direction and release once to shift up one gear.
• Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down an
uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress The gears can be shifted without requiring to release the
the brake Accelerator pedal.

6-20
In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when • To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance
the vehicle slows down. Similarly, upshifts are automatically and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts
made when the engine rpm exceeds the threshold. when the shift lever/ tip switch is operated
When starting to drive on a snow or icy road, upshift of the Use of Engine Brake: To use the engine as a brake, change
gear to 2nd or 3rd is possible to avoid loss of traction. into the manual gear shift mode first, then operate the shift
lever to switch to next lower gear.
For safety reason maximum three shifts “+” / ”-” can be
allowed at given point of time.
• Abruptly downshifting and using the engine brake may

make the vehicle unstable, especially when driving on
• Before leaving the Driver’s seat always make sure that roads covered with snow or ice
the shift lever is in the P (park) position
• Shifting into P position while the vehicle is in motion will 6.10.7 Ignition Key Interlock system (If equipped)
cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to
lose control of the vehicle
• Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while
shifting out of the Drive (D) position into another position The Ignition Key cannot be
(other than M Mode) to avoid inadvertent motion of the removed from the key
vehicle barrel unless the shift lever
• The shift from D to M (Manual Mode) and M to D can be is in the P (Park) position.
performed while the vehicle is moving
• Never press accelerator pedal when moving the gear
shifter lever
If the key is stuck in the key barrel due to an malfunction,
remove fuse F43 from ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

to release the key. Contact Authorized Mahindra Service available in toolkit, Press the butoon and move the shift lever out
Center at the earliest. of P mode.
Always start the engine while the selector lever is in P or N

with Brake pedal depressed. 6.10.9 Starting and Driving Off
• Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P”.

For your safety, avoid starting the engine from “N” even
During operation of the key interlock system, click noise will though you can do so.
be audible, which is normal.
• Check whether or not the engine idling speed is normal.
Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into “D” or “R”.
6.10.8 Gear Shift Interlock system
• To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress
The Automatic Transmission has a shift lock system which the accelerator pedal gradually.
prevents shifting the transmission from P into R unless the
Brake Pedal is depressed
• Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine

after shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be
damaged. Especially, when you start off after stopping,
ON
ON
SHIFT LOCK
wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on
OF
OF
F
F
with the brake pedal depressed
• When driving on a down hill, never shift the selector lever
SHIFT LOCK
SHIFT LOCK
to “N” If you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a

+N
+N
MD
MD
_
_
P
P
R
W62G116 W62G117
sudden gear engagement can damage the drive train
• HDC (Hill Descent Control) is designed for driving down a
In case of malfunction of the shift lock system or vehicle battery
got drained, Open up the shift lock cap which is present in front of
steep hill. When HDC is applied, do not shift to “N”.
the shift lever on the shift bezel. Then with the help of Screw driver Otherwise, HDC will be deactivated

6-22
6.10.10 Creep Function

• For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle
moving the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped will move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other
than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You can
• Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the control your vehicle’s movement by only applying the brake
gear selector in heavy traffic or narrow areas.
• If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal fully
• To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never
shift into “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the
opposite direction of the intended direction despite the
• A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move creep effect. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress
abruptly from the parked position. To avoid this, wait the brake pedal
until the engine rpm becomes stable
• When you start off on a hill after stopping and parking 6.10.11 Kick-down Function
the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator
comes on, with the brake pedal depressed If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator
pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be
• Do not press the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal automatically engaged. This is called the kickdown function.
at the same time
• We suggest that right leg only should be used for brake
pedal operation
• Do not use the kick-down function while driving on
slippery or sharply curved roads
• If you use the kick-down function too frequently, the fuel
economy of the vehicle will get worse

6.10.12 Engine Braking 6.11 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Operation (if equipped)
When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle is in
motion, the engine speed decreases. On a down hill, engaging a In an AWD vehicle, power is
lower gear can generate a higher engine braking and eventually transmitted to all the
slow down the vehicle speed. By using engine behavior as a brake, wheels. This is managed by
you can decrease your vehicle speed without excessively using the the AWD System which
brake system. The lower gear, the higher braking force.
intelligently transfers
torque to all four wheels.
Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long slope.
The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or the fade AWD system includes electromagnetically operated clutch
phenomenon, and lose the braking force which is controlled by an ECU. According to the driving
Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear selector lever conditions, this system automatically delivers torque to the
is in the “N” position rear wheels.
Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tyres may slip
6.11.1 AWD System

6.10.13 Limp Home Mode (LHM)
AWD system is available in two operating positions viz.,
When there is a malfunction in the transmission, it goes into Limp AUTO mode and AWD LOCK mode.
Home Mode to maintain minimum driving conditions and also to
prevent critical transmission damage. This status is indicated by Once the ignition key is turned ON, AWD system by default
the transmission check lamp illumination in the instrument cluster. turns into AUTO mode. In AUTO mode, whenever a slippage
Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further is detected in the FRONT wheels (slippery surfaces like icy
assistance. roads, wet surfaces, etc.) the torque is transferred to the
REAR wheels by the AWD system.
The transmission is held either in 3rd/ 5th gear when LHM is activated.

6-24
6.11.2 AWD Lock 6.12 Drive Modes (Only for Diesel Variant)
AWD LOCK button is located on the driver control switch Use any of the following methods to activate Drive mode
bank. The LED on the switch turns ON when the AWD Lock is
activated. In this mode, fixed amount of torque is Center Fascia Switch Bank
transferred to the rear wheels irrespective of the driving
Press Drive mode hard switch on center fascia switch bank
condition.
and select required drive mode from Infotainment Screen
The AWD warning lamp in the cluster
illuminates when there is a malfunction in the
AWD system.
DRIVE
ON OFF OFF MODE
In AWD Lock mode, when vehicle speed > 80 km/h, then
system changes to AUTO mode automatically .
AWD vehicles have to be towed only with loaded on the back

of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing. If
vehicle needs to be towed by lifting the front wheels, then
the propeller shaft needs to be disconnected in order to
protect the coupling.

Infotainment Home Screen

Select Drive mode icon from Infotainment Home screen and
select required drive mode as shown in the image below.
Drive Mode is a quick and easy way to change driving style of

your vehicle. With Drive mode settings, you can instantly adjust
driving dynamics and feel of your vehicle, all on the go. The

6-26
system is incredibly easy to use, simply chose you choice of Driving modes alters
"Drive Mode" and experience 3 different vehicles in one.
1. Sensitivity of Accelerator pedal along with engine
You can select from multiple drive modes options any time power delivery
during your Drive, meaning you can switch to the perfect mode
when the situation calls for it. Whether you're looking for an 2. Gear shift patterns
relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, Drive
Mode allows you to perfectly tailor your vehicle for your unique
3. Steering effort
driving style. 4. TCS Control
Drive Modes essentially offers you the Driver a Drive Based on the mode selected driving
Experience of 3 different cars in one car.
ZAP Mode: ZAP Mode offers regular everyday performance.
• You can choose ZAP mode to experience a TRUE SUV The car runs like a true Mahindra should. It offers a good
drive, a drive that is true to the Mahindra SUV balance between ZIP and ZOOM settings and is ideal for
experience. This is the default mode. day-to-day use. The vehicle will be default in ZAP mode
• You can choose ZIP mode for a normal comfortable city every time the vehicle Ignition is turned ON. This is the
drive. The Engine Power and shift points (in AT) will be default mode.
suitable for traffic conditions. ZIP Mode: ZIP mode is the accelerator pedal response and
• You can choose ZOOM Mode for the Adrenaline Rush. shift points (in AT) have been modified so as to have
Engine Power, Gear shifts , Braking will all work together comfortable and easy control for traffic condition.
to give you an absolute THRILL to your driving ZOOM Mode: This mode is for a more spirited driving. ZOOM
experience. mode is offered to make the car more fun, as it produces more
Driving Modes changes vehicle handling, dynamics and entire engaging and potent ride-quality. In this mode, accelerator will
Drive Feel at a touch of an icon. This essentially enables Driver become more responsive, i.e. the car accelerates more readily.
to experience multiple calibrations seamlessly. The steering gets heavier, Gear shift and is delayed.

Once any of the modes is selected, we would have an ALERT Once the customer selects his/her choice from drop down
message in cluster. Based on the mode selected the Alert on confirming his/her choice. Each of the individual
message would vary. for controllers will switch to this selection.
ZAP: ZAP MODE ACTIVATED Few things to note
ZIP: ZIP MODE ACTIVATED 1. When in Cruise control or Adaptive cruise control
Vehicle will always be defaulted to ZAP MODE
ZOOM: ZOOM MODE ACTIVATED
2. ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in
Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the ZAP MODE
CLUSTER. Also, the skin of the cluster also changes as per
the mode. 3. IN case of any faults at vehicle level , that doesn't
allow the vehicle to be in the mode of choice
Allows the driver to alter settings to their specific Customer is alerted by an alert message – “DRIVE
preferences. This option offers further flexibility over MODE INHIBITED” in Infotainment screen and the
choices of Drive Modes. Mode choice in the Cluster would be Blank.
This is done by means of CUSTOM MODES available in
Infotainment screens.
Here, the Customer is provided with Selection option from
choices as seen below
Power train : ZIP , ZAP or ZOOM
Braking : ZAP or ZOOM
Steering: ZIP or ZAP or ZOOM
HVAC : Normal or Economy

6-28
6.13 Micro Hybrid Technology (Engine Stop/Start

System) (If equipped) Engine Stop/Start system is
activated by the Engine
Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” Stop/Start button in the
the engine when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in driver side switch bank. The
turn gives a better fuel efficiency. LED on the button indicates
the status of the button.
Overview of the Engine Stop/Start System
How does the Engine Stop/Start System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions
within your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a
traffic junction due to a red signal. The following steps
illustrate how the system functions:
Stop at
Switch to Release the
Engine stops
Cluster
• The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the
Traffic
Signal/Jam
Neutral Clutch Pedal
after few
seconds
Indication - ON neutral gear and the clutch pedal is released
• The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink
indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The
engine will shut down automatically after a specific time
period
Clearance of Press the Engine Cluster Start to • The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the
Signal/Jam Clutch Pedal Restarts Indication - OFF Drive instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by
the “Engine Stop/Start” System

• Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and For auto start to happen, the following conditions are to
the engine starts immediately be met:
• The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the • Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/
engine has started again and you are ready to drive on Start System
For auto stop to happen, the following conditions are to • Gear lever is in the neutral position, Clutch pedal is fully
be met: de-pressed
• Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default • Vehicle speed is zero
and can be turned off using the selection switch
• Engine Stop/Start System is in active state
• Bonnet is fully closed
• Bonnet should be closed
• In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 2
kmph at least once
6.13.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
• Current status of the engine is idling
• Vehicle speed is zero 1. What is the advantage of the system?
The Engine Stop/Start System aids in attaining better
• Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released fuel efficiency on your vehicle and thus reducing your
• Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition running costs. However, the mileage improvement will
depend upon various parameters such as prevailing
• Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between traffic, driving patterns, etc.
25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra
precaution to ensure safe working of the engine 2. What are the other advantages of the system?
• Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C • Since the engine is switched off during traffic
signals / jams, considerable amount of CO2 release
• Gear in neutral in the atmosphere is avoided. This reduces global

6-30
warming and thus provides us with a cleaner 6. What is to be done, if I don’t want the system to stop
atmosphere to live my engine at traffic signals/jams?
• Ability to start the engine by pressing the clutch The system can be turned OFF by the Engine Stop/
pedal Start button in the central bezel switch bank.
• Reduces noise pollution at traffic signals 7. Whether the A/C will function, if the engine is switched
off?
3. Is it possible to start the engine through the clutch
pedal for the first time? No, the A/C will not work. However, the blower will be
in operation when the ignition is ON.
No, the engine can be cranked only with the ignition
key for the first time. If the engine is stopped 8. What will happen if I keep the clutch continuously
automatically by the system, only then it is possible to pressed at traffic signals/jams?
start the engine through clutch pedal. The system will not stop the engine if the clutch is
4. How to activate/deactivate the system? continuously pressed since it indicates the driver’s
intention of moving the vehicle immediately.
The system is activated by default during every
ignition cycle. The LED indication on the Engine Stop/ 9. When the battery charge is low, whether the engine
Start switch indicates the status of the system. The will be switched off?
system can be turned OFF or back ON using the If the battery charge drops below a certain threshold
Engine Stop/Start switch. level, the system will not stop the engine so as to
5. Whether the system will get activated as soon as the preserve the battery from further draining.
engine is started the first time with the ignition key? 10. Whether I will be able to operate the engine with the
No, the Engine Stop/Start system can be activated only normal ignition key?
by the Engine Stop/Start switch, provided all listed Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is always
conditions (in the previous section) are met. This is to possible.
ensure better performance of the engine in terms of
fuel economy and durability. 11. Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in gear?

The vehicle will not start or stop automatically in gear 6.14 Fuel-BS VI
to ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral
position of the gear lever.
For Diesel: Use
12. Whether the system will stop my engine in moving commercially available
traffic? vehicular Ultra-low Sulfur
Highway Diesel that meets
No, the engine will be stopped only when the vehicle the BIS standard (IS 1460;
speed is zero. 2017 BS VI specification or
13. Whether the audio system will be switched OFF, when equivalent). Information on
the engine shuts down? diesel quality can normally
be found in the fuel pump.
No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and you
can continue to enjoy the music.
Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the
14. Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the clutch pump cannot be found. If the diesel fuel with high sulfur
pedal is pressed? content (more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are
used, it can cause the DPF system damage and emission
No, when the engine is running, the starter motor will warranty issues.
not attempt to re-crank.
For Petrol: Use only commercially available Petrol fuel
15. If any component involved in the system fails, what conforming to Indian Standard (IS 2796: 2017 BS-VI
will happen? specification or equivalent). Information on Petrol quality
The system has a built-in diagnostic module which can normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact
understands the failure and immediately goes to filling station personnel in case labels in the pump cannot
bypass mode. In the bypass mode, the engine can be be found.
turned ON and OFF by ignition key as usual.
Do not “top up” after the nozzle automatically shuts off

when refuelling

6-32
Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to

prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident
Diesel/Petrol is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns
violently and can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks,
flames or smoking materials near diesel/Petrol. Turn OFF
Do not fill the fuel tank or mix the fuel with alcohol based the engine before refuelling. Whenever you are around
fuels, kerosene, etc. This will damage the engine, fuel and diesel/Petrol, extinguish all smoking materials.
exhaust system components.
If you have accidentally filled the fuel tank with incorrect or 6.14.2 Minimum Fuel Requirement
non- approved fuel, do not start the vehicle. Contact an
Authorized Mahindra Dealer to have the fuel system It is recommended maintaining a minimum of 10 litres of
drained completely. fuel in the fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is
empty is not recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in
6.14.1 Fuelling during Winter the tank. Check the fuel level prior to starting your journey.
During freezing weather, if fuel is not winterised or is

insufficiently winterised, waxing/gelling may start in fuel, Never carry fuel in separate containers in the vehicle, it is
leading to interruption in fuel supply to engine. For smooth dangerous and may lead to inadvertent fuel leak or spillage.
functioning and reliable operation of the engine during cold
weather conditions, use winterised ULSD which are
available at the filling stations during winter months. Check
with your fuel retailer for further details.
Avoid inhaling fuel vapours and any skin or clothing

contact. Direct skin contact with diesel /Petrol or the
inhalation of fuel vapour may affect your health.

6.15 Brakes 6.15.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front and If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing the
rear wheels. uphill, select first gear for MT vehicle & park position for AT
vehicles and also turn the front wheels away from the kerb.
Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduced
stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking If you have to park the vehicle with front side facing
efficiency. After a car wash or driving the vehicle through downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels
water, apply and release brake pedal mildly while driving to towards the kerb.
remove the film of water from the brake disc.
Always ensure that the vehicle is in gear and parking brakes
is engaged before leaving the vehicle.
1. Front brake pad : The Front brake pads are equipped with
Parking on uphill
Electronic Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are
worn out, the brake warning lamp on cluster will turn ON.
Replace the brake pads immediately
When parking on an uphill, turn the front
2. Rear Brake Pad : The rear brake pads are equipped with wheels away from the Kerb/Pavement
Mechanical Pad Wear Sensors, thus when the brake pads are
worn out, there will be a metallic rubbing noise from the rear
brake pads. Replace the brake pads immediately Y4D053
Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely lost, the Parking on downhill
brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much harder than
normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance will be longer
than usual When parking on a downhill, turn the front
wheels towards the Kerb/Pavement.
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance increases

considerably while braking

6-34
6.15.2 Parking Brake – Manual (if equipped)

Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving
To apply the parking brake, off. Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to
pull the park brake lever up excessive heating of the rear brakes. It will also result in
as firmly as possible. When reduced fuel efficiency lowered brake pad life and rear
the parking brake is applied brake squeal
with the ignition ON, the • Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion
parking brake warning can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose
lamp in the instrument control of the vehicle and cause an accident
cluster illuminates.
• Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle,
and be certain to leave the transmission in gear. Failure
To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake lever up to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage,
slightly, press the release button on the lever tip and lower hit a bystander resulting in personal injury
the parking brake lever completely.
• Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for
a number of reasons. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not
The parking brake warning lamp indicates only the parking leave the key in the ignition. A child could move the
brake status. It does not indicate the degree of brake vehicle leading to accidents
application. Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when
parked and the gear shift lever is in gear. When parking on • The parking brake should always be applied when the
a hill; first apply the parking brake; after that shift the TGS driver is not in the vehicle
lever to the P position (for AT) and gear for MT. This will
avoid the load on the transmission, locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of gear.

6.16 Electric Parking Brake-EPB (if equipped) The parking brake warning lamp on the
instrument cluster and the red Illumination on
The EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) is a safety feature with the EPB switch is turned on, indicating that the
enhanced comfort, the parking brakes are applied/released parking brake is applied.
by simple switch operation.
The EPB system replaces the conventional manual parking 6.16.2 Releasing EPB
brake which requires high effort to apply & release.
In addition to the switch based Apply, EPB also provides
additional safety/comfort features like EPB auto apply, auto
release, Auto vehicle hold, Controlled deceleration for Press down the EPB switch
parking, rear wheel un-locker and roll away re-clamp. with the brake pedal
depressed.
AUTO
6.16.1 Applying EPB HOLD
The parking brake warning lamp on the

instrument cluster and the red Illumination on
Park the vehicle in a safe the EPB switch is turned off, indicating that the
place and pull up the EPB parking brake is released.
switch.
AUTO
HOLD

6-36
6.16.3 AUTO Apply EPB How to override EPB Auto Apply – MT
For added comfort and for safety reasons the EPB will If in any case, EPB auto apply feature needs to be
get automatically applied in the following conditions. overridden, it can be achieved by a simple switch-based
operation, which is mentioned below:
1. Ignition is turned Off.
1. Stop the vehicle
2. AT vehicle –gear shifted to Park
2. Push and hold EPB switch in release position
3. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver
door open. 3. Holding the EPB switch in released position, turn the
ignition OFF
4. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and Driver seat
belt unbuckled. 4. This prevents EPB from automatically getting applied
5. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in Active state and AVH switch

pressed to release AVH Active state.
In any case, where the vehicle needs to be moved in ignition
6. Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) in active state continuously OFF condition, EPB auto apply override feature to be
for more than 5 minutes utlilized.
7. Auto vehicle hold (AVH) active and engine turned OFF In case of any Switch related failure when vehicle in
by engine start stop feature standstill, the EPB Auto release feature must be used to
release EPB, if EPB Auto release feature doesn’t work,
contact Service center in such cases to release the EPB
How to override EPB Auto Apply – AT
EPB manual override feature can be used to push the
vehicle after turning the ignition OFF or in any breakdown
condition.
• Position TGS lever in neutral (N).

• Push and hold the EPB switch, simultaneously press and For Manual Transmission Vehicles (MT)
hold the start stop button (SSB) till ignition is turned OFF.
1. Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.
• This operation prevents EPB auto apply and EPB will be in
disengaged state. 2. Shift the gear to forward or reverse gear.
3. Then slowly release the clutch pedal and depress the
Accelerator pedal to drive away.
In this case, vehicle remains in accessory state (SSB LED in
amber color) before completely getting turned OFF, for 30
4. The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling
forward or backward movement of the vehicle.
seconds or till driver door is opened.
5. The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake
6.16.4 AUTO Releasing EPB/Drive Away tell-tale on cluster is turned off, indicating that the
parking brake is released.
For Automatic Transmission Vehicles (AT)
1. Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt. The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated if driver
2. Shift the gear selector lever to the D / M or R position door is not closed or if the driver seat belt is not fastened.
The driver will get message on cluster to ensure the same.
3. Release the brake pedal and then depress the If the EPB is being released using the accelerator pedal , be
accelerator pedal slowly. cautious if the vehicle is parked uphill. In this scenario if an
4. The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling aggressive accelerator pedal input is given, it can also result
forward or backward movement of the vehicle. in wheel spin. The wheel spin will cause ESP to intervene.
5. The red Illumination on the EPB switch and the brake

tell-tale on cluster is turned off, indicating that the
parking brake is released.

6-38
6.16.5 EPB Warning Lamp / Parking Brake Warning Don’ts

Lamp
Driving Conditions
This tell-tale is turned ON in the cluster when EPB • If the EPB Malfunction lamp is ON and the brake is
is applied properly. engaged. Do not drive.
• Avoid using EPB after doing water wading. Please get the
This tell-tale is turned ON in the cluster when there vehicle checked in workshop.
is a malfunction in the EPB system.
Servicing: Do not get your vehicle serviced at an
If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked unauthorized service center.
and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorized
Service Centre
Do’s • The EPB can also be used in cases of emergency braking.
Release the accelerator and Pull and hold the EPB button
Driving Conditions until your vehicle comes to standstill and EPB gets
applied. This should be done only in emergency
• For EPB Auto release and Drive Away always wear driver condition and not as a regular action.
seat belt and ensure that the driver door is closed
• The braking process is interrupted when the EPB button
• In MT vehicles, drive away with clutch alone modulation is released or the accelerator pedal is actuated in
not possible, thus always modulate the clutch pedal and dynamic condition
accelerator pedal for effective drive away.
• The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated

when the driver door or the seat belt is not fastened.
• Motor noise can be heard during the EPB operation, this
is normal behavior.

• If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle The AVH feature can exist in 4 states in the vehicle, which
serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised are as follows.
Service Centre.
AVH Off – AVH switch is not pressed, thus AVH is
• Do not let children or other people who are not familiar not available.
with the EPB system operate the EPB switch. There is a
danger of accidents depending on the parking/stationary AUTO AVH Standby – AVH is available but is in standby
state of the vehicle. HOLD mode.
• If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related
components after using the EPB emergency mode, have AUTO AVH Active – AVH is available and is controlling/
the vehicle checked and serviced HOLD holding the vehicle in standstill.
6.17 Auto Vehicle Hold/Auto Hold (AVH) (if

AUTO AVH Faulty – Indicates some fault in AVH, because
equipped) HOLD of which AVH not available
The AVH is a comfort feature offered with Electric parking
brake.
The function of AVH is to hold the vehicle in standstill with For the AUTO HOLD to function, the following conditions
the applied driver brake pressure should be met.
Once AVH switch is pressed, it remains in memory and thus • Engine ON
driver doesn’t have to press AVH switch every time
• Driver door closed and Driver seat belt buckled.
When AVH is active and Driver door is opened/Driver seat

belt is unbuckled, the EPB gets automatically applied for
safety reasons.

6-40
6.17.1 Activation of AVH Operating Auto hold

1. Pressing the AUTO HOLD switch turns on the AUTO
1. Ensure driver door HOLD indicator on cluster (white).
closed and Driver
seat belt buckled 2. Depress the brake pedal while driving to stop the
vehicle.
2. Press the AUTO HOLD
AUTO switch button. Auto 3. The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument
HOLD
Hold tell-tale in cluster is changed from white to green and the brake
cluster goes to is applied.
standby. 4. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal when driving off.
5. The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument
cluster is changed from green to white and the brake
The LED indicator on the AUTO HOLD switch is illuminated is released.
in Amber color.
If the AUTO HOLD function remains active for more than 5

6.17.2 Deactivation of AVH minutes or if the driver door is opened/seat belt is
unbuckled the EPB applies automatically and AVH is
disabled.
Press the AUTO HOLD

switch with AUTO HOLD • When driving off on a downhill by depressing the
AUTO
activated to deactivate the accelerator pedal, be careful as the vehicle can
HOLD
feature accelerate suddenly and on uphill sufficient accelerator
pedal input to be provided for overcoming the gradient.

• Do not depress the accelerator pedal abruptly with the

AUTO HOLD function is activated. Otherwise, the parking
brake is released, and the vehicle can accelerate • For unintentional application, if the codriver or any other
suddenly person pulls the EPB switch without driver’s notice in
dynamic condition, The CDP function can be overridden
• If the EPB warning lamp is turned on or there is a fault in by the driver by pressing Accelerator pedal.
the EPB system, have the vehicle checked and serviced at
a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service
Centre. If parking the vehicle is required in an
emergency, pull over the vehicle on a flat surface and • The CDP functionality having a high rate of deceleration,
chock the wheels after shifting the gear selector lever to anyone other than the driver must be advised not to pull
the P position the EPB switch in any case while driving.
Controlled Deceleration for Parking (CDP) • The CDP function is a safety feature and must be used in
the cases of emergency only.
• The Controlled Deceleration for parking is a safety
feature. EPB Roll Away Re-clamp
• The CDP functions can be made used in any case such as • If the EPB system detects any rolling after EPB is applied,
Brake pedal/Brake Booster/Master Cylinder failure the motor on caliper re-clamps the disc to avoid any
because of which sufficient brake force can’t be achieved rolling.
through the brake pedal.
• As an added feature, to avoid roll away due the reduction
• In such conditions, pulling the EPB Switch triggers the ESP in clamp force due to decrease in temperature, the EPB
Control unit to generate a pressure build up in the brake motor on caliper re-clamps the disc multiple times based
system which produces the braking force at individual on the temperature.
wheels to bring the vehicle to an emergency stop.

6-42
Servicing and Repairing 6.18 Hazard on Panic Braking

The EPB is a complex system involving electrical and Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5
hydraulics, it is strictly advised to get it repaired or serviced seconds when the following conditions are met:
in a Mahindra Authorized service Centre .
• Ignition is ON
6.17.3 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Alert • Vehicle speed is greater than 60 kmph
• Panic/sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate
is sensed
This message is displayed on the

Cluster when the EPB switch is 6.19 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
released without depressing the
brake pedal to deactivate EPB. The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed
to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of
vehicle during a sudden, panic emergency braking or
This message is displayed on the braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes
Cluster in the following conditions: input from wheel speed sensors and brake pedal switch to
1. When the accelerator pedal is control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid
depressed to auto release EPB, with wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during braking.
EPB Applied and driver door open/
driver seat belt unbuckled. The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 kmph. ABS is
activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes
2. When the AVH switch is depressed over and prevents wheel lock.
to activate AVH, with driver door
open/driver seat belt unbuckled. During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in
the brake pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear
motor noise from the engine compartment. It is

recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS

is active rather than pumping the brake pedal.
Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle
a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint control, it is still important to drive with all due care and
in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the
brake system. vehicle in front of you. There are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even
The ABS warning lamp lights up when you with ABS active.
switch ON the ignition and should go out after
a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp does If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if
not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain,
fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking the Anti-lock Brake System will not be able to completely
system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without avoid wheel lock-up
ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by
an Mahindra Authorised Dealer. 6.20 Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance:
EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, It prevents least
Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe
loaded wheel from locking on application of brakes, thus
distance from the vehicle in front of you. The stopping
allows the wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road
distance may be longer in the following cases:
surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and when it
• Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads identifies any slip, the pressure in the wheel cylinders is
dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.
• Driving with tyre chains installed
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking
• Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be
• Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised
large differences in surface height Dealer.

6-44
6.21 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (if equipped) the prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
This system enhances directional control and stability of the turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent
for over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle can
by applying the brake on the appropriate wheel not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving that
automatically. could endanger the user’s safety or the safety of others on
road or passerby.
ESP uses inbuilt sensors to determine the path that the
driver intends to steer the vehicle , compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match 6.21.1 ESP ON
the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP
over-steer or under-steer. system will be in active mode. This mode
should be used for most driving conditions.
Over-steer - When the
Oversteer rin
g vehicle is turning more than
ne
lC
or appropriate for the steering When the ESP is in operation, ESP indicator lamp will blink
ea
Id wheel position. in the instrument cluster.
Under-steer - When the When the ESP is operating, you can feel a slight pulsation in
vehicle is turning less than the brake pedal. This is normal and indicates that braking
Understeer
appropriate for the steering had gone to ABS zone. Suggest that the driver should slow
wheel position. down the speed are not matching the road surface.
When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator
response may be different because ESP system controls the
engine RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This
The ESP cannot overrule the natural laws of physics from is normal.
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to

6.21.2 ESP OFF When ESP is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill
Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill
Descent Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll
Over Mitigation) will be available
In some driving conditions,
to maximize traction, it may ESP, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition
be beneficial to de-activate cycle.
ESP. If the ESP indicator blinks while driving, it
indicates that ESP is working. However If this
lamp is blinking continuously or remains ON, it
Such conditions are: indicates a malfunction in the ESP system. Drive carefully to
the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer and get the ESP
• To start in deep snow or on a loose surface system checked.
• Driving in deep sand
• Driving through deep mud etc. 6.22 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) (If equipped)
To de-activate ESP, press ESP OFF button on The HBA function is designed to optimize the vehicles
the driver control switch bank. Once ESP OFF braking ability during emergency braking situations, the
mode is selected, a warning indicator system detects a panic braking situation by sensing the rate
illuminates in the instrument cluster. and amount of brake application and generates an
additional brake-force boost to the driver if required.
Press ESP OFF button again to activate ESP function.
During a panic braking situation, the brake pressure is
raised to the locking pressure. For the HBA to become
active, the brake Pedal must be pressed throughout the
For safety reasons, ESP will be automatically re-activated braking maneuver, that is the brakes must not be pumped
once the vehicle speed crosses 64 kmph and released.
Mahindra recommends that ESP be operational in all
normal driving conditions.

6-46
6.23 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (if equipped)

The HBA function gets deactivated, when the brake pedal is
released thus do not release brake pressure unless braking This System assists the
is no longer needed driver to descend a steep
slope by means of brake
intervention limiting the
vehicle speed without
• The HBA system cannot prevent collisions, the driver's input on brakes.
capabilities of an HBA equipped vehicle must never be This does not replace cruise
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could control
risk the user’s safety. During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be
• The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the activated automatically.
driver, never rely on the HBA feature to prevent
HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC
accidents.
button on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the
button illuminates indicating the status. Press the button
again to deactivate HDC.
The HDC feature can control the vehicle speed from 8 kmph
to 35 kmph, Above 35 kmph the HDC feature will go to ready
mode. The HDC feature will be deactivated automatically if
vehicle speed is more than 60 kmph. (For Activating the HDC
feature again, the driver needs to press the HDC button
once again within the specified speed limits)
The HDC should be enabled only on steep gradient. It is not
recommended to be ON in plain road- to avoid accidental
intervention

While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds braking effect is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the
can be varied by cruise buttons, accelerator pedal & brake “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.
pedal.
To Set the desired descending speed, follow the steps listed 6.24 Hill Hold Control (HHC) (if equipped)
below:
Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an
• SET Speed — This is the driver desired speed at which uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off,
vehicle should descent. This can be set using HDC switch there are chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC
or brake/accelerator pedals. (example: when the driver helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling
activates HDC at a speed of 30 kmph, then set speed will back.
be 30 kmph). HDC will limit vehicle descent speed to set
value). Hill Hold Control function uses the inbuilt acceleration
sensor to identify the gradient and holds the vehicle for 2
• If driver presses the accelerator pedal and increases the seconds in MT and 1 seconds in AT vehicles after the brake
speed from 30 kmph to 34 kmph and then releases the pedals are released. If the driver does not apply the throttle
accelerator pedal. Now the new SET speed will be 34 before this time expires, the system will release brake
kmph pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal
• Similarly, if the driver applies brake and reduces the The Following conditions must be met in order for the HHC
speed from 30 kmph to 10 kmph and then releases the to activate:
brake pedal, now the new SET speed will be 10 kmph
1. The Vehicle must be equipped with HHC
• If the vehicle cruise speed is with in the HDC active
region, similarly the set speed can be modified using 2. The vehicle must be on sufficient gradient
cruise +/- buttons (by tapping the “SET —” or “SET +”
buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed by 3. The Parking brake must not be applied
approximately 0.5 kmph)
The descent speed increases only if the gradient is
sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the

6-48
The HFC will activate only during high brake pedal force
application.
The HHC will function on both vehicle facing Up hill and
vehicle facing downhill, provided the correct gears are
selected.
• Vehicle Facing Uphill – Gear should be in Forward • The HFC system cannot prevent collisions, the
capabilities of an HFC equipped vehicle must never be
• Vehicle Facing Downhill – Gear should be in Reverse exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety.
• The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the
• In some situations, when the conditions are not met, the driver, never rely on the HFC feature to prevent road
HHC may not get activated. In such cases slight rolling accidents.
may occur.
• The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the 6.26 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)
driver, never rely on the HHC system to prevent rolling.
Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which
anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM
6.25 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC) function analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle
and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift,
Due to continuous brake operations, the temperature of the the system then applies appropriate brake and may also
brake disc may get raised, due to which the friction between reduce the engine power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.
the brake pads and the brake disc may get reduced
alarmingly, this is known as Brake Fading. In any instance where physical limits of Long. and lateral
tyre road grip are not exceeded, RMF reduces the lateral
HFC provides an additional braking-force boost to the forces that will lead to a critical roll moment about the
driver, based on the pad temperature model, brake center of gravity.
pressure and deceleration rate, to reduce the braking
distances in such cases. Minimum Vehicle speed for ROM = 25 kmph

Maximum Vehicle speed for ROM = 120 kmph 3. The Wipers must be in ON condition (Low/High Speed)
The Pressure generated in the BDW function is very small
and this is not felt by the driver during normal driving
• Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions conditions.
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur.
• The ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs; thus ROM • The system will not be able to sense water splashed on disc
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or from situations such as water wash or water puddles.
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's • It is suggested that the driver dry the brakes in the above said
safety or the safety of others. conditions by driving at very slow speed and applying the
brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.
6.27 Brake Disc Wiping
6.28 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP
When a vehicle is driven in a wet condition; the accumulated
wetness on the brake disks leads to an elongated brake EBP is a value-added feature in ESP, the target of the function is
response time. to reduce the air gap of the wheel brake by putting low brake
pressure to the brake pads such that the brake pads come in
The BDW function actuates the brakes with a low pressure, close proximity to the brake disc.
such that; the brake pads comes in contact with the rotating
brake disks, creating a wiping action; thereby removing the The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the
moisture from the brake disks. rate of release of the acceleration pedal. A sudden release of
accelerator pedal signifies an upcoming sudden braking.
For the Brake Disc Wiping function to get activated, the
following conditions must be met. By actively pre-filling the brake-system, the brake response
time is reduced for an upcoming braking and full vehicle
1. Vehicle speed above 70kmph. deceleration is achieved earlier. This results in a shorter
stopping distance.
2. Accelerator Pedal must be pressed.

6-50
6.29 Second Collision Mitigation System (SCM) 6.30 Driver Drowsiness Detection System (DDD)
The SCM feature in the ESP system is an autonomous The Driver Drowsiness Detection system advises the driver
braking system which decreases the speed of the vehicle to take a break from continuous long duration driving when
after the first collision by means of autonomous braking driver fatigue can be detected based on the driver's steering
interventions. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash behavior.
due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
The system evaluates the steering behavior at speeds of 60-
For the Second Collision Mitigation feature to get activated, 200 km/h.
the following conditions must be met.
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by
1. There must be a front collision detected with a certain the system are as follows.
severity, where airbags gets deployed
• The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
2. The impact speed must be greater than approx. 10
km/h. • The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed, and the
driver's door opened.
3. The brakes, the ESP and other required electrical
systems remain functional after impact. • The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
4. The accelerator pedal must not be actuated. If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is
not changed, the system recommends a driving break again
after 15 minutes.
The Drowsiness alert should be enabled in the driver
assistance screen.

Pause Recommendation Driver Attention Level: The Driver attention level is

calculated based on driving behavior and many external
parameters and the attention level is displayed to the driver
in the Drive Info Tab
This alert comes in the
display of instrument
cluster when the system Driver Attention Level Description
detects the driver is quiet
sleepy or very sleepy, along
with audible signal. Very Awake
Quite Awake
• When the vehicle is driven continuously for more than 2
hours and if the system detects driver as “Quite Sleepy”,
an alert message along with audio signal appears in the
instrument cluster. Cluster will display the alert message
till the user presses the “OK” button from steering wheel Neither Awake nor Sleepy
switch.
• After pressing the OK button, if break is not detected by
the system for next 15 minutes, alert message will repeat
again. If the drowsiness is continuously sensed and if the
system detects driver as “Very Sleepy”, next level alert
message & audio signal will be triggered along with
steering wheel haptic feedback.

6-52
• In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering

Driver Attention Level Description behavior incorrectly and therefore falsely display a break
recommendation.
Quite Sleepy • The system is designed primarily for use on highways.
Very Sleepy
• The driving ability is always the driver's responsibility.

Never drive if you feel tired.
• The system may not detect all cases where a break is
needed.
• Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long
trips.
• There will be no system warning during the so-called
micro-sleep.

6.31 Wheels and Tyres • Optional P235/60 R18 103/104 V/H
6.31.1 Tyre Information • Temporary Spare Tyre T155/90 R18 113M

Tyre rating is explained as below:
A: RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-
A
PLY TYRE
B
B: “TUBELESS” OR “TUBE 235 65 R 17 104 H
C D
TYPE”
C: TYRE SIZE
01
E D: MAX. LOAD LIMIT
A B C D E F
E: TREAD WEAR
6.31.2 Tyre Rating Tyre size (Example: 235/65 R17 104H)
Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a Callout (A) : 235 (Three-digit number) : This number gives
reputable manufacturer. If you ever have any questions the width in millimetres of the tyre from sidewall edge to
regarding your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.
the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty
provided by the tyre manufacturer. You may also contact Callout (B) : 65 (Two-digit number) : This number, known
Mahindra Authorised Dealer directly, or the tyre as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section
manufacturer. width.
The tyre rating of your vehicle is: Callout (C) : R : This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R”
stands for Radial.
• 235/65 R17 103/104 V/H

6-54
Callout (D) :17 (Two-digit number) : This number is the MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY
wheel or rim diameter in inches. SPEED SYMBOL
KM/HR
Callout (E) :104 (Two or three-digit number) : This number T 190
is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much
weight each tyre can support. U 200
H 210
Callout (F) : H : Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never
drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The V 240
speed rating denotes the speed at which a tyre is designed
to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard W 270
condition of load and inflation pressure. Y 300
Z 240+
6.31.3 Speed Rating
MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY 6.31.4 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)

SPEED SYMBOL
KM/HR
L 120 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)
is located on the driver side
M 130 inner B-pillar. This placard
N 140 tells you important
information about tyre size
P 150 designed for your vehicle,
Q 160 and the tyre inflation
pressures for the front &
R 170 rear tyres.
S 180

6.31.5 Tyre Pressure

TYRE INFORMATION
COLD INFLATION PRESSURE
Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
LOADING CONDITION TYRE FRONT REAR satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas
psi(kPa) psi(kPa) are affected by improper Tyre pressure:
235 65 R17 32 (220) 32 (220)
Upto 5 Passengers 235 60 R18
• Safety
6 psssengers to fully laden 235 65 R17 35 (240) 35 (240) • Economy
235 60 R18
Temporary spare tyre T155 90 R18 60 (420) • Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe
ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal
distance, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering
injury. response or may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident
patterns to develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal
and/or serious personal injury.
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases Tyre
Regular Tyre Temporary Tyre rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
Dynamic Rolling
radius (mm) 358 +/- 5 358 +/- 5
The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre
Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side
inner B-pillar.

6-56
6.31.6 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure 6.31.7 Inflating Your Tyres
The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your Tyres are
as inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage, at properly inflated. Remember that a Tyre can lose up to half
least once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to of its air pressure without appearing flat.
check Tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when
determining proper inflation. Radial Tyres may look properly At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each Tyre
inflated even when they are underinflated. At the same and check the Tyre pressure with a Tyre gauge (including
time, each Tyre should be inspected for signs of Tyre wear spare Tyre). Inflate all Tyres to the recommended inflation
or visible damage. pressure.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold

Tyre inflation pressures. Cold Tyre inflation pressure is
defined as the Tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been Under-inflation is the most common cause of Tyre failures
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 km after and may result in severe Tyre cracking, tread separation or
a three-hour period. Check Tyre pressures more often if “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and
subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as Tyre increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
pressures vary with temperature changes. Tyre pressures flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and
change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7° C of air internal damage to the Tyre. It also may result in
temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking Tyre unnecessary Tyre stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter. control and accidents.
When it was new, the spare Tyre in your vehicle was fully
• Over or under inflation may reduce the tyre life
inflated. However, a spare Tyre can lose pressure over time. • Do not correct the tyre pressure immediately after the
In order to avoid being stranded, check the spare Tyre air vehicle is stopped after operation, server handling or
pressure frequently. long distance drive. Check the inflation pressure when
the vehicle is idle for 3 hours or 10 minutes of driving
after 3 hours in idle condition

• Do not drive the vehicle with lower pressure than 6.31.8 Radial Ply Tyres
recommended, which may lead to over heating of
sidewall resulting in tyre damage
• Check the tyre pressures once in a month or before long Combining radial ply Tyres with other types of Tyres on your
distance travels vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in
• Check your tyres regularly for any damages or cut on the an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial Tyres
sidewall. Please replace the tyres immediately. in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of
Tyres.
Always inflate your Tyres to the recommended pressure Cuts and punctures in radial Tyres are repairable only in the
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
information found on the Tyre. The recommended Tyre Mahindra Authorised Dealer for radial Tyre repairs.
inflation pressure is found on the Tyre Label which is
located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. Failure to
follow the Tyre pressure recommendations can cause 6.31.9 Tread Wear Indicators (TWI)
uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way
your vehicle handles. Tread wear indicators are moulded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread
depth becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators
appear in two or more adjacent grooves, the Tyre should be
If you overfill the Tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem replaced.
in the centre of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.
Avoid abrupt manoeuvring and braking. This can cause Tyre

After inspecting or adjusting the Tyre pressure, always deterioration and lead to loss of steering or braking control.
reinstal the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre
pressure, an accident and/or personal injury.

6-58
6.31.10 Life of Tyre and suspension components. You could lose control of the
vehicle or the Tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an
The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors accident and/or personal injury.
including but not limited to:
• Driving style
Replacing original Tyres with Tyres of a different size may
• Tyre pressure result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
• Distance driven
6.31.11 Snow Chains
Tyres and the spare Tyre should be replaced after six years, Snow chains cannot be used on these Tyres.
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden and unexpected Tyre failure,
leading to an accident and/or personal injury.
In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is
recommended using winter Tyres with the same
specifications for better stability, safety and performance.
Keep dismounted Tyres in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect Tyres from contact
with oil, grease and fuels.
Do not use a Tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that
specified for your vehicle on the Tyre placard. Combinations
of unapproved Tyres and wheels may change suspension
geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering

6.31.12 Tyre Rotation Recommendations Type 2 – Applicable for All wheel Drive Vehicles
Type 1 - Applicable for Front wheel Drive Vehicles It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the
“Maintenance Schedule”.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
Tyres on the front and rear
VVehicle shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are
Front
axles of vehicles operate at
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
different loads and perform
those on On/Off-road type tyres.
different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at Rotation will increase tread
Vehicle
unequal rates and develop V
life, help to maintain mud,

Rear
W62E121
irregular wear patterns. snow, and wet traction
levels, and contribute to a
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, smooth, quiet ride. Follow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet the recommended tyre
ride. Follow the recommended tyre rotation frequency for rotation frequency for your
your type of driving. W12L10
type of driving.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The

reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.

6-60
6.31.13 Temporary Spare Wheel • While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid
sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt
steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that
Regular Tyre Temporary Tyre cause sudden engine braking.
When Temporary Spare Wheel is attached
V V
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the

following systems may not operate correctly:
ABS, Cruise control (If equipped), EPS, Rear View monitor
system (If equipped), Navigation system (If equipped)
Speed Limit when using Temporary Spare tyre
W62E34_1 W62E34_3
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.
purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at
running. high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to
When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel an accident causing death or serious injury.
• Temporary Spare Wheel provided specifically designed

for your vehicle.
• The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the
• Do not use more than one Temporary Spare Wheel Temporary Spare tyre compared to when driving with
simultaneously. standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven
road surfaces.
• Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary
Spare Wheel. • Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation,
refer Tyre pressure label on the door panel

• TPMS is not provided in temporary spare wheel 6.31.15 Wheel Tightness

• Do not fit tyre chains to the Temporary spare tyre. When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all
Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a
affect driving performance. scraper or wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust
• Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated
specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre. the holes in the rim, or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If
any of the wheel bolts are damaged, contact the nearest
• Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
the speed rating index marked on the tyre
• The tread depth of temporary tyre is lesser compared to
regular tyre. Hence do not use the temporary tyre for Always tighten the bolts in a criss-cross sequence. Never use
longer distance than recommended. Repair & refit the oil or grease on your wheel bolts.
regular tyre as soon as possible. Never overtighten the bolts on the wheel hub. You could
• Recommended to drive Max 50 km in a stretch or reach damage the hub or the bolt.
nearest Mahindra authorised dealer Torque tighten the wheel bolts to the specified value at the
nearest Authorised Mahindra Workshop.
6.31.14 Changing a Flat Tyre
Refer to “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergencies The tyres fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS
chapter for details. and they comply with the requirements under the Central
Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.

6-62
6.32 Tiretronics (if equipped)
The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature

of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System
alerts the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters
are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.
The system will continue to alert until the warning condition
is resolved to the actual placard values.
Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required
for;
6.32.1 Operation of Tiretronics
• Adequate braking
• Road grip Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted
on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They
• Vehicle handling transmit the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is
in turn is communicated and displayed on the instrument
• Vehicle maneuvering cluster.
• Reduced tyre wear and tear In the instrument cluster screen all the tyre locations will
• Reduced tyre strain and safety display the status as pressure and temperature. Spare tyre
(if TPMS sensor equipped) information on tiretronics screen
• Good fuel efficiency shall be available only during any alerts and warning in the
The instrument cluster displays all alerts & visual warnings spare tyre. (User Shall verify spare tyre pressure manually,
related to Tiretronics system. In certain conditions system may not update pressure for
Spare tyre correctly)
The Tiretronics has been customized only for the
manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics

pressure limits and warning messages have been 6.32.2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp
established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on
your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a The Tiretronics warning lamp in the instrument
different size, type or style of components may damage the cluster illuminates for any alert condition and
sensor and lead to incorrect readings. also for low/high tyre pressure/High
temperature alerts and malfunction.
Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply
may lead to sensor damage. 6.32.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation
The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care
and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. First apply lubricant (paste)
The system should not be used as a replacement for a or soapy water to rim hole
pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre or valve nozzle bar, as
pressure. shown in the following
figure (the diagram is for
Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat reference only, and it is
and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce operated according to the
fuel efficiency, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle's degree of automation of
maneuverability and braking ability. the customer's production
line)
It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre
pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the Tiretronics warning indicator.

6-64
6. Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the

valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior
to installing back on the vehicle
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a

wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and
damage it. Start from the opposite direction.
W12L50
1. Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the 6.32.4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal
TTV insertion tool to the end of the valve ready for pull
in
2. Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the • Remove the tyre from
correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in
the rim
a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at
an angle to it • Remove the valve core to
deflate the tyre.
3. The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor.
Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the
rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT
touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the
rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the • Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps
enclosure is inserted into the tyre at the yellow position shown
below and turn the rim clockwise.
4. Place the inner tyre bead over the rim
5. Place the outer tyre bead over the rim

• Carefully and firmly pull

the enclosure straight
back off the valve
W12L51
• To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw using a T6 • Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve.
TORX screwdriver. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the
rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb
• Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool
The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to

avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre
tool.
• Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool
• Remove existing valve stem
Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a

wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and
damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

6-66
6.32.5 Functionalities of Tiretronics System Low Pressure Alert
• Low Pressure Alert

• High Pressure Alert
Low pressure monitoring is
• High Temperature Alert to indicate low tyre
• Pressure Leakage Alert pressure. Please note the
following points.
• Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error)
• Tiretronics Sensor Faulty.
• Tyre Auto Learn • Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre
• Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) pressure value goes below threshold. Low pressure will
be set based on the temperature value.
• Tyre Pressure Imbalance
• Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up
once for driver notification when the alert is set and the
vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will
remain in the information screen and alert register
screen
• If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be
rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air
• Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below
threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure
is filled to the placard value

High Pressure Alert Pressure Leakage Alert
Pressure leakage
High pressure monitoring is
monitoring is to indicate
to indicate high pressure
pressure leakage in any of
alert. Please note the
the vehicle tyres. Please
following points.
note the following points.
• High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre • Pressure Leakage alert will be set only when the tyre
pressure value goes above threshold pressure is leaking at a rate greater than defined
threshold
• High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up
once for driver notification when the alert is set and the • In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure
vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will goes too below threshold then the low pressure alert will
remain in the tiretronics screen also be set
• If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released • The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will
from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification
placard value and will be shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle
is in running /ignition ON condition
• The vehicle should be driven above 40 kmph for the new
pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared • Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre
should be observed for air leakages and the puncture
• Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall condition has to be rectified. Proper placard value should
not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is be filled after puncture rectification
reaches to the placard value

6-68
• If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor
bumpy condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre
may get set which will get rectified when the vehicle runs
back on a normal road. This happens due to sudden • If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be
change in pressure levels due to rocky conditions replaced with a new one and manual/auto learning
should be done
Sensor Signal Missing Alert
Sensor Faulty / Low Battery Alert
Each tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal
individual battery . If the battery level is too low or the
When the vehicle runs in sensor by itself is malfunctioning then the Tiretronics
speed above 40kmph, system shall give this alert.
Tiretronics system receives
signal from all the • If the Tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the
Tiretronics sensor installed corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be
in all running tyres. removed by carefully opening the tyre and replacing it
with a new sensor
• Post replacing the new sensor, manual/auto learning
• On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics should be done
sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing
manual learning then the signal will not be received
• If the Signals from the tiretronics sensor are not received
atleast once, when the vehicle is driven at a speed
greater than 40kmph for more than 10 minutes, "Signal
Missing" alert will be set for the respective tyre and
Tiretronics Telltale will be ON.
• When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform
manual learning once. If manual learning is not done

Tyre Auto Learn Process (If Enabled in cluster) blink for 90 sec and remain ON. TPMS indication lamp will
continue until the error condition is rectified.
Refer cluster settings for the “TPMS Auto Learn ” in the”

Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details
Tyre Fill Assist (TFA) (If Enabled in cluster)
During Air Filling in tyre,

Hazard lamps shall blink
In case of tyres location changed from its original location, until placard value reaches.
Automatically tyre swap location shall be identified and During air filling If tyre
pressure and temperature value for respective tyre shall be Pressure has reached the
updated within 10 min of vehicle driving based on Placard Value, then Horn
environmental condition & vehicle drive condition auto shall activate one time
location shall take one or more drive cycle to auto learn.
In case of a new TPMS replaced in the tyre, automatically
system shall identify the tyre swapped location and update During Air filling If tyre Pressure exceeds Placard Value, then
the warnings and alert for new location. Hazard lamps shall blink at faster rate.
If spare wheel tyre get swapped with any of the running Refer cluster settings for the “Tyre Fill Assist ” in the”
tyres then display shall show Signal missing in the cluster Instrument Cluster Features” chapter for further details
for respective tyre location and TPMS indication lamp will

6-70
Tyre Pressure Imbalance 6.32.6 Tiretronics Manual Learning
After tyre rotation or Tiretronics sensor replacement, the

receiver must be learnt, else the Tiretronics warning lamp
During driving if the system
will be ON, indicating malfunction.
identifies tyre Pressure
imbalance on front two Mandate Points
tyres / Rear two tyres then
Instrument Cluster shall Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4
popup Tyre Pressure sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and
imbalance warning. programmed in to the memory of the receiver module.
1. Manual learning should be compulsorily performed
on any of the following conditions or operations done
• Any sensors replaced.
• Any of the tyres are replaced
• If any of the tyres or set of tyres are shuffled or
swapped in position
• If tyre rotation operation is performed
• If it is observed that the alert indications in the
tiretronics screen are not co-relating with respect
to their actual position in the vehicle
2. Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside
the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from
each tyre one at a time and should be completed

within certain value post to each event for learning all Initiating the Manual Learning Process
4 tyres
3. Do not perform Manual learning process at the same
time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meters CRUISE
4. It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should SET+ 1. Press & Hold the enter
follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front SET- button in UP position.
right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.
RESUME
5. It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure >
32psi and < 36psi before initiating the manual
learning process
2. Turn the ignition key on
6. Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the
placard pressure value 3. Wait for the cluster’s tachometer and speedometer to
3
rotate to highest position and then release the enter button
2
in up position. Then observe the cluster for the Tiretronics
1
telltale to blink, vehicle siren will indicate by 2 chrips & 2
It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow times turn lamps blink and instrument cluster screen shows
the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear ‘TPMS MANUAL LEARNING’
right tyre and rear left tyre.
If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode;
• Try initiating the manual learning once again
• Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged
disengage it
• Check if the Enter button is working fine

6-72
If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra

Dealer for further assistance.
Learning the Rear Right
Tyre: Start leaking the air
from the rear right for 30 to
Starting from Front Left 40 sec and stop for 5 sec.
Tyre: Start leaking the air Repeat until the tyre gets
from the front left for 30 to learnt.
40 sec and stop for 5 sec.
Repeat until the tyre gets
learnt
If the rear right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard
and the RR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
If the front left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard

and the FL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
Completing the Learning
with Rear Left Tyre: Start
leaking the air from the
Learning the Front Right rear left tyre for 30 to 40
Tyre: Start leaking the air sec and stop for 5 sec.
from the front right for 30 Repeat until the tyre gets
to 40 sec and stop for 5 sec. learnt.
Repeat until the tyre gets
learnt.
If the rear left tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard
and the RL tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.
If the front right tyre is learned, 1 siren chirp sound is heard

and the FR tyre shows learned in the cluster screen.

Limitations
If rear left tyre is also • The Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and
learned, then 1 siren chirp temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre
is heard and ALL tyres show wear
learned at respective tyre
positions and ‘All tyres • The Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre
Learned successfully’ in the burst and inform the driver in advance
centre of the screen. • There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre
location indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking
along with the Tiretronics telltale, on passing
If learning is not successful environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF
at any point of time, or at signal. It will come back to normal condition when
any point of time during the interference gets cleared
learning process if the
learning takes more than 6.32.7 Tiretronics — Points to Remember
90 secs of time for each
tyre position then the • It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at a digital
system shall exit the gauge station only
learning mode and show
the ‘TPMS Manual Learning • Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 32 psi and
Not Successful’ screen. inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient
temperature
• Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and
gauge will depend upon the following factors:
– Atmospheric pressure
– Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)

6-74
– Air leakage during inflation/deflation However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few
kilometers depending upon the climatic condition
• Tiretronics measures the absolute pressure of the tyre,
not relative pressure (gauge pressure)
6.32.8 Recommended Playcard Value
• Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi
(max)
Recommended Pressure
Ambient Temp. (Deg C)
• If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and Front & Rear (32 Psi Placard)
reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle <0 28
is driven or sensor is activated
10 29
• It is mandatory that manual learning should be 20 31
performed if the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the
tyres sensors are replaced, else the system will give a 30 32
false alert with respect to false location 40 34
50 35
• If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4
tyres as per manual learning procedure 60 37
70 38
• Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device.
Pressure and temperature values displayed by the
system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The
Tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 min &
device to correlate or calibrate against other systems is driven less than 15 min before filling the air then the tyres
shall be filled to the respective playcard as per the ambient
• During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances temperature else to the next playcard value.
of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre
location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is Example: If a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 deg c for
near the thresholds level. i. e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. 50 min and driven to a air filling station within 5 min then
respective play card value will be 32.0 PSI for front & rear.
Else 33.5 PSI

6.33 Reverse Parking Assist System (RPAS) Do not press or apply shock on the sensors by hitting or using a high-
pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be damaged.
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver
while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8 kmph.
While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of 6.33.1 Driving and Operation
the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed
through the internal rear view mirror and the outside rear view
mirrors. The RPAS will alert the driver by sending out sound alarms
at different frequency and display bars in instrument cluster to • RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances
indicate proximity of the obstacle from the vehicle. The alert sound mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held
level and the number of display bars is proportional to the
distance. Lesser the distance, shorter the interval between beeps & liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or
more number of display bars illuminated. consequential damage caused by this system
• System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages
RPAS Sensors which are below the ground level
• Applying paint over the sensor will affect the
performance of the system
Two RPAS sensors are
located at the rear bumper Activation & De-activation of RPAS
to assist driver for hassle- • The vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the
free parking. reverse parking assistance system
W62E49
• RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is
engaged and deactivate when reverse gear is disengaged
• When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the
Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the systems starts giving the indication based on the distance
sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurate. and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting
Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars
for proper working of the system. illuminate & frequency of beeps increases.

6-76
6.33.2 RPAS Information on Instrument Cluster

2. Change the gear to
reverse (engage the reverse
RPAS display on the gear). The RPAS will be
instrument cluster gives the displayed as like below in
W62S35
following information: the Instrument cluster.
• Left zone indicates
W62S34
obstacle on left side
3. Start moving the vehicle in the reverse direction
• Right zone indicates obstacle on right side

• If obstacle is in centre then both left & Right zone will get 4. Display bars in the
highlight respective direction will
glow according to obstacles
in its path
W62S36
6.33.3 Operation of RPAS
1. Start the vehicle (IGN is turned ON)

5. The Beep sound can be heard from the Instrument
cluster. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle
comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will
be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.

Along with this beep sound can be heard from Instrument

6. The RPAS distance cluster. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle
displayed will be the comes closer and the sound will be continuous if any of the
minimum of distances obstacles is less than 50 cm.
sensed by left and right
sensors. And 120 cm is the 6.33.4 Pay Attention
W62S37
maximum detection range.
For Example: 1. If display bars in any one

of the sides are displayed
Assume 2 obstacles are placed as mentioned below: with cross marks, contact
• Obstacle at left at 70 cm an Mahindra Authorised
W62S39
Dealer
• Obstacle at right at 101 cm
On engaging the gear in reverse, instrument cluster will
display as below:
2. If all display bars are

displayed with cross marks,
Since obstacle is at 70 cm in contact an Mahindra
left - minimum distance is Authorised Dealer.
W62S40
shown in the distance
Lorem ipsum
indicator.
W62S38

6-78
6. Not all obstacles are

detected from 120 cm. For
3. Obstacle in the blind instance, a person is
zone cannot be sensed by detected from 75 cm
the system. because of the weak
reflection or absorption of
the waves of the clothes.
W62E52 W62E55
4. Please check the

condition of the obstacle
behind your vehicle before 7. The distance indication
reversing. In some cases, may move up and down
the display may be not as due to different sizes of the
same as reality due to the obstacle at different
installed sensor level, positions.
W62E53
obstacle shape and W62E56
reflection condition.
8. Though the obstacle is in

5. Point B will be detected the sensing zone, obstacle
sooner or later, but A may may not be detected since
not be detected at all.3. the ultrasonic waves are
Point B will be detected not reflected back to the
sooner or later, but A may Obstacle
sensor.
not be detected at all. Blind Zone Sensing Zone
W62E54

• System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is
tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily
overloaded
9. The obstacle of a conical
shape may not be detected, • System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and
since the ultrasonic waves heavy wind conditions
get deflected away. • The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some
obstacles for example as follows:
Blind Zone Obstacle Sensing Zone
– Sharply-angled objects
6.33.5 Limitations of RPAS – Tall or curved curb
– Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level)

• System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects
which are below the bumper level – Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the
direction of the vehicle
• System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which
will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by RPAS • Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental
factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be
• System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the impossible
obstacle
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor
• System may give false alert without obstacles while reversing the
vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an • Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when
obstacle approached, even if they have been detected once
• System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not • Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.
fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights
• System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground • Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or
to a slope terrain and vice versa other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle
is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm

6-80
6.34 Rear View Camera 6.34.1 Feature Description
1. Normal View
Rear View Camera is
located under tail gate By selecting Normal View Icon, Rear View
applique. camera provides about 130 deg horizontal
Rear View Camera assists wide rear view of vehicle's rear surrounding on
the driver while reversing & the Infotainment screen.
manoeuvring the Car at
lower speeds. It has the It overcomes limitation of
following features: IRVM, where ground is
visible only after a distance
1. Normal View from vehicle rear. Whereas
with the RVC, the ground
2. Zoom-in View will be visible right after 15
cm to 30 cm from Vehicle’s
3. Full View
Rear
4. Merged Corner View
5. Left Corner View 2. Zoom-In View
6. Right Corner View Press Zoom-In

button to view
7. Static & Dynamic Guidelines objects closer
and press
8. Parking assistance Zoom-Out button to go
• Parallel Parking back to the normal parking
view.
• Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking

3. Full View/Wider View 5. Left Corner View

By selecting
If user wants
Full View Icon
to focus on the
Rear View
left side
camera
crossing
provides about 170 deg
traffic, then "Left Corner
horizontal wide rear view of
View" icon can be pressed
vehicle's rear surrounding
to select the view.
on the Infotainment screen.
Full view is wider than Normal View. Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner
View.
4. Merged Corner View
By selecting
Merged 6. Right Corner View
Corner Rear
If user wants
View camera
to focus on the
provides a wide view
left side
focussed on the left and
crossing
right corners to provide a
traffic, then "Left Corner
better visibility of crossing
View" icon can be pressed
traffic for safe manouvre.
to select the view.
Merged Corner View shows merged view of rear left and
right corners.
Select “Back” Icon to switch to Merged Corner
View.

6-82
7. Static and Dynamic Guidelines 8. Parking Assistance

Static Guidelines indicate the placement of the vehicle with The feature assists the driver with the help of parking
respect to the parking slot during parking. During parking, overlays to park the vehicle in target parking slot. Parallel or
compare the Static guidelines against the Parking Slot Lines Vertical Parking option can be selected by driver based on
to know if vehicle placement is in-line with the parking slot parking slot availability.
lines.
Color coding on Static lines help in assessing the distance of
obstacle from the vehicles’ rear. In the RVC Video, if Red Overlays and guidelines are displayed regardless of the
color dashed line falls on a object on the floor then the current vehicle environment. The driver is responsible for
Object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s rear. checking and ensuring that there is no obstacle in the
Likewise, Red solid line indicates 0.5-1mts, Yellow indicates selected parking slot.
1-2 mts, and Green indicates 2-3 mts.
Parallel Parking
Dynamic Guidelines Parallel Parking guides the driver to park the vehicle in a slot
(orange color in below parallel to the vehicle.
image) indicate path, the
vehicle will traverse with Drive ahead of the parking
current steering position. A. Selecting Parking Slot
slot, until it is fully visible.
As per the steering angle Now select “Parallel
movement, dynamic Parking”
guidelines move and show
the vehicle predicted Icon from
moving direction to help infotainment.
the driver. After selection,
Infotainment
displays below screen
image1.

B. Setting the steering

Drive the vehicle Forward
angle:
or Backward and ensure
the greenish -blue rectangle When the box is green
[consider right rectangle if (image 2), stop turning the
parking image slot is on steering wheel and hold the
right side and consider left position.
rectangle if parking slot is
on left side], is placed in the
parking slot. Make sure
obstacles are not present
Green color: Represents suitable parking location. You can
try an attempt to park.
Red color: Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Your
Ensure, there is enough space (min.3ft) sideways between vehicle may hit the side of the vehicle already parked.
your vehicle and the parked vehicle before engaging Blue color: Represents unsafe/potential risk parking. Final
reverse. parking space length needed will be larger than the desired
In the parking slot after the vertical pole. length of parking space. May lead to wrong vehicle direction
movement.
• Now start turning the steering wheel towards the
direction in which parking slot is present. A shorter
rectangle box will appear which will change the color
Green/Blue/Red colors in this mode are for guiding the
according to the steering position.
vehicle to the parking slot and it would not detect the
obstacles or alert the driver in that zone. It is the sole
responsibility of the driver to ensure the rear end obstacles/
vehicles which can lead to damage while parking.

6-84
C. Complete Parking Vertical/Perpendicular Parking

With current steering
position, start moving the Vertical/Perpendicular parking assistance guides the driver
vehicle backward. An to park the vehicle in a parking slot perpendicular to the
orange arc line will appear. vehicle. Below are the steps to achieve Vertical parking.
When the orange arc
(image 3) touches the Selecting Parking Slot
parking slot end position,
stop the vehicle
Drive ahead of the parking
• Now rotate the steering wheel to maximum in the slot, until it is fully visible.
opposite direction. Arc is then replaced by dynamic and Now select “Vertical
static parking line. Continue backing the vehicle with the
help of dynamic guideline.
• When static guidelines

are parallel to target Parking” icon present on infotainment screen.
parking slot (image 4), After selection, Infotainment display’s below
bring steering to centre screen:
position. Adjust vehicle
backward or forward
until the whole vehicle is
in the target parking slot.
Parking Completed

Setting the steering angle 6.34.2 Entry and Exit Conditions

Based on the side driver prefers to park, either blue or pink Entry Conditions
arc needs to be taken into consideration Drive the vehicle,
either forward / backward and ensure that preferred side Turn on ignition and apply the reverse gear, Infotainment
arc’s tip is touching the starting edge of target parking slot. will enter into ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the
Once done, stop the vehicle. video.
Turn steering wheel to the You can also view vehicle’s

maximum position, rear surrounding, by
towards direction of the selecting Rear View Camera
parking slot. Pink/ blue option present on
overlay disappears, and the Infotainment Screen,
dynamic and static overlay irrespective of the gear
appears on the screen as position.
shows in the image.
Complete Parking
Hold steering in the maximum position and start driving the You cannot enter RVC Mode, through the infotainment
vehicle backwards. when static lines are parallel to target screen button, if the vehicle is in forward/drive gear and
parking slot, bring steering to centre position and continue vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph.
driving backward until the whole vehicle is in target parking
Exit Conditions
slot. Parking Completed
• If the driver is not in Parallel or Vertical Parking mode and
Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’ by reverse gear
option, then RVC mode exits when reverse gear is
disengaged

6-86
• If the driver is not in Parallel or Vertical Parking mode and needs to be taken to the Service Centre. Avoid using the
Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to “Rear View Rear-View Camera under these circumstances.
Camera” selection present on the Infotainment, then RVC
mode can be exited, by selecting the Cancel button • If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera
appearing on the screen position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra
Authorised Service Center immediately.
• Irrespective of RVC entry conditions, when Parallel or
Vertical Parking Mode is active, driver can exit the RVC
Mode using Cancel button that appears, whenever 6.34.4 System Limitations
vehicle is in forward gear
• Rear view camera may not operate normally, when you
• RVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear drive in the extremely high or low temperature area.
and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C)
• When ignition is off. • Under certain circumstances given below, the rear view
camera system will work with limitation or will not
function fully:
6.34.3 Camera Maintenance
- In heavy rain, snow or fog.
Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of
dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality. - At night or in very dark places.
Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the - If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.
lens. - Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or
fluorescent lighting.
Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear - If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to
view camera with a power washer. hot areas.
• In case of any RVC-related issues, the Infotainment - If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed.
displays ‘ Please Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle

• If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the • Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be
Camera position and the settings got changed. Please far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be
contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines
to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments
• Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in and increase the risk of collision with your car
real time due to processing. As the display is 2-
dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard • It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking
to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid area to park car safely
rear view camera in the above situation. It could you
otherwise injure others or damage objects and your • Rear view video is shown, whenever reverse gear is
vehicle applied, but it cannot be used as a rear view monitoring
system, which cannot replace the driver for looking into
• The performance gets affected sometimes due to exterior and interior view mirrors
deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy
exhaust on the camera
Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to
enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way
• Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using
manner, as like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra accepts no
persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or
manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this
before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible system.
for their car
• The rear view camera is only a supplementary function
and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective
& inaccurately
• Avoid using of rear view camera, if you are having eye
colour blindness or impaired colour vision

6-88
STARTING AND DRIVING II
7 STARTING AND DRIVING II
7.1 Steering If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is
turned OFF or Not availability of vehicle speed / Power cut
Your vehicle is equipped with electric power steering (EPS). off), you can still steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
EPS system provides an external assist, so that the driver more effort.
can easily rotate the steering wheel without much effort. If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
The power steering system will give you good vehicle
response and increased ease of manoeuvrability in tight • Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s)
spaces. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it
will provide mechanical steering capability to steer the • Uneven vehicle loading
vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a • High crown in the centre of the road
substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low
vehicle speeds and during parking manoeuvres. • High crosswinds
• Wheels out of alignment
Continued operation with reduced power steering

• Wheels out of balance
performance could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. • Loose or worn suspension components
Have the vehicle serviced at specified intervals or whenever
a power steering problem is noticed.
Keep both hands especially your thumbs on the outside of
the steering wheel rim. Do not hold the steering wheel
spokes.

7.1.1 Tilt Steering

Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control
and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while
driving.
The steering wheel can be
adjusted for both rake and
reach as required using the 7.2 Steering Controls - Audio (if equipped)
lever in the steering shroud
under the steering wheel.
(If equipped)
+
VOL
SEEK
-
To tilt/adjust the steering wheel: +

VOL
-
SET+
SET-
RESUME
3
2
1
1. Pull the tilt lever down to

unlock.
2. Raise or lower the The steering wheel also houses switches to control the main
steering wheel to the audio functions.
desired position.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

4. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock
the steering.

7-2
Steering Audio Operations • Volume Control - Press ‘+’ and ‘- button to increase or
decrease the volume
Infotainment system can be controlled by Steering wheel
switch mounted on the left side of the steering wheel. • Call Connect - Press to accept the incoming call to paired
the BT phone to enable the driver to open the contact list
in infotainment and make the call
A E • Source - Press SOURCE button to toggle between TUNER,
USB, BT AUDIO and MYDRIVE
B + F
VOL
-
SEEK • Seek UP/Down - Press the seek UP/DOWN button can be
C G used for toggling UP/DOWN the menu list of
Infotainment.
H
D
• Call Dis Connect - Press to reject or end active call to the
paired BT phone.
This is provide the flexibility of controlling the infotainment
A: Mute E: Source system while driving without any distraction.
B: Volume + F: SEEK UP
C: Volume - G: SEEK DOWN
D: Call Connect H: Voice / Call Disconnect
• Mute - Press MUTE button to mute the audio playing in

Infotainment while in TUNER mode and pause the song
while in USB mode

7.3 Cruise Control (if equipped) Cruise control enhances your comfort while
driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of
the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It the cruise control can lead to an accident.
should be used for cruising on straight, open highways.
Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain or in bad weather conditions. Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed
It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the of 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT for all gears except 1st and
set speed of the vehicle; the system controls the fuel reverse gears. The cruise lamp in the instrument cluster
injection of the engine in order to maintain the set speed. functions only if the cruise control is active.
Cruise control will function only under the following
conditions;
CRUISE
A CRUISE • The vehicle is cruising above 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT
E
+
SET
-
B
+
• Engine RPM above 1200 RPM
RESUME
SET
• Vehicle is in any gear except 1st and reverse

+
VOL +
RESUME -
C
3
2
RESUME
• Clutch pedal released.
1
D
• Brake pedal released.
• Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button
A CRUISE ON/OFF D CRUISE RESUME
• Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + /
CLUSTER MENU/ SET - button 3
B SET + E
MODE 2
C SET – • 1
Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME
SET+ /SET- buttons in the same ignition cycle

7-4
Cruise control is deactivated under the following If cruise is deactivated (e. g. by depressing brake to handle an
conditions: intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the
Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME
• CRUISE OFF button is pressed button.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up
• Brake or clutch pedal depressed or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This
is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by
20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT by accelerator pedal
intervention 7.3.2 Cruise Control De-activation
• If vehicle speed is increased by 10 kmph for more than 30 You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:
seconds by pressing the accelerator pedal
• Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel
• When Set +/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12
seconds (In this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode • Press the brake pedal
in that ignition cycle. In order to restore the cruise
function, switch OFF the ignition, wait for 30 seconds and • Gear selector moved into neutral
switch ON the ignition) • HDC or ESP becomes active
• Cruise influencing error indicated by Check Engine Lamp,
OBD lamp, etc. 7.3.3 SET + Button
7.3.1 Cruise Control Activation SET + button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase
the cruise set speed.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET +
Cruise is enabled by pressing ON/OFF button button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by
about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the
Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value cruising speed, press and hold the SET + button and release when
greater than 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT), press and hold the desired speed is reached.
the SET + button until the cruise lamp in the instrument
cluster illuminates.

7.3.4 SET - Button 1. Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the
vehicle speed at 50 kmph.
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET -
button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases 2. Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have
by about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously decrease deactivated the cruise mode either by pressing the
the cruising speed, press and hold the SET- button. When brake pedal or by switching OFF the CRUISE control.
the desired speed is reached, release the button. 3. Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.
4. When the road condition is suitable to switch over
back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button
If switch is pressed for more than 12 secs., the switch is assumed once. The system activates the cruise control mode to
to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality ceases to
function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality, ignition has the previous cruising speed of 50 kmph.
to toggled. 5. To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle
speed should be above 20kmph - MT / 35kmph - AT.
The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the

driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all times
7.3.6 Override Function
remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the
vehicle brake operation / steering control. This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to
overtake front vehicle.
Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse
road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery etc.) The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator
pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 seconds,
7.3.5 RESUME Button to maintain the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 seconds
limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.
With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set
cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This
is best explained with the following example:

7-6
7.4 Advanced Driver Assistance System (If 5 Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)
equipped)
6 Smart Pilot Assist (SPA)
The Advance Driver Assist System (ADAS) uses camera and
radar to provide alerts and controls to improve the overall
safety and increase the driver comfort. It should be noted In view of the policy of continuously improving our
that ADAS is only an assistance given to the driver; it neither products, we reserve the right to alter specifications or
replaces the driver nor is a substitute. designs without prior notice and without liability/obligation.
Illustrations do not show the vehicle in the standard form.
Please be aware that this manual may apply to various
The ADAS system gives models/variants. As a result you may find some
ADAS enormous benefits to explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All
DISPLAY
driver, however the driver the information, illustration, and specifications in this
shall remain solely manual are based on the latest product information
responsible for the safe
CRUISE
available at the time of publication.

SET+
VOL +
ENTER
SET-
RESUME
START
CRUISE
maneuvering of the car. He

We recommend you to contact the nearest Authorised
ENGINE
STOP
SET+ 3
must remain vigilant

2
SET- 1
ADAS
RESUME
SWITCHES
throughout the drive. Mahindra Dealer for latest features applicable to your
vehicle.
3
2
1
ADAS provides below features:
1 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

2 Collision mitigation System (AEB/FCW)
3 High Beam Assist (HBA)
4 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

7.4.1 Maintenance Guidelines for Camera and • If the windshield portion in front of camera has any
Radar Sensor cracks/scratches/stone chips, it should be taken to
Mahindra Service Centre for complete windshield
replacement.
Front Camera Camera Maintenance • If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly
Module (ADAS)
To avoid incorrect, partial for the front side, contact Mahindra Service Centre to
or disabled ADAS check for any damage / calibration errors in the Camera.
functionality due to Camera • In case any modification to be done for Camera, beauty
sensor failure, following cover, Inside Rear View Mirror or Ceiling, contact
Front Radar points to be taken care of. Mahindra Service Centre.
Module
• Any external object/accessories should not be installed

on the hood area as it may affect the Camera’s field of
• The outer area of the windshield must be cleaned view.
regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water drops
etc. • Ensure that flag post on the bonnet is not blocking the
camera view.
• If there is condensation in the inner side of windshield in
front of Camera, use the de-mister to clear it. • The head lamps should not be modified and in case of
head lamp replacement, head lamp aiming should be by
• If there is any other dirt in the inner side of windshield in Mahindra Service Centre only
front of Camera, contact Mahindra Service Centre for
cleaning. • If the Windshield or Camera is replaced, the Camera
must be recalibrated at Authorised Mahindra Service
• Stickers, window tinting, electronic toll devices or similar Centre only.
objects should not be attached on the windshield in front
of camera.
• If the Camera needs to be removed or replaced, contact
Mahindra Service Centre only.

7-8
Radar Maintenance 7.5 Adaptive Cruise Control (Only for Automatic

Transmission variant)
To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality
due to Radar sensor failure, following points to be taken When the ACC is engaged, it allows the vehicle to cruise at
care of. the desired ‘set speed’. In traffic conditions if a vehicle is
• The Radar surface and bumper area in front of radar detected in the front of the vehicle, then the ACC reduces
must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, the vehicle speed to match the front preceding vehicle
ice, water etc. speed. The distance from the front preceding vehicle is
maintained as per the Distance level set by the driver.
• Any external object should not be installed on the front
grill or front bumper area as it may affect Radar’s Disclaimer
performance.
• ACC is an aid to assist the driver. It is not a collision
• Ensure that the number plate is not blocking the radar avoidance system.
sensor.
• Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ACC
• Avoid any kind of customization to the front bumper and system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual
Radar like attaching stickers, installing flags or metallic thoroughly before using the system.
objects, painting etc.
• ACC is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is
• If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention
for the front side, contact Mahindra Service Centre to and judgement. The driver is responsible for observing all
check for any damage to the Radar unit. traffic and safety rules, including maintenance of safe
distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise
• If the Radar sensor needs to be removed or replaced, Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable
contact Mahindra Service Centre only. distance to the vehicle ahead
• If any rework done on front bumper or Radar, the Radar • It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and to be in
must be recalibrated by Authorised Mahindra Service control of the vehicle at all times.
Center only.
• Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.

• ACC has limited braking capability and may not stop the 7.5.1 ACC Switches
vehicle in time to avoid a collision, if the front preceding
vehicle decelerates quickly or a new vehicle cuts-in front
always be prepared to apply brake.
A CRUISE
• Failure to follow the alerts and instructions for proper The ACC switches on the
B
use of system could result in serious injury. SET+ steering wheel consists of
C
five switches which are
• Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the SET-
D used for ACC Operation.

speed over them. RESUME
E
• Use ACC in appropriate roads with proper lane marking
and sign boards.
• Do not use ACC in busy areas where multiple road users A - CRUISE ON/OFF Switch
cross the vehicles intended path.
• To Toggle between ACC ON and OFF 3
• When two wheeler cuts out, ACC may not be able to B - SET+ 2
identify the vehicle in front of two-wheeler. 1
• To set desired speed
• ACC may not be able to stop behind stopped vehicles.
• To increase Set speed when ACC is active
• ACC may not be always able to follow two wheeler.
C - TIME GAP
• To select the time gap to the front preceding vehicle
ACC may not detect all types of vehicle and driver has to be between Level 4 to Level 1.
vigilant to be in control of the vehicle.
D - SET-
• To set desired speed
• To decrease Set speed when ACC is active

7-10
E - RESUME
• To resume ACC to previous Set Speed. front preceding vehicle Indicator shows an icon of a Car
always though the front preceding vehicle may be a car/
truck/two wheeler or any other type of vehicle.
Do not use RESUME button to Set Speed immediate after
ACC ON. Do use only SET+/SET- 7.5.3 How to turn ACC ON/OFF
7.5.2 Instrument Cluster Display

CRUISE
Image Display Press CRUISE switch to

SET+ activate ACC feature. This
SET- turns ACC to Standby
ACC Indicator Mode.
RESUME
120km/h Set Speed

Standby Mode
When CRUISE switch is pressed and desired speed by using 3
Time Gap SET +/– is not set. 2
1
During Standby mode
ACC indicator will illuminate in white color.
front preceding vehicle
Indicator

How to set Desired Speed
• “Adaptive Cruise Control

A CRUISE
Standby” pop-up F Drive the vehicle to the
message will be B
SET+ desired speed (minimum 10
displayed in cluster. C
SET- kmph) and Press Set +/Set-
D switch
RESUME
120km/h • Set speed will be displayed as “—”.

• “Adaptive Cruise Control 3
Active” pop-up message 2
• The vehicle will not maintain previous set speed or will be displayed in the 1
previous time gap to the vehicle ahead. cluster.
• Press the ON/OFF switch again to deactivate ACC feature.

• If ACC indicator illuminates in red , there could be a • ACC will maintain the vehicle speed as set by the driver.
problem with ACC system. visit nearby mahindra service Once set, it will be confirmed by the ACC telltale light.
center. After that no accelerator pedal input from driver need to
be given.
Pressing the ON/OFF switch when ACC in Standby/Active will ACC indicator will be displayed in green.
deactivate the ACC feature. • Set speed will be displayed as set by driver.
• Time interval bars will be displayed.

7-12
ACC will have two modes

1. Speed Control Mode Whenever driver steers and system finds a new target ie.,
front preceding vehicle. ACC takes time to pick the new
During Speed Control Mode, time gap indicator will be target and react.
displayed
ACC operation When No Front Preceding vehicle
detected ahead • If Set+/Set- switch is pressed when vehicle speed is below
When there is no front preceding vehicle detected ahead, 30 kmph then ACC Set Speed will be initialized to 30
ACC maintains the speed set by the driver. kmph.
2. Follow Control Mode • When there is a front preceding vehicle, user can set
desired speed by pressing SET+/- switch below 30 kmph
as there is no minimum desired speed requirement
During Follow Mode, front preceding vehicle Indicator will • When front preceding vehicle and your vehicle are in
be displayed if a front preceding vehicle is detected. stopped condition , apply brake and press SET +/SET-.
Note that ACC will remain in standstill until the front
ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle detected preceding vehicle moves.
ahead
When there is a preceding vehicle, ACC tries to maintain a
safe gap to the front preceding vehicle by reducing the When the SET +/SET– switch is pressed under the following
speed accordingly within comfortable deceleration limits. conditions, ACC cannot be activated. Visual and audio alert
will be provided to driver to inform the same.
ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle moved out
from its lane
When the front preceding vehicle has moved out from your lane of travel,
ACC accelerates and maintains vehicle speed to the set speed.

Condition Alert Condition Alert
When traveling below 10 kmph When driving above maximum

and a vehicle ahead is not ACC operational speed limit.
Detected
W62E162
Lorem ipsum Lorem ipsum
W62E159
When front preceding vehicle is

very close or far away from host
vehicle.
When the shift lever is not in D When driver door is open.
(Drive) Position
W62E163
Lorem ipsum
When the brakes are operated by
the driver
When Collision Mitigation System

When braking system unavailable. is unavailable.
W62E164
Lorem ipsum
Lorem ipsum

7-14
Condition Alert • Press and quickly release the SET- switch to decrease the
set speed by 1 kmph
• Press and hold the SET- switch to decrease the set speed.
When driver seat belt is not by 10 kmph. The set speed will be decreased to the next
buckled. nearest multiple of 10
W62E165
Lorem ipsum
Lorem ipsum
• Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.
How to resume ACC to last set speed value
ACC interacts with other systems, such as braking, steering, EMS
(Engine Management System), ACC Switch etc. If any of these Press the RESUME switch
systems are not functioning properly, ACC cannot be activated.
– ACC will resume back to the last set speed provided the
How to increase Set Speed conditions to engage ACC are satisfied.
Use one of the following methods to increase set speed: How to change the Time Gap Level to the front
preceding vehicle
• Press and quickly release the SET+ switch to increase the
set speed by 1 kmph Each time the Time gap switch C is pressed, the time gap will keep
rolling between the time gap levels as per the below sequence
• Press and hold the SET+ switch to increase the set speed
by 10 kmph. The set speed will be increased to the next Time Gap Level 4->Time Gap Level 3 -> Time Gap Level 2->
nearest multiple of 10. Continuous hold / stuck of SET +/-
button for 60 sec will turn OFF ACC. Time Gap Level 1-> Time Gap Level 4
• Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.

How to decrease Set Speed • The set time gap value of the current ignition/driving cycle will be used
for the next ignition/driving cycle.
Use one of the following methods to decrease set speed:
• When the system is used for the first time after starting the engine, the
time gap value is set to the maximum value (Level 4).

How To Adjust ACC SENSITIVITY

The sensitivity of vehicle acceleration/deceleration can be adjusted to Slow, Normal or fast in the selection menu of ACC as
shown below
ON/OFF
SET+
SET-
RESUME
3
2
1
W62D58

7-16
ACC STOP & GO (Only for EPB Variants) ACC can be engaged by any of the following methods when
in stop-hold mode if front preceding vehicle is present at
ACC operation When front preceding vehicle is detected distance more than 2m and less than 40m:
in models equipped with Electronic Park Brake
1. Press RESUME button
When a front preceding vehicle is detected, front preceding
vehicle indicator along with time interval bars will be 2. Slightly tap the accelerator pedal
displayed in cluster
3. Increase the speed above 10 kmph and press the
In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a RESUME button
traffic light, if the front preceding vehicle comes to stop, ACC
decelerates to bring your vehicle also to stop within the
limitations of the system. Your vehicle movement will When in ACC stopped condition, if driver is trying to
resume automatically if the front preceding vehicle is not unbuckle seat belt/open doors/ change gear etc, then ACC
stopped for more than approx. 3 seconds. may get disengaged and based on gear lever position,
vehicle may crawl. Driver has to apply brake and control the
vehicle.
If it takes more than 3
seconds for the front ACC without Stop & Go
preceding vehicle to begin
moving again, ACC will be For vehicles with manual parking brake, ACC without STOP
set to Standby and the & GO is applicable. Here, If the front preceding vehicle
stop-hold function will comes to stop, ACC decelerates to bring the vehicle speed
activate. A pop-up alert up to 20 kmph and disengages. System provides pop up
message “Press Resume message “Adaptive Cruise Control Standby” for driver to
W62E166
Lorem ipsum
Lorem ipsum Switch or Pedal to take necessary action.
Accelerate” will be
displayed for driver to
resume. ACC decelerates when there is too much of lateral
acceleration.

ACC operation when Accelerator pedal is pressed

Even when ACC is engaged, driver can press the accelerator
When following the front pedal if he wishes to accelerate the vehicle rapidly. When
preceding vehicle, if the driver presses accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed exceeds
front preceding vehicle the set speed.
disappears due to a cut-
out maneuver, a pop-up
• ACC is overridden hence Set Speed and Distance is not
W62E167
Lorem ipsum followed
Lorem ipsum message will be displayed
as “Object Disappeared
Pay Attention”
Please pay attention to the driving operation to maintain • ACC override pop-up will
control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed. be displayed.
If ACC changes targets from a moving front preceding

vehicle to a stationary front preceding vehicle at speeds
above 30 km/h, the system may not react to the stationary • Set speed display will blink.
vehicle and will accelerate to the previously set speed. The
driver must actively apply the brake to slow/stop the vehicle. • Set distance display will blink.
• The front preceding vehicle indicator will turn off when
the area ahead of the vehicle is open.
When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will exit
from the override mode and ACC operation will be resumed

7-18
Automatic cancellation of ACC • The engine speed (rpm) is too high/low.

Under the following conditions ACC control will be cancelled • When ACC is engaged, and your vehicle stopped, and
automatically with an audio alert. after 3 seconds the front preceding vehicle moves and
disappears and when the driver tries to resume ACC
• When the shift lever is not in D(Drive) position. without the front preceding vehicle.
• When the parking brake is applied • When driver tries to resume ACC when front preceding
• When Brake pedal is pressed. vehicle (moving/stopped) is not in detection range.
• When ESP is turned off

• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted. In above scenarios, the
driver may be alerted by an
• When radar sensor area of the front bumper covered audio alert and a message
with dirt or is obstructed. in the instrument cluster
that ACC function is
W62E170
• When accelerator pedal is depressed for more than 60 Lorem ipsum
released/disengaged.
Lorem ipsum
seconds continuously.
• When collision mitigation system is in action.
• When ESP operates The driver is responsible for adapting to vehicle's speed,
apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance
• When driver door is open to the vehicle ahead.
• When vehicle speed exceeds maximum ACC operating
speed.
ACC disengages whenever there is an ESP intervention. For
• When driver seat belt is unbuckled example-: pot holes on a bumpy road
• When the Zoom mode is selected.

The following table lists possible causes for this message

being displayed and suitable actions
In some situations where
ACC braking is not enough Causes Action
to follow the front The bumper in front of the Clean/Clear the bumper in
preceding vehicle, an radar is dirty or covered front of the radar.
audio alert along with pop- with snow/ice.
W62E168
Lorem ipsum up message will be given in
Lorem ipsum No action possible. Heavy
the instrument cluster
"Collision Possible Apply Heavy rain or snow is precipitation may affect the
Brake". interfering with the radar function of the radar.
The driver has to apply brake to keep a safe distance. signals. Do not use ACC during
heavy rain or snow.
No action possible. A very
Clogged water or snow wet or snow-covered road
from the surface of the surface may affect the
In case of temporary function of the radar.
road may interface with the
abnormal conditions, ACC
radar signals. Do not use ACC during
Status telltale will
illuminate in Yellow color these situations.
and ACC function will be The bumper area in front Wait a short time. It may
disabled temporarily by of the radar is clean but the take several minutes for the
showing up a pop-up message remains in the radar to detect that it is no
display. longer obstructed.
“Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled due to Radar Limitation”

7-20
• Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or

animals. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or
approaching vehicles, or stationary objects.
In case of permanent
failure, ACC Status telltale • In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to
will illuminate in red RADAR, turn off ACC and get the vehicle serviced as early
color also and ACC as possible.
function will be disabled Avoid using ACC under the following conditions
permanently by showing
up a pop-up • On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp
curves
“Adaptive Cruise Control Disabled Service Required” • On slippery road surfaces
Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
In case of collision in front bumper, the radar position • During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) and poor
may change which results in degraded ACC performance. visibility.
Visit nearest service center for radar calibration. • When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around
the sensor
7.5.4 ACC System Limitations • On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the
set speed and in trying to maintain set speed, may result
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving in overheating the brakes)
situations and traffic, weather and road conditions.
• On repeated uphill and downhill roads
• Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance
• When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper
system. The driver is always responsible for applying the
distance between vehicles because of frequent
brakes if the system does not detect front preceding
acceleration or deceleration
vehicle.
• Interference by other radar sources installed in nearby
• ACC may not assist in close cut-in scenarios. protected areas like military, airports etc.

• Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving • Situation of stopped vehicles
conditions, in slippery conditions, when there is a great
deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or
snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway
on or off ramps.
ACC Limitation Scenarios
ACC may not function in below scenarios
• Close cut-in situation
Sudden vicinity of stationary object in host vehicle's lane
may not be detected.
Sudden entry of other road vehicle in to host vehicle's lane

may not be detected.
When the preceding vehicle that follows is cutting out, it
detects the preceding vehicle (Vehicle-B) as a new preceding
vehicle because of an irregular radar reflection are occurred
in particular.
As Vehicle-B stops, the host vehicle stops on Vehicle-B.

7-22
At this time, since there is no collision with Vehicle-A, the In the curve entry / exit situation, based on the curvature of
driver may misunderstand that it is under normal control of road on which the host vehicle is moving differs from the
Vehicle-A. curvature of the predicted road, so the adjacent lane can be
selected as the control target and the preceding vehicle in
When Vehicle-B starts, host vehicle may start without the host lane may be missed
considering the new stationary Vehicle-A because of
irregular radar reflection. • Curves with larger curvature
• Curve entry / exit situation
If the radius of curvature is very small, an inadequate or

excessive acceleration/ deceleration may occur due to the
limitation

• Poor visibility • When the road gradient changes
In case of poor visibility, Driver must take the control of In case of road gradient variation, preceding target vehicle
vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver
must take the control of vehicle.
• When a preceding vehicle enters an intersection
• Sensor cover blockage
In an road intersection, target preceding vehicle may be lost Any blockage to sensors, detection will degrade and ADAS
and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the features may not function as intended
control of vehicle.

7-24
• Long cargo loading vehicle • Inability to recognize pedestrians
In case of Stop & Go situation, the host vehicle may not

detect pedestrian. Driver should take control of vehicle.
• Excessive braking of the preceding vehicle
If the height of the preceding target vehicle is very high, the

sensor may not detect it and ADAS functionality may vary.
Driver should take control of vehicle.
ACC might not slow down your XUV700 sufficiently if target

starts to decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of
total brake force available in vehicle

If the preceding vehicle brakes beyond the ACC maximum front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for
deceleration limit, AEB may engage. However, driver shall be radar alignment
alert and take control vehicle.
• ACC does not slowdown for pot-holes and Speed
• Detection performance deterioration due to road breakers
side structures
W62D70
If the front radar is exposed to the surrounding road

structures (steel laminates, tunnels, construction sections,
etc.) that may affect the detection performance, the front
preceding vehicle may not be detected normally.
Any metal road structures / bridges, tunnels or toll plazas
may vary the system functionality, Driver shall be alert and
take control of the vehicle. W62D71
• False deceleration or no deceleration
If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, ACC may
produce frequent false deceleration or no deceleration for

7-26
• ACC may not slow down for road curves • ACC does not slow down for crossing or merging
vehicles at angles more than 30 degree
W62D81
W62D83
• ACC may not slow down for barriers/blockades
W62D84
W62D74

ACC might not slow down your XUV700 sufficiently if target starts to • ACC may not reliably follow bicycle
decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of total brakeforce available in
vehicle
• ACC does not slowdown for oncoming/reversing front

vehicles
W62D73
• ACC cannot react to stationary target
W62D79
• ACC does not slowdown for animals
W62D80
• If a very slow moving target cutting in between your

XUV700 and stationary target then there is a chance that
W62D72 ACC system does not pick-up the slow moving target
since ACC is not able to discriminate between slow
Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to special/modified vehicles such as moving target and stationary target.
Harvester, Tractor Trailor, Motorized Ice Cream Cart, construction vehicle,
animals etc.

7-28
• If a target in front takes a sharp turn and goes out of • ACC cannot follow a motorized two-wheeler if two-
Field of view, then your XUV700 can start to accelerate wheeler speed is less than around 10kmph.
fast.
• Do not use ACC with an offset to the target vehicle.
• ACC might not pick-up target at sharp curve
W62D87
W62D82
• Do not use ACC to follow motorbikes where there is no
• When XUV700 follows two wheeler and two wheeler space for XUV700 to navigate.
overtakes stationary target ahead, XUV700 may not slow
down due to stationary target detection limitation.
W62D89
W62D88

7.6 Collision Mitigation System • System does not function in all driving, traffic, weather
and road conditions.
Collision Mitigation System alerts the driver by providing
audio and visual warning when there is a possibility of • System does not detect all kind of vehicles ,bicyclists and
collision with rear end of the preceding vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians.
pedestrians detected ahead. if driver fails to take actions • System is designed to intervene as late as possible i.e. in
within a rational time, system will apply braking in certain emergency to help avoid unnecessary activation.
situations to mitigate the collision.
• Vehicles, Pedestrians or cyclists at an offset may not be
Disclaimer detected by FCW/AEB system.
• System can detect vehicles, cyclists and pedestrians but • Collision Mitigation System works on prediction of
not in all situations. System's capacity to assess certain possible collision with the objects in front of vehicle by
traffic situations is a supplemental aid to the driver and assuming the objects movements in certain directions.
does not function in all driving/traffic situations or Sometimes the objects movement direction may not
weather/road conditions. It can never replace the driver’s match to the prediction and the system may react early
attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for and provide warning or perform braking even though the
operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Refer system object may not be in the host vehicle path.
limitation section for more information about system
limitation. Read the manual carefully in detail before • Only rear end of the preceding vehicles are identified by
using the system. the system and warning or braking as needed will be
provided by the system. System may not react or
• Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper providing warning or braking for a crossing or oncoming
use of the system could result in serious injury or death. vehicle. System may not react to a stationary vehicle if
• The Collision Mitigation System is a supplemental aid to the vehicle is stationed in crossing or oncoming pose.
the driver . It is not a replacement for the driver. It is
driver's responsibility to monitor traffic conditions and
drive the vehicle safely. It cannot prevent accidents due
to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.

7-30
Collision Mitigation System comprises of the following AEB/FCW for Vehicles

functions:
To enable the system to detect rear end of preceding
Forward Collision Warning (FCW): When enabled, alerts vehicles ahead, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10
the driver in case of a possible collision detected by the kmph
system.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB): When enabled, can
provide a braking assist to mitigate the collision detected by Below 10kmph FCW/AEB will not work.
the system.
System detects types of vehicles that are either stationary or
moving in the same direction as your vehicle. In order to
detect a vehicle in darkness, its headlights and taillights
There are situations where the system may not detect a must be ON and clearly visible.
possible collision, driver has to take control of the vehicle
always.
System Operation Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for
system to detect a front preceding vehicle. Minimum
Prerequisite for activation overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect
a motorbike/two wheeler
AEB or FCW gets ready to be activated when turned ON
from Instrument Cluster settings and when the following
prerequisites are satisfied
- The braking system is ready.
- Vehicle speed is within system operating limit
- No other system failures or degradation of functions
related to Collision mitigation systems like Braking system,
Engine management system, Steering system etc.

Level 1 Warning Level 2 Warning
• If the driver does not

take action or the driver
• The driver is alerted to braking force is not
the risk of an imminent enough to mitigate
collision by first level of collision, system issues
visual and audible the second level of
warning. visual and audible
warning and applies
W62E62
partial braking.
Level 3 Warning
The icon displayed as visual alert may show the object in
the front as car even though the system may react for cars,
pedestrians,two wheelers and cyclists. • After second level
warning, If the driver
does not take action or
driver braking force is
not enough and risk of a
collision is imminent, the
system applies harder
braking along with third
level of visual and
audible warning.

7-32
System applying AEB braking can only mitigate a possible

When system has applied
collision and does not guarantee in avoiding the collision.
the brakes, a pop-up
Driver has to take necessary braking or steering actions to
message will be displayed
avoid the collision.
as "Automatic Emergency
Braking Completed".
W62E151
During harder braking, there are possibilities that the
occupants may experience a high amount of physical shock
due to the braking force which may cause uncomfortable
feeling or injury. Take necessary health checkups and
precautions when experienced. If AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will
remain at standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the
All the occupants should wear seat belts, as the system brakes are released.
braking may lead of high level of motional inertia, where
unbelted occupants are in a risk of getting injured.
Vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed If the vehicle driving speed is above 85 kmph, AEB third level
by the AEB system. warning won’t come and system won’t apply full braking. In
If driver applies hard brake during drive , dynamic braking this case first and second level warning alone will be
system activates to boost braking force. provided. Never wait for a warning or Collision Mitigation
System to take action.
When Forward Collision Warning is selected in Instrument

cluster settings, the driver is alerted to the risk of an The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of
imminent collision by visual and audible warnings. Braking speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated
will not be provided in this setting. at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision

mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to take

control of the vehicle always.
Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to detect a
AEB/FCW for Pedestrain pedestrian.
To enable the system to detect a pedestrian, the vehicle
driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.
System may not detect pedestrians in sitting, bent, crawling
For pedestrian detection clear information about the or lying poses.
person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower
parts of the body and a person's normal pattern of
movement are required. In order to detect a pedestrian,
there must be a contrast to the background. If there is little If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEB second
contrast, the person may not be detected. and third level warning won’t come for pedestrian. Hence
system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed
If major parts of the pedestrian's body are not visible to the is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level
camera, person may not be detected. warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or
for Collision Mitigation System to take action.
In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full
view of the person's entire body and the person must be at
least 80 cm tall.
The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of
speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated
at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision
Fast moving pedestrians and pedestrians not in their
mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to be in
walking pose are not detected by the system and hence
control of the vehicle always.
there will not be any warning or braking provided by the
system.

7-34
AEB/FCW for Cyclists

To enable the system to detect a cyclist, the vehicle driving The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of
speed must be at least 10 kmph. speed drop. E.g. if the Collision mitigation system is initiated
at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the collision
For cyclist detection, clear information about the cycle itself mitigation system will be deactivated. Driver has to be in
and the rider's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and control of the vehicle always.
lower parts of the body and a cyclist's normal pattern of
movement is required AEB for Vehicles - Junction Turning
If major parts of the cyclist's body are not visible to the To enable the system to detect an approaching vehicle in
camera, the system cannot detect the cyclist. junction turning scenarios the vehicle driving speed must be
between 10-30 kmph and oncoming vehicle should be
The cyclist should be of height greater than 3 feet and clearly visible and moving in the speed range of 30 kmph to
should be driving an adult cycle. 70 kmph.
To detect an approaching vehicle in situations where there
is a risk of a collision, that approaching vehicle must be
Fast moving cyclists are not detected by the system. Hence within detection range and your vehicle must be in left lane
the system may not react by providing warning or braking making a right turn with the right turn indicator ON.
for the fast moving cyclists.
In junction turning scenarios, system applies braking and

If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEB second there is no warning.
and third level warning won’t come for cyclist. Hence system
won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above
65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone
will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the target
Mitigation System to take action. ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the
system may help mitigate the consequences of a collision

and cannot completely avoid the collision. The driver is • Select “Forward Collision Warning” and use the OK
responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed. button to turn the FCW system on
Never wait for a warning or collision mitigation system to
take action. • Select “Off” and use the OK button to turn the AEB/
FCW system off
The automatic braking will cease under the following

conditions:
• When steering is applied to avoid a collision
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed
• When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.
• When driver presses and releases brake pedal.
How to turn ON/OFF AEB/FCW System
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB/FCW system ON When the AEB system is turned off, the AEBS
or OFF: AEBS
OFF telltale will be ON in instrument cluster
OFF
1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the
instrument cluster display. Use the button to select
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Auto Emergency Braking” and press the OK
button.
• Select “Auto Emergency Braking” and use the OK
button to turn the AEB system on

7-36
Warning Level settings

There is a chance for providing FCW warnings for some
obstacles like Barricades and Cows since the RADAR may
not be able to differentiate such big obstacles with respect
The driver can select the to vehicles.
level 1 warning activation
time in the instrument
cluster settings for driver
assistance. • No automatic system can be guaranteed to function
100% correctly in all situations.
• Never test Collision Mitigation System by driving toward
The options for the level 1 Warning include the following: a person or object. This could result in serious injury or
death.
Late - When this condition is selected, warning is provided
at shorter time to collision. • To help make Collision Mitigation System as effective as
possible, it is recommended to always use the setting
Normal - When this condition is selected, warning is "Early"
provided at higher time to collision than "Late" setting.
Collision Mitigation System Troubleshooting
Early - When this condition is selected, warning is provided
at higher time to collision than "Normal" setting. if you are If any of below mentioned messages is displayed in the
experiencing frequent warning, you can change setting to instrument cluster means that the system is not functioning
"Normal" or "Late" properly and should be turned off.
However, message will not be displayed in all situations in
which the camera/radar sensor is obstructed. For this
There is a minimum time interval of 60 seconds required for reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the
system to provide successive AEB. windshield in front of the camera and area on the bumper
in front of radar sensor is always kept clean.

1. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions • If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above
due to camera sensor, AEB warning lamp will action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is
be ON in yellow color and a pop up message recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer for this
will appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency service.
Braking Function Limited due to Camera Blockage" .
2. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions
due to radar sensor, AEB warning lamp will be
ON in yellow color and a pop up message will
appear in instrument cluster that "Automatic Emergency
The following table lists Braking Disabled due to Radar Detection Limitation".
possible causes for this
message being displayed
and suitable actions:
The following table lists

possible causes for this
Cause Action message being displayed
and suitable actions:
The area of the windshield in Clean the windshield or
front of the camera sensor is remove the ice/snow
dirty or covered by ice or
snow
Thick fog or heavy rain /snow No action. The driver
blocks reduce the camera should be extra alert in
sensor’s range of visibility condition of this type.
There is dirt between the Have the area of the
inside of the windshield and windshield cleaned by
the camera sensor. Mahindra Authorised
service.

7-38
3. If system malfunctions, AEB warning lamp

Cause Action will be continuously ON in yellow color.
The bumper in front of the Clean/clear the bumper in
radar is dirty or covered front of the radar. A pop up message will
with snow/ice appear in instrument
cluster that "Automatic
Heavy rain or snow is No action possible. Heavy Emergency Braking
interfering with the radar precipitation may affect the Disabled: Service required".
signals. function of the radar. Contact an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer
Swirling water or snow No action possible. A very immediately.
from the surface of the wet or snow-covered road
road may interface with the surface may affect the
radar signals. function of the radar. 7.6.1 Collision Mitigation System Limitations
The windshield in front of Wait a short time. It may Collision Mitigation System is subject to certain system
the radar is clean but the take several minutes for the limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available
message remains in the radar to detect that it is no in the following situations:
display. longer obstructed.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above
action and engine restart, have the system checked. It is • Collision mitigation system cannot detect all vehicles,
recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer for this cyclists or pedestrians under all conditions.
service.
• System can not detect the following objects:
– Small pedestrians (including small children)
– Sitting or bent pedestrians will not be detected.

– Pedestrians other than their walking or standing – Two wheeler carrying baggage extended beyond
poses may not be detected. regular shape of two wheeler.
– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport – Obscured vehicles.
such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards
• If the pedestrians has limited contrast to their immediate
– Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full background, warning or braking may be delayed or not
upright standing or walking position come at all.
– Pedestrian who are partially obscured, wearing • System may not react for fast moving pedestrians.
clothing that prevents a clear view of the person's
body contours. • System cannot detect all cyclists in all situations, such as:
– Oncoming vehicles – a partially obscured cyclist.

– Crossing vehicles – a cyclist whose clothing is in such a way that prevents
clear view of the person's body contours
– Merging Vehicles
– a cyclist transporting a large object
– Cutting in Vehicles
• System may not function in junction turning scenario
– Specialized vehicles under below conditions:
– Obstacles on the roadside – If the oncoming vehicle is detected at a late stage
– Vehicles that are irregular in shapes like hand carts, – If the oncoming vehicle is partially obscured by
cycle carts, motorized carts, animal carts another vehicle
– Vehicles that look irregular when loaded. – If the oncoming vehicle changes lane at a late stage
– Vehicles that have long trailers above. • System may not function if speed difference between the
two vehicles is too small or too high
– Two wheeler or bicycles without a rider.

7-40
• System may not function properly or detect a target Collision Mitigation System limitation Scenarios
ahead in the following conditions:
Collision Mitigation System may not function in below
– Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust scenarios
storms, sandstorms etc.)
• False decelerations or no decelerations
– Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp
curves. If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, Collision
mitigation system may produce frequent false warning or
– Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven deceleration or no warning/ no deceleration for front
dirt road preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for
radar alignment.
– If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar
sensor area • When any vehicle moves greater than +/- 20 deg. to
host vehicle direction
– Interference by other radar sources.
– The camera area of windshield is fogged up or
covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.
– Strong light (such as, sunlight or high beams from
oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera
– A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example,
when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded
area or lightning flashes.)
• In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to
RADAR, disable AEB and get the vehicle serviced as early If any vehicle moves at heading angle greater than +/- 20
as possible. deg. to the host vehicle system may not consider it. Driver
must be alert and take control.

• When it is difficult to obtain view by the camera At night, if the preceding vehicle's tail lamps are not in
symmetry or mounting positions are unusual, system may
not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take
control of the vehicle.
• Pedestrian suddenly jumping in to the host vehicle
lane too closer to host vehicle
Due to poor visibility by camera like sunlight or any other

source of light on camera. System may not function as
intended Driver must be alert and take control of the vehicle
• When the tail light of the front preceding vehicle is
asymmetrical at night System may not consider if a pedestrian suddenly jumps in
to the lane / area very closer to host vehicle. Driver shall be
alert and take control of vehicle

7-42
• If a part of the body of the pedestrian is a covered or If the illumination is low / poor visibility, system may not
standing pedestrian function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control
of vehicle.
• Fast moving pedestrians
In the case of pedestrians whose body part is obscured by

umbrellas, bags, special clothes, etc., detection may not be
accurate & system may not function as intended. Driver
shall be alert and take control of vehicle System may not function as intended with fast moving
pedestrians due to sensing limitations.
• Difficult to distinguish pedestrians due to low
illumination. • Pedestrians with lower height

System may not function as intended with pedestrians with • Intersection situation
lower height
• Risk of collision in proximity cut-in
The control target of the radar is selected as the control

target only for the rear surface of the vehicle driving in the
AEB vehicle driving direction. Therefore, there is a risk of
There is a close-sensing blind spot, and there is a risk of collision for vehicles moving at right angles to the direction
collision at close cut-in of adjacent lane vehicles. of intersection or for vehicles turning right.

7-44
• The condition is that target is not detected at the When a specific type of load is loaded or a special vehicle, it
road inclination change point can collide if it is not selected as the control target due to
the sensor detection limit
• When target can not be detected due to sensor
contamination
Due to the vertical angle limit of the radar, it is impossible to

detect the front target (vehicle, pedestrian) in uphill and
downhill hill.
• The situation where the load is protruding from the
rear of the vehicle In case of Sensor (Radar, Camera) contamination, blockage
can occur and collision of the front preceding vehicle and
pedestrians is possible

• When driving on a large curve road If the driver uses the AEB in the unconfined (snow, rain, fog,
etc.), the sensor limit may cause a collision between the
vehicle and pedestrians ahead.
• Detection problems due to complicated structures
around roads
When driving on a large curve road, due to the sensor limit,

the front preceding vehicle and the pedestrian can collide.
• When it is impossible to obtain the driver's field of
If a construction section, railroad track, or other metallic
vision
object is on the road (eg, tollgate, subway construction site,
tunnel, lane-proximity guard rail, etc.) AEB/FCW will not
work.

7-46
• Collision Mitigation System does not react for pot-holes • Collision Mitigation System does not function for
barricades/cone/barrels
W62D70
W62D74
• Collision Mitigation System does not function for Speed
Breakers • Collision Mitigation System does not function for
oncoming vehicles
W62D71
W62D79

• Collision Mitigation System does not function for animals How to Turn ON/OFF HBA System
HBA Activation
Select High Beam Assist function from Driver assistance
menu
CRUISE
VOL +
W62D72 +
SET
-
RESUME
+
VOL +
RESUME
START
7.7 High Beam Assist

ENGINE
STOP
3
2
1
High beam assist function is intended to reduce the glare

produced by the High Beam lamp which in turn aids the
drivers of oncoming vehicles to maneuver safely .
REAR
High beam assist feature automatically turns high beam ON

A/C ECON
A/C
or OFF depending on the vehicle speed, intensity of the light

source of preceding and oncoming vehicles and the
NO
surrounding light conditions
OFF
USB
High beam assist is only intended to assist the driver. The

driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights
through manual ON/OFF depending on visibility
requirements.

7-48
Turn Steering Column Head lamp Switch to 'AUTO' position HBA feature will turn ON High Beam when:
• HBA function is activated as per above conditions.
• No light source is detected by the camera from
Oncoming/Preceding vehicle or from other light sources
(depends on intensity) for few seconds.
HBA will activate when following conditions are met:

If high beam was turned OFF due to street lights, then high
• High beam Assist is selected through driver assistance beam will be turned ON once streetlight area is completely
menu crossed
• Auto light switch is turned ON in the Combination Switch
• Night condition is detected and Low beam is already If system malfunctions , a pop up message will appear in
turned ON through the Light Sensor Instrument Cluster as "High Beam Assist Unavailable". It is
• High beam switch is turned ON recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this case.
• Vehicle speed is above 20 kmph
When HBA feature is activated, HBA lamp will be

ON.
AUTO
Once HBA is activated, HBA feature will turn OFF High Beam
when any of the light sources from oncoming / Preceding
vehicle or streetlights is detected in front of vehicle.

7.7.1 HBA System Limitations • When the light from oncoming or preceding vehicle is
very small or weak or located in low or too high position.
HBA is subject to certain system limitations and may keep
High beam OFF for certain limitations and ON for few other • When windshield is dirty or if any object blocks the
limitation conditions. Camera sensor.
• When the light from the on-coming or front preceding • When vehicle is in Construction area due to temporarily
vehicle is not detected because of lamp damage, hidden installed reflectors.
from sight, etc. • When vehicle is near traffic lights, signboards of
• When headlights or taillights are with non-standard color buildings, lightning rods of construction sections, center
or Illuminance level or shape. line separation rods (reflection type), traffic signs
(including variable speed LEDs), vehicle lights reflected on
• When the lamp of the on-coming or front preceding building glass or road reflectors.
vehicle is covered with dust, mud, snow or water.
• When visibility is poor due to fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When head lamp aiming is not properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow-curved road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When vehicle is near bright street tower lamps, reflecting
sign or mirror, flashing sign lamps.
• When the vehicle is tilted may be due to a flat tyre or
being towed.
• When the light from bicycle is weak or located in long
distance.

7-50
7.8 Traffic Sign Recognition Traffic sign display in Instrument Cluster
Traffic Sign Recognition feature assists the driver by Speed: limit Signs
displaying Speed limits signs in the instrument cluster
display.
When the system

TSR system is limited to the detection capabilities of Camera recognises a speed limit
sensor . The driver is always responsible for operating the sign, it displays on
vehicle as per the road regulations. Instrument Cluster
Traffic sign recognition can detect standard speed limit

signs that are within the camera's visual field.
How to Turn ON/OFF TSR System
After a pre-defined time,
Select Traffic Sign Recognition Function from Driver road sign display is Grayed
Assistance menu in the cluster out to indicate to driver that
the sign is of past value.
CRUISE
+
SET
-
RESUME
If End of Speed Limit sign is detected, the icon

+
VOL +
RESUME
3
2
1
in the cluster gets updated as shown in the
image..

If no new Speed Limit Sign detected for some • The traffic sign is improperly positioned (i.e being turned
time, the icon changes to 'No Recognition’ as over, blocked by an object, or damaged).
shown in the image.
• Another vehicle blocks the traffic sign.
Over Take Not Allowed Sign
• The LED light of the traffic sign is broken.
When the system recognizes an overtaking not
• The visibility is poor due to heavy rain, snow, fog or poor
allowed sign, it is displayed on Instrument
light around the sign.
Cluster
• The traffic sign do not conform to the standards.
• The traffic sign cannot be distinguished due to shadow
caused by overpass or trees.
If system malfunctions, a
pop up message will • There is bright light around the traffic sign.
appear in Instrument • The vehicle speed is too low or too high.
Cluster that "Traffic Sign
Recog. Unavailable". It is • There is dirt, ice or frost on the front windshield, where
recommended that you the camera is installed.
visit a Mahindra dealer in
this case. • The camera lens is blocked by an object, such as sticker,
paper, or fallen leaf.
• Host vehicle driven right after preceding vehicle.
7.8.1 Traffic Sign Recognition System Limitations
• The bus or truck, on which the speed sticker is attached,
The Traffic Sign Recognition is subject to certain system passes by your vehicle.
limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available
in the following situations:
• The traffic sign is located on a sharp curve.

7-52
7.9 Lane Keep Assist System How to Turn ON /OFF Lane Keep Assist System
The Lane Keep Assist (LKA) system provides corrective Go to Driver Assistance menu under Settings
steering to prevent the vehicle from departing the lane if the
Select Warning + Assist to enable both Lane Keep Assist as
system judges that the departure is unintentional from
well as Lane Departure Warning
driver's side.
Select Warning Only to enable Lane Departure Warning
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system provides visual, alone.
audio and haptic alerts to the driver once the system
detects that the vehicle is crossing the lane boundary
unintentionally which is determined based on whether the
turn signal towards the direction of departure is turned ON
or not.
The driver can choose to have either Warning Only or both
Warning + Assist feature.
It is important to know that the Lane keep Assist system
shall work only if the lane markings on the road are clearly
visible.
The Lane Keep Assist function is meant to provide assist to

the driver and cannot take full control of the steering
system.
It is driver’s responsibility to stay alert and be in control of
the vehicle throughout the drive.

System Operation When vehicle approaches either the left or the

right lane boundary, the LDW indicator on the
When the system can detect the lanes, the lane marking in instrument panel will blink and lane marking
instrument cluster will be in white. color of respective side will change to orange. Haptic and
audio alert will also be provided to warn the driver about
lane departure.
When system cannot detect The warning will be stopped either when vehicle changes
lanes or if system is the lane completely or if the vehicle returns back to original
unavailable due to speed lane.
being less than 60 kmph,
the marker lines will be
grayed out.
Lane Departure Warning will not be provided or stopped if
already being provided, if in case either turn signal or
hazard switch is turned ON
LDW Operation in "Warning Only" mode
Lane departure warning shall be resumed in approximately
If both side lanes are not detected or the speed 4 seconds after turning OFF the turn signal.
or road conditions are not satisfied, LDW Lane Departure Warning may be provided for road edges or
feature will be in STANDBY mode and LDW road marks which looks like lane boundaries.
indicator light will illuminate in white.
The maximum warning time is limited to 2.2 sec. To provide
If any of the lane markers are detected and re-warning, vehicle should have been out of warning region
vehicle speed is above 60kmph and all the atleast once. i.e. Vehicle has to be in or near to center of the
other road parameter values are satisfied, LDW feature is lane.
ready for operation and LDW indicator light will illuminate in
green.

7-54
LKA Operation in "Warning + Assist" mode

If both side lanes are not detected or the speed Lane Keep Assist will not be provided or stopped if already
/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not being provided, if in case either turn indicator signal or
satisfied, LKA feature will be in STANDBY mode hazard switch is turned ON.
and LKA indicator light will illuminate in white. Lane Keep Assist shall be resumed again only once vehicle
If both lane markers are detected, vehicle has returned back to lane and 4 seconds is completed after
speed is above 60 kmph and all the road and turning OFF the turn indicator signal.
vehicle related activation conditions are
satisfied, LKA system is ready to provide assist
and LKA indicator light will illuminate in green. LKA may be provided for road markings if those are looking
like lane boundaries. LKA may be provided for road edges/
When the system detects an unintentional
vertical road edges (cones/curbs/medians/guard rails) if the
departure of the vehicle from its lane, a slight
system detects them accurately, but not always guaranteed.
counter steering torque is provided to prevent
the departure and the driver is notified by
blinking the LKA indicator on the instrument panel in green
color. Also visual and audible alerts are provided if vehicle is LKA will not be provided if the vehicle approaches the lane
about to cross the lane boundary. boundary with a higher heading angle.
The warning and assist will be stopped either when vehicle
changes the lane completely or if the vehicle is returned
back to original lane LKA won’t be provided in the types of roads if road edge/
vertical road edge is present on one side and neither road
When LKA system provides steering assist, edge/vertical road edge nor lane marking is present on the
START
VOL +
SET+
SET-
RESUME
ENTER
steering wheel indicator will illuminate in other side.

green.

The audible alert can be disabled through settings in the If the driver is constantly holding the steering wheel very
cluster if the driver wishes to do so. lightly while the LKA intervention is being provided, system
may assume that the driver is not attentive enough and will
provide visual alert to the driver as in image below:
LKA and LDW shall be activated above 60 kmph and gets
deactivated below 55 kmph. If the driver continues to hold
the steering wheel lightly for
a next intervention occurring
within 3 minutes, then in
If the vehicle dynamics conditions are not safe for the
addition to the visual alert,
operation of LKA, then LKA may not be provided at all or
audio alert will also be
may get cancelled if it is already being provided.
provided until the system
Similarly when Left turn /Right turn/Hazard is activated LKA makes sure that driver is in
will not be provided or will be cancelled if already being full control.
provided.
The Lane Keep Assist torque will be adjusted according to
the driver applied torque to reduce discomfort and to
provide precedence to driver control. If lane marking is suddenly not available or if lane widens
suddenly , then for a short duration virtual lanes may get
If the driver intentionally tries to cross the lane boundary by
created and assist/warning may be provided once the
applying more torque, then assist will be cancelled. In such
vehicle approaches/crosses the virtual lane boundary .
conditions warning alone will be provided once the vehicle
crosses the lane boundary.
The preference for steering control and alerts will be given

to Smart Pilot Assist over Lane Keep Assist if Smart Pilot

7-56
Assist is equipped and enabled by driver. Please go through

Smart Pilot chapter for more details.
LKA/LDW will not be provided for barricades and barrels on
the side of road.
• Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to

hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to
have control of the vehicle.
If system
• In some rare situations when system is unable to do malfunctions in
proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio Warning Only
alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a mode, LDW
indicator light will illuminate in
precautionary measure. Amber color and a pop up
message will appear in
• System will provide only a mild steering torque within the Instrument Cluster that "Lane
operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during Departure Warning
sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it Unavailable".
determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull
back to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the It is recommended that you visit a Mahindra dealer in this
vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane. case.

If system
malfunctions in
Warning + Assist
mode , LKA
indicator light will illuminate in
Amber color and a pop up
message will appear in
Instrument Cluster that "Lane
Keep Assist Unavailable". It is
recommended that you visit a
Mahindra dealer in this case.
There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at
the end of lane marking and assist provided by LKA system
may not be sufficient enough to pull back the vehicle before
LKA may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control of
may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid
lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane deviations or crash.
lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision.
Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and
shall provide additional torque to override LKA in such 7.9.1 Lane Keep Assist System Limitations
situations.
LKA and LDW System is intended to assist the driver and
cannot function as intended in all kinds of driving, weather,
traffic and road conditions as mentioned below.
• Road under construction
• Reduced visibility due to bad weather on account of rain,
fog, snow etc

7-58
• Roads with indistinct/faded lane markings 7.10 Smart Pilot Assist System
• Road sections with sharp curves Smart Pilot Assist system is intended to help the driver to
• Narrow roads keep the vehicle in center of a traffic lane's side marker lines
by providing steering assist as well as maintaining a set time
• High speed driving especially in sharp curves interval.
• Road sections where there are turn lanes or when the
original lane merges or separates
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper
• Passing through tunnels when brightness changes use of system could result in serious injury or death.
suddenly.
• Smart Pilot Assist System is not a self-driving system.
• Horizontal or vertical slope Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this
• Preceding vehicle obstructing lane visibility manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.
• Improper headlight aiming/headlight covered with dirt • Smart Pilot Assist system is not a replacement for proper
driving procedures and is not designed to correct
• Any other environmental conditions affecting camera careless, inattentive of driver.
vision
• Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the
• Poor visibility due to sun glare or blockage in lens speed over them.
In such situations, it may be advisable to turn the function • Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can
OFF or driver shall take complete control of vehicle. be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always
responsible for staying in a lane and for assessing traffic
situations.
• Smart Pilot Assist must only be used where there are
clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides
of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is

an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles If speed/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are
that are not detected by the system. not satisfied, Smart Pilot Assist will be in
STANDBY mode and Smart Pilot Assist
How to activate Smart Pilot Assist
indicator light will illuminate in white.
Select "Smart Pilot Assist" from "Driver Assistance" option in
If both lane markers are detected and all the
Instrument Cluster screen -> under Instrument Cluster
road and vehicle related activation conditions
Settings.
are satisfied, system performs lane centering
and indicator light will illuminate in green.
When system performs lane centering, steering
START
VOL +
SET+
SET-
RESUME
ENTER
wheel indicator will illuminate in green.

If system was assisting and transiting to
Standby due to any reasons, then Smart Pilot Assist will stop
providing assist and indicator light will blink in white for few
seconds
If a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead during lane
centering, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front as per the set time
gap.
Smart pilot assist will be active only if ACC is active
When lane markings are not available, system will follow set
System Operation speed and set time gap as set by the driver for ACC.
Smart Pilot Assist system is combination of Adaptive Cruise
Control and Lane Centering.

7-60
Assist triggers hands off warning and it is continued until

the driver holds back the steering wheel.
Always use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic
conditions. A short time interval gives the driver limited
reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic.
System will be deactivated/off when ACC system is turned
off or Smart Pilot Assist is deselected from the settings or First stage warning will be
when 3rd stage hands-off warning displays. provided immediately once
When ACC is disengaged by pressing brake pedal, Smart hands off is detected
Pilot Assist also gets into standby.
If lane centering was active and road is straight, Smart Pilot
Assist may be provided for some more time even though
lane markings are not available.
Second stage warning with
Smart Pilot Assist may follow preceding vehicle if lanes are audio alert will be provided
not detected properly and following conditions are satisfied. if driver is not holding the
steering wheel even after
• Lane centering was active before lane detection got the first stage warning.
dropped.
• Preceding vehicle speed is less than around 75 kmph
• Preceding vehicle is close enough for system to follow. Third stage warning with
Smart Pilot Assist may stop to follow preceding vehicle if audio alert will be provided
above conditions are not satisfied or if the preceding when driver does not hold
vehicle has changed the path. the steering wheel even
after second stage warning .
Hands-off Detection & Warning : When driver does not Here after Smart Pilot Assist
hold the steering wheel with adequate torque, Smart Pilot and ACC will go to Standby

to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle

and bring vehicle back to lane.
• Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to
hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to
have control of the vehicle.
• In some rare situations when system is unable to do
proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio
alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a
precautionary measure.
The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and

maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle
ahead and must intervene if necessary, even if Smart Pilot
Assist is being used. Smart Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's speed using the
accelerator pedal and the brakes. Please be aware that
there may be a faint sound from the brakes when the
system is using them.
Due to the limitations of the camera and radar sensor, the
Smart Pilot Assist may not detect obstacles at the side of the
system may apply the brakes in your vehicle suddenly or not
vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the
at all.
center of lane even though another vehicle may be
occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible
collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering
System will provide only a mild steering torque within the wheel and shall provide additional torque to override Smart
operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during Pilot Assist in such situations.
sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it
determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back

7-62
• When interface systems are not available.

• When driver steers manually.
• When vehicle dynamics/road conditions are not suitable
for Smart Pilot Assist Operation.
When Smart Pilot Assist cancels, the Smart Pilot Assist
indicator changes to White color to indicate that system is
no longer active.
There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at

the end of lane marking and assist provided by Smart Pilot
Assist system may not be sufficient enough to pull back the
vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take When there is
any failure in the
control of steering always and provide necessary steering to system , below
avoid lane deviations or crash. pop-up message
appears on Instrument Cluster
Smart Pilot Assist Automatic Cancellation screen and Smart Pilot Assist
indicator illuminate in Amber
Smart Pilot Assist cancels and goes to standby when: color. Visit nearest Mahindra
service center for assistance.
• ACC system cancels.
• The maximum speed that Smart Pilot Assist supports is
exceeded.
• When driver shifts out of Drive gear.
• An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs.
• When turn indicator or hazard is activated.

7.10.1 Smart Pilot Assist System Limitations • When driving on roads where the lane width is too
narrow.
Smart Pilot Assist is subject to certain system limitations and
may be unavailable or only partially available in the • On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers;
following situations: lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; non-
standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with
Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below water, dirt, snow, etc.
system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
• On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still
Note: All the limitations of ACC also apply for Smart detectable.
Pilot Assist.
• On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
• Smart Pilot Assist is unable to accurately determine lane • When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with
markings due to poor visibility (heavy rain, snow, fog,
the lane marker.
etc.), or an obstructed, covered, or damaged camera or
sensor. • When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens
or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
• When driving on hills.
• The road has sharp curves or is excessively rough.
• Bright light (such as direct sunlight) is interfering with the Smart Pilot Assist system can activate Lane centering from
camera's view. deactivated state only if lanes are available on both sides.
Smart Pilot Assist cannot activate Lane centering from
• The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or deactivated state if lanes are not available on both sides or
devices that generate ultrasonic waves. if lane is available only on one side.
• When driving on winding or uneven roads.
• When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
• When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.

7-64
W62D78
W62D75 – When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front,

Smart Pilot Assist cannot do lane centering
W62D76
W62D77

CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS I
8 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS I 8.1.1 Driver Door Power Window Switch
8.1 Control Switches Power windows can be operated when the ignition is in
“ON” position.
The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle
A C E G through the Driver door window switch on the driver door
The driver door switch bank armrest/handle.
is located on the driver
door armrest/handle and
controls and the various
B D F H
functions:
A ORVM Folding/Unfolding Switch
B ORVM Adjustment Switch

Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their
C Driver Door Window Switch respective window glasses individually by using the separate
switches provided on each of the door trim pads/armrests.
D Co–driver Door Window Switch
To lower/raise the window glass, press/lift the respective
E Rear RH Window Switch power window switch accordingly
F Rear LH Window Switch
G Door Lock/Unlock Switch Do not operate the power windows frequently when the
engine is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery.
H Window Lock Switch

If you operate the switches often during a short period of 8.1.3 Door Lock/Unlock Switch
time, the system might become inoperable for a certain
duration to prevent damage due to overheating. The system
will return to normal functioning shortly. In such scenario, The Door lock/unlock
customer should wait for 1-2 minute & should not operate switch is located on the
the switch during this period. After 2 minute operate the driver door trim. Driver can
switch. simultaneously lock/unlock
It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time. all the doors by pressing
this switch as shown in the
To avoid any personal injuries always check and ensure that image.
there are no obstructions like head, hand, etc. while
operating the 'power windows'.
8.1.2 Power Window Lock Switch 8.1.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch
The main power window quadruple switch in the driver This is applicable for driver door only (if equipped)
door trim has a power window lock switch to enable or Smart power window is one of the significant safety features
disable operation of rear passenger window switches. with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses
the direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the
auto up mode.
To disable the rear
passenger power windows,
press the window lock
switch down.
To revert to normal
operation, press the
window lock switch again.

8-2
button more than 1 sec to open the power window. (If

This feature consists of equipped)
three functions:
• Auto UP
Thermal Protection is active for all modes of operation, and once
• Auto DOWN activated up movements are not allowed for 30s, and down
movements are allowed if the window is not stalled in either of the
• Anti-Pinch during Auto stall positions (top stall/bottom stall).
UP Thermal Protection is tuned for 16 Cycles before 1st activation and
inhibition duration is 30 Seconds.
Auto UP: Pull the power window switch up for a moment After 30s thermal protection is de-activated, and the number of cycles
available after inhibition is dependent on the idle duration. Right after
and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. thermal protection inhibition duration of 30 seconds 2 cycles are available.
You do not need to hold the switch till the glass closes.
Auto DOWN: Press the power window switch down for a
moment and release. The glass moves all the way down Do not remove vehicle battery while power window is in
automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the motion
glass comes down.
Extended Power Window
Anti-Pinch during Auto UP (If equipped): During auto UP if
any obstacle is detected with the force value less than 100 All doors power windows can be rolled UP/DOWN within 3
N, The controller senses the load and reverses the direction minutes after ignition off.
of the glass by 180 mm from the point of pinch detection.
Anti-pinch is available in 0-250 mm from the top.
Driver door power window can be opened or closed
through Remote also. Press PKE/RKE lock button more than
1 seconds to close the power window. Press RKE unlock

8.2 Mirrors 8.2.2 Electric Adjustable ORVM (If equipped)
8.2.1 Manual ORVM (if equipped)
Exterior Rear view mirror

on both left and right sides
provides the maximum side
rear view information to W62G160
the driver.
The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on
the driver door trim/handle. The joystick on the switch can
be used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the
Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or respective mirror.
unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and
parking slots. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in
its support, while folding or unfolding. 8.2.3 ORVM Folding/Unfolding
Mirror Fold Function
Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they To fold the ORVM assembly, press towards the right side of
appear. Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that the switch with ignition ON condition.
you see in the mirrors.
ORVM folds automatically when:
• The doors locked with the remote from outside the
vehicle

8-4
ORVM unfolds automatically when:

For Auto fold function, the switch should be in neutral • Mirror is already in folded condition and ORVM switch is
position. neutral condition and IGN is turned ON
8.3 Interior Rear-view Mirror (IRVM)
The interior rear view

mirror provides the rear
view information to the
driver through the rear
windshield. It also assists
Mirror Unfold Function during reversing.
You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or

pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to
other vehicles behind you
When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at
night, adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body
To unfold the ORVM assembly, press towards the left side of and pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can
the switch with ignition ON condition. secure a clear rear view.

8.4 Storage Compartments 5 Seats Luggage Lid and Utility Bin:

8.4.1 Luggage Compartment (if equipped) Luggage Lid Utility Bin
For 7-seat configuration: Second row and third row can be

folded for keeping bigger/large objects.
REAR
A/C ECON
A/C
NO OFF
Fold down the third-row

seats. (refer to “Folding the
third-row seat” section) W62E137
W62E136
Fold down the second-row
seats. (refer to “Folding the Luggage Lid/Utility Bin: In 5-Seater variants luggage space
second-row seat” section) will be more comparing to 7 seater. Bigger items can be
stored in the luggage lid/Utility bin area.
Now the bigger object can be placed with seat folded Luggage Net (if equipped)
condition. NO OFF
A/C ECON
REAR
A/C
To prevent items from

shifting towards the rear
When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the
luggage is placed firmly enough to avoid being shaken while
quarter trim, you can use
driving. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver the 4 hooks located in the
or passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct rear quarter trim to attach
the field of the rearview the luggage net.
Do not sit on the folded seat because the seat belt and other safety
devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious
injury in case of an accident

8-6
Make sure the luggage net is securely attached to the hooks

in the rear quarter trim.
Do not access the sunglass holder while you are driving. It
may distract your concentration and could lead to an
accident.
DO NOT overstretch the luggage net. ALWAYS keep your face
and body out of the luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT use
the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or 8.4.3 Glove Box/Tab Holder
damage.
Glove Box : The glove box is located on the Left side of
Instrument panel. To open the lid, gently press the unlock
8.4.2 Sun Glass Holder push button. To close the glove box, raise the lid all the way
up and gently press to lock the lid.
Roof mounted sunglass holder is an integral part of the
front interior lamp.
SET+
VOL +
ENTER
SET-
RESUME
START
ENGINE
STOP
3
2
1
SOS
SOS
REAR
A/C ECON
A/C
NO OFF
USB
It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along

with the Owner’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference
Press the lid to release the latch and lower the holder. It is when needed.
strategically positioned to be accessed easily by both the
driver and front passenger.

8.4.4 Console Storage

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a
sudden stop, glove box Lid should be kept closed when the
vehicle is in motion.
You can use the console

Glove Box Lamp (if storage by lifting the
equipped): This lamp is console lid with the knob.
located inside the Glove
box below the TAB Holder.
It will get switched ON
Glove Box Lamp
when Glove box is opened
and switch OFF when it is
closed.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises
since they can move around in the compartment while
driving.
Tab Holder: Tab holder is
available in Glove box area. Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette
You can place the Tab lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather,
inside the Tab holder. they may explode and cause a fire.

8-8
Only sealed cans/bottles to be stored in the cooler. Any

spilled beverage can damage the interior trim and electrical
components/cooler.
8.4.5 Front Cup Holder/Rear Cup Holder and

Armrest (if equipped)
Front Cup Holder:

By pressing up the console knob, you can use the
compartment in the console storage. The console storage
can be used as an armrest for both the driver and the
passenger.
Cooler (Air vents)
In select variants, a cooler

(air vents) is provided in the
Console Storage. You can
cool cans, small bottles, etc.
by opening the air vents. The cup holder located in the floor console between the
Turn the cooler clockwise to front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are
open the air vents, or anti- closed or have a lid.
clockwise to close the air
vents.

Second row cup holder and armrest (if equipped)

Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.
Use caution when using the cup holders. A spilled beverage

that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled
liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical
components. Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver
and cause a loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an
accident.
The Second Row 60P seat features an armrest with cup holder.
• To open the armrest, simply pull on the tab given at the 8.4.6 Bottle and Umbrella Holder
top of the armrest (as shown).
• When armrest is not required, push back the armrest Bottle and Umbrella
into the 60P backrest. holders are located on both
Third row cup holder and armrest (if equipped) Bottle Holder the front door lower trims.
You can use them to store
Umbrella Holder umbrella, maps, papers,
small books, bottles, etc.
The Cup holders are

located on both the left and
right-side trims.
Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle
holders.

8-10
8.4.7 Seat Back/Magazine Pocket

Coat Hook
Hanging excess/bulky
weight/items may cause
The seat back pockets are breakage of the hook and
located on the back of the inconvenience to the
front seats for holding passengers. Hang light
Grip Handle
lightweight papers/books/ weight articles only..
magazines, etc.
8.5 Microphone(as applicable)
The microphone is located on the roof above driver side as shown
in the image.
To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat
back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back
pockets.
8.4.8 Grip Handle and Coat Hook SOS
Grip Handle: Foldable grip handles are provided above the front
(passenger only) and second and Third row outboard seats.
Coat Hook: The second-row outboard passenger seats grip The microphone is used when talking on the phone. The person
handles features a coat hook for hanging your coat, shirts, etc. you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone
to the system.

8.6 Sun Visor 8.6.1 Vanity Mirror and Lamp (if equipped)
Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the Vanity mirror is in the Sun visor.
front or side windows. It is available on both driver and
co– driver side
Swing the sun visor down
To shield the sunlight and slide the cover to open
through the windshield, and close the vanity mirror.
pull it downward.
RESUME
To shield the sunlight

Light above the sun visor
through the side window,
will be ON once you slide
pull it downward, unsnap it
and open the vanity mirror.
from the bracket and swing
it to the side.
Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror on the sun visor while Do not adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is in motion.
driving may cause an accident by taking your attention away or
blocking your view
Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in moving

8-12
8.7 Center Fascia Switch
Center fascia switches are located at the center of the DRIVE

Instrument Panel. ON OFF REAR OFF MODE
There are three types of center fascia switches available

based on the variants. A B C D E F G
DRIVE
ON OFF OFF MODE
Sl. No. Switches
A Passenger Air Bag ON indication
A B C D E F G B Passenger Air Bag OFF indication
C Passenger seat belt indication
D Hazard Switch
E Home Screen*/ SVS*/ Rear Camera*
F Display Off
OFF
DRIVE
MODE G Drive Mode
ON OFF
* - if equipped
A B C D E F G
When Passenger Air Bag is enabled/activated through the
instrument cluster, then the 'PAB OFF' indicator light will
turn off.

8.8 Driver Side Switch Bank 8.9 Power Outlet
Driver side switch bank is located on the instrument panel Front USB Outlet
below the right-side AC air vents.
The USB outlets are provided on the center switch bezel
below the infotainment control.
Type 1 Type 2
USB (A) as per the image provided can be used as an input
to the music system. You can connect iPods, USB memory
A B C D sticks, etc. as an input and listen to the music through the
vehicle speakers.
H G F E USB (B) can be used only for charging.
A: LH - USB Port
The following switches are available in the driver door B: RH - Charging USB Port
switch bank: (if equipped)
A B
A Dummy F Scroll Down*

B ESP OFF G HDC ON
C Scroll UP* H ESS OFF It is recommended to connect an input device only when the
vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while
D Cluster Menu/Mode*
driving may distract your attention and lead to an
E SET*/AWD* *-if equipped ACCIDENT.

8-14
Second Row USB Outlet

The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ACC
An additional USB outlet is or ON positions. It is recommended to use the power
provided on the rear side of sockets when the engine is ON to avoid battery drain.
the floor console below the
second row AC vents.
It can be used only for To avoid serious injury:
charging and it is intended
to be used by second row • Close the power outlet cap when not in use
W52G53 passengers.
• Do not allow children to use or play with the power
outlet
Third Row 12V Power Outlet (If equipped)
• When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the
0
1
2
3
manufacturer's instruction manual
The 12V Power outlet • Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while
socket is provided below sleeping
the third row (RH) AC vents.
Electrical equipment/ • Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet
appliances like mobile
charger, cigarette lighter • Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances
etc., can be used in the • Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the
outlet. power outlet
Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in
any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or
fire, which could cause serious damage to equipment and/
or personal injuries. Contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer for any necessary repairs.

REAR
A/C ECON
A/C
8.10 Wireless Mobile Charging (If equipped)

To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical NO OFF OFF
DRIVE
MODE
appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:

• Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving A wireless mobile charging
• Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance unit is located in front of
rolling, falling or overheating the center console below
the front USB ports.
• Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger
compartment are closed
The wireless charging will work in ignition ON, Cranking and

Engine ON conditions only. It will not work when the vehicle
• Use the power outlets only when the engine is running. is in accessory mode or in ignition OFF condition.
Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the
electric device. Using the power outlets when the engine To start wireless charging, place the smartphone equipped
is OFF or leaving the electric device plugged in for many with wireless charging function on the wireless charging pad
hours may cause the battery to drain and turn the ignition ON
• Do not use the power outlet to connect electric For best wireless charging results, place the smartphone on
accessories or equipment that are not designed to the center of the charging pad
operate on 12V
The wireless charging system is designed for one
• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference smartphone equipped with QI standard only. Please refer to
when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may your smartphone’s user manual or the website of the
cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other manufacturer to check whether your smartphone supports
electronic systems or devices in your vehicle QI wireless charging.

8-16
Follow the below steps to charging mobile in wireless 8.11 Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC)
mobile charger.
Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC) is located on the centre
console near the gear shift lever.
Recommended to place the phone on the center of the It is used to control the infotainment screen.
charger’s pad to start charging
Before charging remove the phone cover/case to improve
charging efficiency A C
If any metallic object such as coins is located between the wireless

charging system and the smartphone, the charging may be B D
disrupted. Also, the metallic object may heat up.
E
Do not place misalign your phone from the charging pad. Doing so
may overheat the wireless charger and cause a fire.
It may also result in serious burn or device malfunction. Do not
place the smart key on the charging pad. Keep the charging pad A Media / Menu
dry
B Favourite
C Home / Back
D Phone and Connectivity
E Rotary Knob/Scroll Knob

The following features can be used by Intelli Command

Center Switch
Event
S.No Button Type Event Action
Push Short Display current media screen if active
1 Media
Push Long Display source shortcut screen
Push Short Recall favorite stored screen/page
2 Favorite
Push Long Store current page/screen as favorite
Push Short Go One level up if applicable or else no action
3 Home/Back
Push Long Display HOME screen
Short/Long When Bluetooth OFF: Phone button press shall Turn ON Bluetooth
Phone and Push
4 and Show Device list screen.
Connectivity
Push Long When Bluetooth ON, but no device connected: Show Device list screen
5-way Move the Point of focus to left by 1 item
Push type Short
Left
Long Press Move the Point of focus to left by 1 item continuously until the press
5 Short Move the Point of focus to right by 1 item
Right
Long Press Move the Point of focus to right by 1 item continuously until the press
Short Move the Point of focus to UP by 1 item
Up
Long Press Move the Point of focus to UP by 1 item continuously until the press

8-18
Event
S.No Button Type Event Action
5 Double Open App drawer
Press
Down Short Move the Point of focus to DOWN by 1 item
Long Move the Point of focus to DOWN by 1 item continuously until the press
Press
Double Open Quick Application Drawer in infotainment screen.
Press
OK/Power In Power On mode, select current items in Point of Focus
Short
In Power Off mode, toggle System On/Off
Long Toggle System On/Off
Scroll Knob Increase volume of current Audio functionality by as many steps in case of
(When clockwise direction
Clicks,
controlling Direction
Decrease volume of current Audio functionality by as many steps in case of
Volume) Rotary counter clockwise direction
Scroll Knob Knob Move Point of Focus to the right/down by as many counts in case of
(When Clicks, clockwise direction
controlling Direction Move Point of Focus to the left/up by as many counts in case of counter
Input) clockwise direction
Note: The Intelli command center will primarily work for Infotainment functionality.

8.12 Lamps Front Roof Lamp – Type 1
8.12.1 Interior Lamps
Interior lamps comprises of front/rear roof lamps, ambience

lamps and ignition key ring illumination. The front roof lamps are
located in the roof console
These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry. above the interior rearview
mirror.
In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) and ignition
key ring illuminate when any of the doors are opened. Once
all doors are closed, the interior lamps gets switched OFF.
Switches on Roof Console (if equipped) The roof lamp can be switched ON by pressing the switch 'D'
(Refer Switches on Roof Console). Press the switch again to
switch OFF the roof lamp. Also, the lamp goes off once the
A: LHS reading lamp Lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed and the same will be ON
B: Door/ Auto Mode again when unlock button on RKE/PKE is pressed
SOS
C: SOS calling For Auto mode - Auto Mode will be active when Switch 'B' is
D: Roof Lamp ON in pressed position. In Auto Mode, the roof lamps will turn
ON automatically when any of the doors are opened. The
A B C D E E: RHS reading lamp roof lamps will also turn OFF automatically after preset time
once the doors are closed.
For Reading Lamp – Reading Lamp switches 'A' & 'E' can be
independently pressed for LH and RH lamps. Press the
switch again for switching OFF

8-20
Map Reading Lamp (if equipped):

This button should only be used in a real emergency.
Front Roof Lamp – Type 2
Map reading lamps are
located on the both sides of
the roof near the grab
handle above the second- The front roof lamp is in the
row seats. roof console above the
front seats. The courtesy
lamp can be switched on
O using the middle switch (B)
on the lamp.
Do not leave the roof/map reading lamp in permanent ON mode. A B C
This will drain your vehicle battery.
SOS calling A: The courtesy lamp remains permanently ON in this

position
B: The courtesy lamp remains in AUTO mode (if equipped)
The eCall system in this position. The lamp remains ON as long as any one of
automatically notifies the the doors are open and switches OFF when all doors are
emergency services if your closed properly
car is involved in an
accident. You can also call C: The courtesy lamp remains permanently OFF in this
the emergency services position
manually by pressing the
SOS button.

Centre Roof Lamp (if equipped)
The center roof lamps can

be switched ON by pressing
the switch on it. To switch it
OFF press the switch again.
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk

clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF”
In case, front roof lamp's 'AUTO' mode is ON, the center to switch OFF all lamps.
roof lamp also goes ON/OFF when the opening and closing
of any of the doors. i) Turn Signals
It cannot be switched off independently in auto mode. A
8.12.2 Exterior Lamps
Lighting Control Stalk: The lighting control stalk is located

on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of
the combination switch. B
It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head
lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, front/rear fog
lamps and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON. A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal - Right

8-22
Taking a Right Turn: Changing Lanes:

• Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator
right turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing function which can be used to signal a lane change
towards the right flashes along with the right side turn
signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk
your intention of turning towards right clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free
movement of the lever and release. The turn signals will
After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will flash three times and stop.
automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF
turn indicator lamp. The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting
control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.
Taking a Left Turn :
ii) Parking Lamp ON
• Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a
left turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk
towards the left flashes along with the left side turn clockwise/downward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd
signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating position from the top position to switch ON the parking
your intention of turning towards left lamps.
• After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will
automatically return to the neutral position switching
OFF turn indicator lamp.
If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of
the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown
bulb immediately.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk

clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the
The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel 3rd position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function
illumination lamps and all interior switches are also
activated when the parking lamp is switched ON.
The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after
opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp • Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax
they must turn OFF & turn ON manually.
• On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use
Park Lamp Warning Buzzer manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps
varies depending on the weather, season, or
A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is circumstances
left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.
• Any aftermarket sunfilm or spray may cause the lighting
iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function system to malfunction
• When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room,
tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is
a normal phenomenon recognising the automatic setting
• There may be a difference between ambient light
intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye.
Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the
head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it
as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour.
iv) Head Lamp ON
Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the
outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk
useful when travelling through tunnels or low light areas. clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top
to switch ON the head lamps.

8-24
A Low Beam B High Beam
Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected
on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic and
geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the
head lamps have been switched ON for a few minutes.
vi) Head Lamp Flash

v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam
Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk
down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head
lamp high beam & lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again
towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low
beam. In head lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp
in the instrument cluster illuminates indicating high beam
option selected.
A Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to

instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low
beam.

Head Lamp Levelling System Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay
loading condition as advised in the table.
When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may
have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp
aiming. A correct head lamp setting provides good visibility
to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is
users. switched ON.
To properly aim the head 8.12.3 Auto Head Lamp Booster (If equipped)
lamp beam, use the head
lamp levelling switch. This
switch is located on the When the switch is in the
right side of the steering Auto mode and high beam.
column shroud in the Then when the vehicle
instrument panel. This speed crosses 80 Kmph the
switch has four positions high beam intensity and
marked as 0, 1, 2 & 3. reach increases. The higher
reach of the beam is helpful
to have vision for the higher
Switch Vehicle Loading Condition speed
Position
0 Driver/Driver with Front Passenger The booster will turn OFF automatically when vehicle speed
Driver + Front passenger + Second row comes below 75 kmph
1 occupied
2 All seats occupied
All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver
3 with luggage at extreme rear side

8-26
8.12.4 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park The following conditions are to be met for the lamps to
Lamp (if equipped) switch ON:
To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp: In daytime whenever the • Ignition ON

engine is in running condition and park switch is in OFF • Head lamp is ON
position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.
• Sharp turn taken
To disable DRL: Whenever the engine is in running
condition and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park
mode 8.12.6 Fog Lamps
Fog lamps (if equipped) are to be used along with head lamp
low beam, to improve the vision during foggy and misty
If customer doesn’t want the DRL/Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he can disable
through infotainment settings. conditions.
Front Fog Lamps ON
8.12.5 Cornering Lamp (if equipped)
Cornering lamps are

integrated in both the Fog
lamps.
Respective side Cornering
lamps turn ON when a
sharp turn is taken.
They help in illuminating
the road in the direction of To switch ON the front fog lamps, first switch ON the
turn. parking lamps, rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting

control stalk clockwise aligning the front fog lamp icon to 8.12.7 Puddle Lamp (if equipped)
the “arrow” on the inner fixed stalk as shown.
The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster Puddle lamps are provided
indicates the operation status. at the bottom of the front
doors. They are switched
ON automatically when the
front doors are opened.
Fog lamps will turn ON only if parking lamp is ON due to This illuminates the ground
Park light input or Auto light input. below the respective door
Fog Lamps OFF thereby assisting in a safe
entry and exit.
8.13 Hazard Warning Lamp

The hazard warning lamp switch is in the center bezel switch
bank on the instrument panel.
Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All
the Turn Signal Lamps will start flashing. The instrument
cluster turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same.
Align the “marking” of inner rotary switch on the lighting To turn OFF, push the switch again.
control stalk to the “OFF” position on the inner fixed stalk as
shown to switch OFF the fog lamps.

8-28
8.14 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor

(RLS)
Use the hazard warning
lamp when your vehicle is This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get
ON
DRIVE
MODE stationary or to warn other out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head
lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting
OFF OFF
road users to be cautious

while passing your vehicle. the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the
UNLOCK signal from the RKE.
To enable FMH;
• Ignition transition from ON to OFF
The turn lamps do not work when the hazard warning • Park lamp is OFF
lamps are operational.
• Ignition key is out
8.13.1 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp • Driver door open within 3 mins from KEY OUT
• Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet found dark by the light sensor
open in vehicle stationary condition.
To extend FMH;
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds
during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic. • The first RKE/PKE LOCK command will be used for locking
all doors
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an
unfortunate event of an accident where Airbags are • Successive RKE/PKE LOCK commands will be used for
deployed. In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam
30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard • Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will
switch (Off to On) or Ignition reset (Ignition Off and On) be kept/turned on for the next 20 seconds

To disable FMH • FMH can be activated by pressing lock button in key fob
twice. First press locks the vehicle & second press
• Park lamp transition from OFF to ON enables head lamp low beam for 20 seconds.
• Ignition off to any other state • Pressing unlock button in key fob disables FMH feature &
• FMH ON 20 seconds expires unlocks the vehicle.
• FMH Max time is 3 minutes expires To extend the FMH feature further for 20 secs., press RKE
LOCK button once. This FMH extension can be availed for
With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.
from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be
extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle With FMH mode ON; First LOCK signal received from RKE
is disarmed. will lock the doors and subsequent LOCK signal is used to
toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.
8.15 Follow-Me Home Lamp (FMH) Non RLS (if To deactivate FMH:
equipped) • Switch ON the parking lamps
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get • Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position
out of the vehicle during poor light conditions. The head
lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds assisting • Press the RKE unlock button once
the passengers to find their way. It will only work if prior to • Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF
switching off the engine, the head lamp were ON for a automatically
predefined time
With FMH mode ON, if UNLOCK signal is received twice from
To activate FMH: RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended
• Switch OFF the parking lamps further. Also, the doors are unlocked, and vehicle disarmed.
• Remove the ignition key

8-30
8.16 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp(LMV) (if equipped) 8.17 Remote Engine Start (If equipped)
LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 This feature enables the customer can remotely Start/Stop
secs. helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle the vehicle engine using mobile application.
safely and comfortably at night.
This feature is mainly used to switch on the car air
LMV is activated: conditioner remotely via Adrenox connect app. When the
engine starts, the vehicle AC automatically turns ON (If DATC
• Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times equipped). This feature is available in automatic
LMV is de-activated: transmission and manual transmission variants with EPB.
• Switch ON the parking lamps The following conditions must be met for a vehicle to be
started remotely:
• Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position
• All doors including bonnet and tail door must be closed
• Press the RKE lock button once and locked.
• Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF • Vehicle Automatic transmission should be in P (Park) OR
automatically Manual transmission (gear in neutral Position) with EPB
To extend the LMV feature further for 20 secs., press RKE applied .
UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for • Ignition must be in OFF position.
maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.
• Sufficient Fuel and battery charge for the car to start.
With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE
will unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is
used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

8.18 Windshield Wipers Auto Mode (if equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected
when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In
8.18.1 Wiper Control Stalk the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on rain intensity.
The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the
wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).
A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)
A
B: Off
B ON
INT
C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will
C D: Low Speed (LO) automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned
F
E: High Speed (HI) from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.
D
E F: Rotary Switch Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the
position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.
Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to
stalk is in neutral position (B). position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.
Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A)
for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously 8.18.2 Wipe/Wash
(simultaneously lift the wiper stalk towards the steering
wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel
back to position (B) when released. from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer
fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed
Intermittent (INT) (If equipped): Intermittent (INT) mode onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times
wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed after the washer spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position
down to position (C). In the INT mode, the wiper operates on for continuous spray of washer fluid.
preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied
by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

8-32
8.18.3 AUTO Wash (if equipped)
When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:

When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid
After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto
their bottom position. the windshield for 2 seconds. The wipers wipe the
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is windshield 4 times
less than or equal to 5 secs., then the wiper will continue in
the Intermittent mode. After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will
turn ON for 1.5 seconds and the wipers wipe the windshield
If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is 3 times
more than 5 secs., then a further single wipe will be
performed 5 secs. after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip
wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.
AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is
The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the in OFF mode.
ignition is in “ON” position.

8.18.4 Rear Wiper-INT Mode Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to
align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position
to operate the rear wiper continuously .
8.18.6 Rear Wash
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to

align the “arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position
to operate the rear wiper in INT mode. In this mode, the
wiper operates on preset intervals of 4 seconds.
Push the wiper control stalk towards back side from any
8.18.5 Rear Wiper-ON Mode position to activate wipe/wash function. The rear windshield
wash & wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long as the stalk
end is Push/Pull to the rear wash position. Wiping will
continue for 3 times after releasing the stalk end switch.
If you switch OFF the ignition before switching OFF the

wiper, the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch
ON the ignition and move wiper stalk to 'MIST' position to
return the wipers to the park position, provided the wiper
stalk is in OFF position.

8-34
8.18.7 Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear

Using a windshield washer in freezing temperatures could
be dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the
windshield, and block your vision resulting in an accident. If There are two nozzles with
you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 deg C, triple adjustable washer
use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. jets in the front (on the
bonnet). Using a pin, the
eyeball jets can be adjusted
precisely for direction.
• Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It
may lead to scratches on the glass
Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield.
• It is recommended not to use the wiper when the This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width of
windshield glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. the windshield.
Clean the glass before using the wiper to avoid damage
to the wiper blades and glass
• Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 10 In the rear, one nozzle with
secs. or when the reservoir is empty triple adjustable washer
jets are provided for the
rear windshield wash.
Adjust the nozzle to direct the washer jet to hit the middle of rear
windshield using a pin. Rear windshield washer fluid is supplied
from front washer reservoir located in the Engine compartment.

CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS II
9 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS II Switch

Switch Press Operation
Position
9.1 Skyroof
Short Press Sunshade Express Open
A skyroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable 1
Long Press Sunshade Manual Open
by bringing light and sunshine into the vehicle.
Short Press Skyroof Express Open
It provides a real open air feeling along with pure driving 2
fun, with fresh air, your driving experience automatically Long Press Skyroof Manual Open
becomes significantly more relaxed. A skyroof allows air to
Short Press Skyroof Express Close
flow evenly from above the driver, which is much quieter 3
and less intrusive than wind blowing through a side window Long Press Skyroof Manual Close
Short Press Sunshade Express Close
9.1.1 Controls and functions 4
Long Press Sunshade Manual Close
— Switch Home/Neutral
0&5
Position
6 Short Press Tilt Up
6 7 Short Press Tilt Down
5
Toggle switch for the skyroof to operate. Home/Neutral position of the
Switch (0) and (5). To operate the sliding skyroof and Rollo shade Pull or
7 Push or Tilt the switch as shown in image, after every operation switch goes
to Home position automatically.
2 1 0 3 4
You must switch ON the ignition to operate the skyroof.

9.1.2 Rollo Shade Open 9.1.4 Skyroof Open
Pull the switch to position

Pull the switch to position
(1) for Rollo Shade Express
(2) for skyroof Express (one
(one touch) open. Manual
touch) opened. Manual
(long press) open to stop at
(long press) open to stop at
desired position.
desired position.
9.1.3 Rollo Shade Close Skyroof Smart Open by Key Fob Unlock Button
Push the switch to position

(4) for Rollo Shade Express
(one touch) Close to close • Skyroof and Sunshade
Rollo Shade completely. can be opened by long
Manual (long press) Close press unlock button.
to stop at desired position.
• Sunshade will be open followed by skyroof.

• Skyroof / Sunshade movement can be stopped by
pressing lock/unlock button during movement.

9-2
9.1.5 Skyroof Close • Skyroof /Sunshade movement can be stop by pressing

lock/unlock button during movement
Push the switch to position If antipinch is detected 3 times continuously within 10

(3) for skyroof Express (one seconds, then smart close though Remote key will not work
touch) Close. Manual (long for next 30 sec. User can manually close skyroof through
press) Close to stop at switch from console.
desired position.
Skyroof Smart Close while Raining
If Rain sensor is equipped:

Skyroof Smart Close by Key fob Lock button In auto wipe mode or wiper
LOW or HIGH mode, when
wiper is ON for predefined
time, cluster will request
• Skyroof and Sunshade user feedback for closing
can be close by long the skyroof. Using Steering
press lock button. “selection button/ center
button” user can choose to
• Skyroof will be closed close the Skyroof.
followed by Sunshade.
In RLS variant, Skyroof and Sunshade will close
automatically while rain is detected or after the defined time
• Skyroof / Sunshade movement can be stop by pressing (12 hours) during the vehicle is in Ignition OFF and locked
lock/unlock button during movement state.

9.1.6 Skyroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone

• In Non Rain Sensor Application
variant Once wiper is
CRUISE
turned ON for a
SET+
predefined time, cluster
will request user
SET-
feedback for closing the User can open and close
RESUME skyroof Using Steering skyroof via mobile phone
switch button User can with authorized application
close the skyroof. in Ignition OFF
Skyroof Smart Control by Voice Recognition

3
2
1 9.1.7 Skyroof Tilt Open/Close
User can open and close
skyroof via Voice command
through Alexa during
Tilt/Rotate Up the switch to
Ignition ON
position (6) for skyroof Tilt
Open
Tilt/Rotate Down the switch
to position (7) for skyroof
Tilt Close

9-4
9.1.8 Pinch Protection For The Power Skyroof 9.1.9 Emergency Close Feature
• Pinch protection can help reduce the risk of pinching • The express (One Touch) / Manual (long press) skyroof
injuries when closing the power skyroof.. and Rollo Shade Close function may not work due to -
• If the power skyroof closing meets resistance or there is • Consecutive several attempts to close skyroof and Rollo
something in the way, the power skyroof opens again Shade.
immediately.
• Pinch protection is only for closing skyroof and Rollo
• Check why the power skyroof did not close & avoid such shade.
incident in future for your safety
• Excessive Ice / Dirt accumulation on the skyroof Glass /
• Try to close the power skyroof again guiderails.
Follow the emergency close command as below:
• Emergency close feature can be used, if Sliding skyroof or
• Without pinch protection, the power skyroof will close Rollo shade consecutive reversal movement observed 3
with enough force to cause serious personal injury.
times within 10 sec then continue with step 2 as below to
• Always be careful when closing the power skyroof. use Emergency close feature.
• Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of • On the 4th attempt continuously push the skyroof close
the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; switch - position (3) or Rollo shade close switch - position
may result in injuries (4) until it closes completely to ensure occupant privacy,
safety & theft prevention from skyroof open window.
• If the power skyroof malfunctions, pinch protection may This is Emergency Close Feature. (Never keep your hands
not function properly. Visit an Mahindra Authorised or head in the skyroof window while performing this
Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility for operation it may cause severe injury, since Anti-pinch
assistance. function will not work at this 4th attempt).
• Once the skyroof or Rollo Shade is completely closed,
release the switch.

• Alternatively, User may wait for min. 30 secs before 9.1.10 Initializing The Power Skyroof
operating skyroof and Rollo Shade, then skyroof can be
operated with Normal Functions. Condition for Initializing the Skyroof /Rollo Shade
• If the skyroof doesn’t operate as above, Visit Mahindra If the vehicle battery has been disconnected during skyroof /
Authorised Dealer for assistance. Rollo shade movement and reconnected or it is dead or any
fuse is replaced, the skyroof / Rollo shade must be
initialized. Otherwise Express (one touch) function (open/
close/tilt) and pinch protection function will be deactivated.
Initializing command procedure:
1. Turn ON the ignition
(Pre condition shall be Close position for both skyroof
and Rollo shade)
2. Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close
switch’ (3) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2 seconds
after the roof is fully closed, till clicking sound comes
from skyroof .
3. Close the Rollo shade fully by pushing ‘ Rollo Shade
close switch’ (4) and keep the switch pushed for 1-2
seconds after the Rollo shade is fully closed, till
clicking sound comes from Rollo shade.
4. The Initializing command is complete, Check if the
Express open/close features are working.
If the initializing procedure is not completely performed,
then it has to be run again from step 2.

9-6
9.1.11 Self Learning The Power Skyroof
Self learning command procedure: • To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the
skyroof before opening or tilting it in winter season.
1. Self-learning must be performed when sunroof/ rollo
sunshade assembly is replaced or when false anti- • Always close the skyroof before leaving the vehicle or if it
pinch reversal movement (reversal without any begins to rain. If the skyroof is open or tilted, rain could
obstruction) is noticed enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to
the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle
2. Close the skyroof fully by pushing ‘skyroof close damage.
switch’ and keep the switch pushed continuously. Do
not release the switch and wait for following actions to • Remove leaves and other objects from the skyroof
perform. guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum
cleaner.
3. Sliding skyroof will start opening after 5 sec pause and
close automatically. Release the Switch to complete • If the power skyroof malfunctions, pinch protection may
the procedure. not function properly. See an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility.
4. Close the Rollo fully by pushing ‘Rollo Shade close
switch’ and keep the switch pushed continuously. Do • The Rollo Shade can be opened and closed
not release the switch and wait for following actions to independently when the sliding skyroof is in closed
perform. position.
5. Rollo will start opening after 5 sec pause and close • During sliding skyroof Express (one touch) open/tilt
automatically. Release the Switch to complete the operation, Rollo Shade will also open in synchronization
procedure. with sliding skyroof (Express - Complete Open Feature).
6. The Self learning command is complete.
Incase skyroof and Rollo Shade Close switch is released in the Do not remove vehicle battery while skyroof is in motion
middle of procedure, repeat from step 1.

9.1.12 Wind Buffeting

• Improper use of the power skyroof can result in serious When you drive the vehicle with the window or skyroof open
personal injury. at a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your
ears or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter.
• Always make sure that no one is in the Path/Cutout of This happens because of an influx of in air through the
the power skyroof when it is Closing or Opening window or skyroof and due to its resonance effect. If this
• Always take the key with you while leaving the vehicle. happens, adjust by opening the window or skyroof
• Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle –

particularly if they have access to the vehicle key.
Unsupervised use of the remote control vehicle key
makes it possible to lock the vehicle, start the engine,
turn on the ignition and operate the skyroof .
• Never stand or sit on skyroof glasses or roof. This can
cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of
the skyroof which will not be covered in warranty.
• Never keep the Luggages / weights on top of the roof/
skyroof
• Any wet area found on the headliner should be reported
to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer Immediately

9-8
9.1.13 Skyroof Service Checking Procedure
• After cleaning of all

visible particles blow air
into drain hose channel
area to clean hose for
• Open the skyroof mud in this area
• Now pour 1 liter of water in rain channel and check if

water is draining or not
• Check all 4 Rail channel

corners for mud or Dust/ If water is not draining kindly contact the Mahindra Dealer
Leaf present in it or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.
• Move the leafs/Dust to

center of rain channel
and then remove it by • High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed
hand towards skyroof seals and Rubber components.
• Do not use High pressure water on skyroof area.
• It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro
Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it fiber cloth during cleaning.
manually – as the bigger leaves may go inside and block
• Skyroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air
drain hose.
blower.

9.2 Heating, Ventilation And Air-Conditioning

System (HVAC) Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is
under high pressure.
HVAC system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to
automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, The refrigerant is colorless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odor.
Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause irritation and
air flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside frostbite.
passenger compartment.
They can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of
By appropriately adjusting the control knobs/switches concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other
provided on the DATC/ETC control panel, located on center refrigerants, it may form flammable mixture. Never try to service
console, occupant’s comfort can be ensured. HVAC system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling.
HVAC system also helps in defogging / de-misting the

windshield and windows. Air flow direction can be further - If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all
controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to lack of
provided at the inlet of HVAC blower. ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater,
ventilate frequently.
Engine coolant is utilized to heat the cabin air. For cooling
the cabin air, an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being
compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning force-circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger
system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating compartment.
oil.
Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a
greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system
atmosphere, it adversely affects the environment by performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions.
contributing to global warming/climate change Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of
snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front of air
vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.

9-10
9.2.1 Air Vents
A A
A Windshield Defogger Vents

B B
B Side Defogger Vents

VOL + SET+
ENTER
SET-
RESUME
START
C Side Vents
ENGINE
STOP
E
2
1
C + AUTO
C
A/C
MAX REAR
MODE
A/C
- A/C
OFF
D Center Vents
D NO OFF
D
USB
E DATC/ETC Control Panel
F F Foot Vents
F
G Rear Vents (2nd Row)
G G

Side Vents: The two side vents are located one each at the Defogger Vents
left and right extreme ends of the instrument panel. Both
the side vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers.
There are four defogger vents in your vehicle: two side

defogger and two windshield defogger vents.
Centre Vents: Two center vents are located below the
infotainment screen in the center console. Both the center They are located just below the windshield. The side
vents provide air flow to the front seat passengers. Direct air defogger vents prevent the front windows from defogging.
to the desired direction by adjusting the Louvres up/down Second Row Vents: The second row AC vents are located
or left/right. on the rear side of the center console.
SET+
VOL +
ENTER
SET-
RESUME
START
ENGINE
STOP
3
2
1
REAR
A/C ECON
A/C
NO OFF
USB

9-12
Third Row Vents: The third row vents (LH & RH) are located A Temperature control Knob
on side trims on either side of the third row seats.
B Air distribution/Mode switches
It will be provided only for variants which have the third-row C Front defogger switch
seats
D Blower speed control knob
E Rear Defogger switch
F Rear A/C switch
G Recirculation mode switch
H Economy Mode switch
I A/C switch
Temperature Control Knob
9.2.2 Electronic Temperature Control (if equipped)
A B C D
By operating the temperature control knob, temperature of

air being discharged from various vents can be adjusted to
the desired level. Engine coolant is utilized to heat, whereas
the air conditioner is used to cool the air inside the AC unit.
I H G F E Based upon selected position of the temperature control

knob, the desired discharged air temperature can be Economy Mode switch (ECON)
obtained.
By rotating the knob anti-clockwise and setting it to the
extreme left position, maximum cooling is obtained. When
the knob is rotated clockwise, the discharged air
progressively starts getting warmer and at the extreme right
position, hot air is discharged.
Blower Speed Control Knob
ECON switch turns ON economy mode. During ECON AC
The blower force-circulates the air through the HVAC unit operation the system automatically cuts OFF at a higher
and distributes it throughout the passenger compartment. temperature than normal AC. The operation can be used
during mild weather conditions for better fuel efficiency.
Comfort level may be compromised during this operation.
Press the ECON switch again to turn OFF economy mode.
A/C switch
This button turns the air-conditioner ON or OFF.
Blower is OFF when the blower speed control knob is set to

small (Blower Symbol) position (extreme left). To switch-ON
the blower, rotate the control knob clockwise which
progressively increases the blower speed.
When the air conditioner is functioning, air gets cooled and

de-humidified before being circulated inside the cabin. In

9-14
hot weather conditions, it will take a slightly longer time to Re-circulation Mode (Re-circulation mode switch ON)
cool the interior as compared to cooler weather. Fuel
consumption will be relatively higher if the vehicle is being
driven with the air conditioner ON.
AC will function only when both engine and blower are

switched ON.
To set the HVAC system to recirculation mode, press the
recirculation mode button. The LED on the button
• In certain operating conditions when the engine gets illuminates, indicating the recirculation mode is active. In
overheated, the engine management system may switch this intake mode, the air from inside the passenger
off the air conditioner intermittently compartment will be sucked by the blower and utilized
further to ventilate /cool / heat the cabin.
• The air conditioner should be operated at least for ten
minutes once every fortnight, even during winter months. For quick cabin cooling/heating or while driving through
This allows AC system components to get lubricated dusty/polluted region, re-circulation mode can be selected
periodically and ensures optimum system for short periods. Driving with this mode active, may lead to
better fuel economy and longer HVAC filter life. However,
• During extreme cold weather conditions, the air running the air conditioner in re-circulation mode for long
conditioner may not function until temperature of the air will make cabin air too dry and oxygen level drops inside
near the evaporator rises above a predefined threshold cabin the turning the air stale. On the contrary, keeping air
• When air conditioner is ON, moisture is extracted from intake control in recirculation mode for long, with air
the air. The resulting condensate is drained off from the conditioner switched OFF, will make cabin air too humid and
vehicle. It is therefore normal, if you see a small pool of windshield and window are more likely to become foggy.
water under your vehicle Hence, never drive in recirculation mode for long, shift back
to fresh air mode intermittently.

Never keep recirculation mode selected continuously for Rear AC blower can be turned ON only when the Rear AC
long period. Prolonged use of the HVAC system in switch is turned ON
recirculation mode may cause windshield/windows to mist/
fog-up, impairing visibility which can lead to an accident,
endangering you and others.
Fresh Air Mode (Re-Circulation Mode Switch Off)
Air Distribution/Mode switches

The air flowing out of various vents can be controlled by the
air distribution/mode switches.
• Face Mode — When face mode switch is pressed, air is
To set the HVAC system to fresh air mode, press the re-
discharged from the Center vents, second row vents and
circulation mode button again. The LED on this button
side vents. This mode is most suitable for directing air
switches OFF, indicating that fresh air mode is active. In this
flow towards the face of the passengers
intake mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by
the blower and utilized further to ventilate /cool / heat the
cabin.
Rear AC switch
Rear AC Switch is used to turn ON/OFF the Rear AC blower.

9-16
• Face-Foot Mode — When Face-Foot mode switch is • Foot and Front Defogger Mode — When foot and front
pressed, air is discharged from the Center vents, second defogger mode switch is pressed air is discharged from
row vents, Foot vents and side vents. This mode is most the foot vents, side defogger vents and windshield
suitable for directing air flow towards both the face and defogger vents. This mode is most suitable for directing
feet of passengers at the same time air flow towards the feet of passengers while de-misting/
defogging.
• Foot Mode — When foot mode switch is pressed, air is

discharged from the two foot vents. This mode is most • Front Defogger Mode — When Front Defogger mode
suitable for directing air flow towards the feet of switch is pressed air is discharged from the side defogger
passengers seated on front seats vents and windshield defogger vents. This mode is most
suitable for directing air flow towards the front
windshield to ensure de-misting / defogging.

Rear Defogger Switch 9.2.3 Dual Automatic Temperature Control (if

equipped)
A B C D E F G
+ AUTO
DUAL A/C
MAX REAR
Rear defogger switch is located on the ETC control panel. MODE
A/C
-
A/C
OFF
Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED
on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear
defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. M L K J I H
Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as W62G109
soon as the fog / mist is cleared.

Co–Driver Temp control
If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it A H A/C ON Switch
Knob
will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based
on ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear B Front defogger switch I OFF switch
defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again. C Rear Defogger switch J Rear A/C switch
On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger Blower speed control
D K MAX A/C Switch
in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be Switches
half the duration of the first activation. E Auto Mode Switch L Mode Switch
Recirculation Mode Dual mode
F M
Switch switch
G Driver temp control knob

9-18
Below mentioned switches/ The air conditioner does not operate by directly pressing the
knobs in DATC control blower speed control switches if the A/C switch is not
panel is pressed/Rotated, pressed. However, the air flows due to the fan operation.
respective icons and AUTO switch
changes are displayed in
the infotainment screen.
+ AUTO
DUAL A/C
MAX REAR
MODE - OFF
Blower speed control switches A/C A/C
W62G110
+ AUTO
If you press the AUTO switch with AC ON, AUTO indicator
DUAL A/C
appears on Infotainment screen and the set temperature is
MAX REAR
MODE
A/C
-
A/C
OFF
maintained while the airflow and air distribution are
W62G98
automatically controlled.
The indicator lamp lights up while AUTO switch is operating,
You can adjust the airflow by Pressing the Blower speed and the lamp turns off when the AUTO switch is turned OFF.
control switches with ignition ON. If you adjust the airflow
using blower speed control switches in AUTO mode, the Front Defogger switch
AUTO indicator on Infotainment screen goes off and the
operation mode is changed to the manual mode.
+ AUTO
Blower speed can be increased by pressing the blower DUAL A/C
speed '+' switch and blower speed can be decreased by MODE
MAX
-
REAR
OFF
pressing the blower speed '-' switch. A/C A/C
W62G108

Use this switch for quick defogging with the engine ON. Co–Driver temperature control knob
When you press this switch, its indicator lamp turns ON, and
the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door
glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
+ AUTO
At this time A/C, front defogger and Fresh air indicators DUAL A/C
shows up in the Infotainment screen. If you press the switch MODE

MAX
-
REAR
OFF
A/C A/C
again, front defogging stops with the indicator lamp turns
W62G113
off and the mode returns to the previous operation. While
the front defogger switch is operating, its indicator lamp To adjust the co-driver side temperature as desired, rotate
turns ON and the lamp turns off when the front defogger the co-driver temperature control knob while the AC is ON.
mode switch is turned ON. The temperature decreases, when the co-driver
OFF switch temperature control knob is rotated in anticlockwise
direction & Temperature increases, when the co-driver
temperature control knob is rotated in clockwise direction.
+ AUTO
DUAL A/C
The co-driver set temperature is visible on the infotainment
MAX REAR screen
MODE - OFF
A/C A/C
W62G101
When co-driver temperature knob is rotated, Dual mode

You can turn off the Dual automatic Temperature controller automatically Turns ON.
(DATC) by using this switch. When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger
temperature returns to the driver side set temperature.

9-20
Recirculation mode switch Automatic selection of the fresh or air circulation mode
When the front defogger switch is pressed, outside air
+ AUTO automatically comes in. When the switch is pressed again,
DUAL A/C the previous mode is restored.
MAX REAR
MODE - OFF
A/C A/C
DUAL switch
W62G135
+ AUTO
If you press this switch with AC ON, the indication lamp
DUAL A/C
lights turn up and the air recirculation indicator on
MAX REAR
Infotainment display is displayed. If you press this switch MODE
A/C
-
A/C
OFF
again, the indication lamp turns off and the air source
W62G100
selection is changed to Fresh air intake mode.
This function allows controlling the Co-Driver side
temperature separately with engine ON.
Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended
• If you press the DUAL mode switch, the indicator lamp
periods of time with every window closed. Doing so can
lights up and DUAL mode indicator on the infotainment
cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack
displays comes on
of oxygen
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon • When the driver temperature control knob is rotated, the
monoxide poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after driver side temperature on the infotainment display is
passing through a dusty or polluted area with air adjusted as desired and when co-driver temperature
recirculation mode in operation. control knob is rotated, co-driver side temperature on
the infotainment display is adjusted as desired
• While the DUAL mode switch is operating, its indicator
lamp turns ON and the lamp turns off when the DUAL
mode switch is turned OFF.

When the DUAL mode switch is turned off, the passenger When choosing foot mode, some air flows out from
temperature returns to the driver side set temperature. windshield defogger vents , Side defogger vents and side
vents.
Mode switch
Driver temperature control knob
Each time you press this switch with IGN ON, the air
distribution mode is changed and displayed as shown in the To adjust the temperature as desired, rotate the driver side
figure below. temperature control knob
When you press this switch in AUTO mode (AUTO indicator The temperature decreases, when the driver temperature
ON), the system is changed to the manual control mode control knob is rotated in anti-clockwise direction &
(AUTO indicator OFF). temperature increases, when the driver temperature
control knob is rotated in clockwise direction
+ AUTO
DUAL A/C
+ AUTO
MAX REAR
MODE - OFF
A/C A/C DUAL A/C
MAX REAR
W62G104 MODE - OFF
A/C A/C
W62G114
Face-Mode Foot-Mode
Foot/
Face/Foot-
Defogger-
Mode
Mode

9-22
A/C Switch MAX A/C switch
+ AUTO + AUTO
DUAL A/C DUAL A/C

MAX REAR MAX REAR
MODE - OFF MODE - OFF
A/C A/C A/C A/C
W62G111 W62G103
Air conditioner is turned ON and OFF with this switch. MAX AC mode can be used to attain MAX cooling in a short
While air conditioner switch is operating, its indicator period of time.
lamp lights up, and the lamp turns off when the AC is
When MAX AC switch is pressed
OFF.
1. In cabin temperature is set to minimum
Rear A/C switch
2. Blower fan speed is set to Max
Rear AC Switch is used to turn ON/OFF the Rear AC
blower. 3. Air intake mode is set to recirculation mode
4. Air distribution mode is set to Face mode
Rear AC blower can be turned ON only when the Rear AC Rear Defogger Switch
switch is turned ON
+ AUTO
+ AUTO DUAL A/C
DUAL A/C MAX REAR

MODE - OFF
A/C A/C
MAX REAR
MODE - OFF
A/C A/C
W62G97
W62G102

Rear defogger switch is located on the DATC control panel. Co–driver Temp Driver Temp Control
Press the switch once to activate the rear defogger. The LED 1 3
Control Knob Knob
on the switch illuminates upon activation and the rear
defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist. 2 Auto Indicator ON
Switch OFF the rear defogger by pressing the switch once as
soon as the fog / mist is cleared. Use only when the engine is running.
If the rear defogger switch is not switched OFF manually, it 1. Press the AUTO switch.
will turn OFF automatically after a pre-defined time, based 2. AUTO indicator is displayed on the Infotainment
on ambient temperature. If you want to switch the rear Screen.
defogger ON again, press the rear defogger switch again.
3. Set the desired cabin temperature with the
On second and subsequent activations of the rear defogger temperature control knob.
in the same ignition cycle, the rear defogger ON time will be
half the duration of the first activation. 4. The temperature of the passenger compartment is
automatically maintained according to the set
temperature.
9.2.4 DATC – Auto Operation Mode
5. If the driver and co-driver require different
temperatures in their respective zones, the same can
1 2 3 be done by pressing the dual mode Switch and
subsequently, setting different temperatures using
temperature control.
+ AUTO
DUAL A/C
When you use the blower speed control switches, mode
MAX REAR
switch (air source selection switch) or defogger switch
MODE - OFF
A/C A/C during the auto operation mode, AUTO indicator on the
W62G128 display goes out and the air conditioner system can be
controlled manually.

9-24
9.2.5 DATC – Manual Operation Mode Use only when the engine is running.
1. Press AC ON switch
1 2 3 4 5 2. Set the desired temperature by rotating the
temperature control knob
+ AUTO 3. Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed
DUAL A/C
control switches
MAX REAR
MODE
A/C
-
A/C
OFF
4. Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/
mode switch
W62G130
5. Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation
mode switch
Co–driver Temp Recirculation Mode
1 4
Control Knob Switch In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not
come on and you can manually adjust the climate
Driver Temp Control conditions by controlling the temperature, blower speed,
2 Mode Switch 5
Knob mode (air distribution), A/C, air source selection, and DUAL
temp. selection control switches.
Blower Control Speed
3
Switch
To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.

9.2.6 DATC – Climate Control Through Infotainment 9.2.7 Remote Cooling

Screen
Climate Control Setting also can be done through Remote cooling feature
infotainment screen. allows user to control Cabin
climate settings from
outside the vehicle.
• During remote cooling
• Go to setting page in operation , Cabin
infotainment Screen temperature settings will
then select climate be changed to default 18
control. deg C in Auto mode for
both driver and co-driver
to achieve faster cooling.
• Under Climate control screen select Climate icon • Vehicle cabin will be
cooled down before
• All HVAC setting can be changed by pressing respective entering vehicle. Thus,
symbols or buttons in climate screen making cabin more
comfortable for the
passengers when they
W22G148
enter the car that was
parked in the hot sun

9-26
Activate Remote Cooling feature • Gear is in Neutral
Remote cooling starts by

automatically once we When vehicle is started
press "start engine" button remotely using Adrenox
in the Adrenox connect connect mobile App, By
mobile App default Cabin climate
settings will be changed to
18 deg C in Auto mode.
In remote Engine start
In Automatic transmission vehicle condition user will have
access to control below
• All Doors closed Cabin climate setting under
• Gear is in PARK position Climate settings
• Fuel level is greater than 10 liters

• Vehicle should be in Standstill W22G150
In Manual transmission (with EPB) vehicle 1. Duration time : User can select the time duration for
• All Doors closed which remote cooling will be active using Adrenox
connect mobile App, Duration can be selected from
• EPB is Engaged minimum of 2 mins to maximum of 15 mins.
• Fuel level is greater than 10 liters 2. Cabin Temperature settings: User can change
temperature settings during Remote cooling
• Vehicle should be in Standstill

3. Front defrost: User can Activate /De-activate front 9.2.8 Rear AC Control
defrost during remote cooling by selecting front
defrost option in mobile app Third Row Blower Speed Control
4. Rear Defrost: User can Activate /De-activate Rear Rear blower speed control knob is provided below the third
defrost during remote cooling by selecting Rear row (RH) vent to control the air flow to the third-row vents.
defrost option in Adrenox connect mobile App,
Once vehicle is started remotely customer will get feedback
in the Adrenox connect mobile App,
Remote cooling can be De-

activated by using Mobile
App. if vehicle is already in
Remote start condition by
Pressing start engine
button, Remote cooling will
be deactivated.
The third row AC is switched ON by the Rear AC button on
In Mobile App customer will the DATC/ETC Control panel . The airflow is controlled by the
get notification if Remote rear ac blower speed control knob on the third row RH side
cooling is failed. trim.
Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while 9.2.9 Rapid Cabin Cooling
vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration. It is
recommended not to operate Remote cooling when vehicle Rapid Cabin Cooling In DATC
is parked in a closed environment.
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are
recommended:

9-28
• Make sure that all the windows are fully closed blower speed and temperature control knob can be re-
adjusted as desired.
• Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air
toward face
• Turn ON AC If your vehicle was parked in the hot sun with all the
• Press MAX AC Switch windows closed, drive the vehicle with windows open for the
first few minutes. This will help in venting the hot interior air
Rapid Cabin Cooling In ETC out and allow the air conditioner to cool the cabin quickly.
In case you are leaving the vehicle parked in sun frequently
For rapid cooling of the cabin, the following AC settings are then activate the Active Cooling Option.
recommended:
• Make sure that all the windows are fully closed 9.2.10 Rapid Cabin Heating
• Set the blower to maximum speed
For rapid heating of the cabin, the following AC settings are
• Fully open the vents and adjust Louvres to direct air recommended:
toward face
1. Make sure that all the windows are fully closed.
• Set the air distribution control to face mode
2. Set the blower to maximum speed.
• Set air intake control to recirculation mode
3. Set the air distribution control to foot mode.
• Turn the air conditioner ON
4. Set air intake control to recirculation mode.
• Set the temperature control knob to extreme left
(coolest) position 5. Set the temperature control knob to extreme right
(hot) position.
For faster cabin cooling, you can select re-circulated air
intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches 6. For de-humidified heating, switch the air conditioner
a comfortable temperature, shift to fresh air mode. Also ON. So on rainy conditions if the heater is ON then
also keep the AC ON.

For faster cabin heating, you can select re-circulated air • Reduced air flow because of clogged HVAC filter or any
intake mode initially. Once passenger compartment reaches other obstructions in air flow path may lead to
a comfortable temperature, blower speed and temperature inadequate defogging/de-misting performance. If air flow
control knob can be re-adjusted as desired. seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter
cleaned or replaced immediately. Air flow path should be
kept free of obstructions
In extreme cold weather conditions, the engine coolant • Reduced cooling performance from air conditioner may
takes time to get heated up. Hence, it might take a while for lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting. If cooling effect
hot air discharge, even when blower is running and seems to have dropped considerably, get the air
temperature control dial is set to hot position. conditioning system checked by an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer
9.2.11 Points to Remember
• For quickly defogging/de-misting outside of front Your vehicle is equipped with a HVAC filter. If the AC
windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have
wiper/washer for few times intermittently the HVAC filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Authorised
Dealer.
• If snow has deposited on windshield, use ice scraper to Keep in mind that a choked filter will also lead to poor
remove ice deposited before using wiper cooling.
• In freezing weather, warm the front windshield with the
defogger before using the windshield washer. Also use a
washer fluid having anti-freezing properties. These will Never operate HVAC system with the filter removed. This
help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your may result in premature failure of system components.
windshield
• Dirty/contaminated windshield would make misting /
fogging-up worse. Always keep the inside and outside of
windshield clean

9-30
9.3 Surround View System (If equipped) angle of any of the camera is changed e. g. after a
collision, then do not use the feature for safety reasons
Surround View System assists in parking and low speed as the image stitching may not be correct.
maneuvering by providing views of vehicle’s surroundings
with the help of 4 cameras located in the front grille, in the • If the exterior mirror is folded or out of place then image
tailgate applique and on both exterior mirrors. stitching may not be correct.
When driver activates SVS by switch while driving forward • Use the Surround View System only when all the doors
above 15 km/h vehicle speed , it assists by providing rear and the tailgate are closed.
surroundings view. • The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera
images and the car image is a standard graphic shown by
the system. Hence the car image shown on the screen is
Before using the system, Make sure that the camera lenses are clean and not real and may not represent your actual vehicle.
not covered by any dust or other obstructions that may impair the system.
• Objects and obstacles above the camera height or out of
Disclaimer the field of view of the cameras are not displayed.
• The cameras in Surround View System provide only the • Camera lenses distort the actual view surroundings to
view and do not detect or alarm if any obstacles are in capture more coverage. The objects appear are altered
the view. Driver must check for the surrounding for any and may not be dimensionally same as real as on the
possible collisions with obstacles. screen.
• There is a noticeable blind area of about 20cm where the • The accuracy of the orientation decreases when the
cameras cannot see around the periphery of the vehicle. vehicle is raised/lowered based on the occupant’s weight.
Driver must be careful to check for any obstacles in the
blind areas.
The display screen shows the direction in which the rear of the vehicle is
• Surround View System provides the views by stitching the travelling when showing rear view. The front of the vehicle swings out more
views from the four cameras with respect to their than the rear of the vehicle. Maintain sufficient distance to the obstacles so
geometric orientations. If the position or the installation that the exterior mirrors or the corners of the vehicle does not collide with
any obstacles.

9.3.1 SVS Activation and Deactivation SVS deactivates when one of the following action is
performed
Use any of the following methods to activate SVS
• Press SVS Hard Switch on center fascia switch bank. • Driver presses “Close button” in
Infotainment screen.
• When SVS hard switch is pressed
DRIVE
MODE
again.
ON OFF OFF
• When driver activates SVS through Reverse gear or at

lower speeds (< 15 km/h) then SVS display goes off if
vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h while driving forward.
• When reverse gear is engaged, SVS cannot be deactivated by

SVS hard switch press.
Select “Surround View” Icon from
Infotainment screen.
• System activates when the engine is running and the shift SVS is a supplementary driving assist function. Always check
lever is in the R (Reverse) position regardless of vehicle the vehicle's surroundings for safety. Do not solely rely on
speed or switch position. what is displayed on the screen. What you see on the screen
may differ from the actual vehicle's location.

9-32
9.3.2 SVS Views

• Swipe your finger
SVS provides different Views, Drive blind spot view monitor, drawing an oval shape to
Video Recording, Parking Guidelines, Parking Assistance etc. view complete 360
to assist the driver. In certain views, you can rotate 3D degree surroundings or
surroundings. Refer below sections on how to use each you can swipe clockwise
function / anticlockwise in top/
bottom area of screen to
How to select Views view the 3D
surroundings.
• To display the icon bar, touch the notch in top middle of
screen.
• Touch an icon 1-8 to select a desired view.
3D Surroundings View will not be available at vehicle speed
• above 15 km/h
To select 3D surroundings view, first press
Icon and then desired view.
When you touch car model in the bird’s eye view area, an
oval will appear with 8 camera icons to switch different
3D views.

Sl. Description
Icons
No
This view assists you with front

1. surroundings view for maneuvering in
front of the vehicle.
This view assists you with front

2. surroundings view for maneuvering in
rear of the vehicle.
This view helps you with left side view

3. near the front tire when parking.
This view helps you with right side view

4. near the front tire when parking.
This view helps you to see the objects

Oval in bird’s eye view will be automatically hidden after 8 5. closer to rear bumper.
second of no operation.

9-34
Sl. Description Sl. Description

Icons Icons
No No
When you touch this area, front
This view helps you to see the objects 10. surroundings view will be seen in the left
6. closer to front bumper. screen area
When you touch this area, rear
11. Refer surroundings will be seen in the left
In these views, you can see the areas
7. Image screen area
surrounding the vehicle in 3D.
No: When you touch this area, left
You can have each camera wider view 12. W62K47 surroundings will be seen in the left
(almost 180 degree view) by pressing screen area
this icon which helps in crossing
junctions. When you touch this area, right
13. surroundings will be seen in the left
8. Also When you are in 3D surroundings screen area
mode , you can have 3D surroundings in
full screen view by pressing this icon.
you can exit full screen view by touching You can view SVS settings option using
icon. 14.
this Icon.
Refer This view is bird’s eye view / 2D top view

Image which gives top down view of vehicle
9. surrounding by stitching all four camera
No: You can capture screen shot of
W62K47 images. 15. Infotainment screen using this Icon.

Default View Selection Automatic Side View

You can select 2D or 3D as default view and when you
activate SVS , it shows 2D or 3D surroundings view based on
your selection. Touch SVS settings icon and
enable Automatic Side
If you select 2D view, you can select Normal or Wide View as View. You can see left/right
default view to be shown whenever you activate SVS. 3D view in Infotainment
when left/right turn
indicator is activated in
forward /D gear.
To select default view,
touch SVS Settings icon and
then touch
A pop-up message on the screen appears

When:
- The tailgate is opened.
- The driver's door is opened.
- The passenger's door is opened.
Surround view system displays the combined images from

the four cameras. Therefore, the displayed image may be
different from the actual vehicle position and parking
guideline, etc. Make sure that no persons or animals or any
objects/materials are in the maneuvering area. Pay
attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car.

9-36
Transparent Bottom View (If equipped) 9.3.3 Static & Dynamic Guidelines
When you touch on SVS car in bird’s eye view, SVS car Disclaimer
changes to semi-transparent and view beneath the ground
(Transparent Bottom View) will be visible once the vehicle Static and dynamic guidelines can be used as references
starts moving as lane marking under vehicle bottom is only and may differ if camera orientation is altered due to
visible in below image. passenger occupancy.
Until the vehicle moves, the

bottom portion is shown as Dynamic Guidelines
black opaque box indicate the path the
Touch again on SVS car in vehicle will traverse with
bird’s eye view to revert to the current steering angle.
opaque car model.
• Static Guidelines indicate the placement of the vehicle

with respect to the parking slot.
Transparent Bottom View will not be available at vehicle
speed above 15 km/h • During parking, you can compare the Static guidelines
against the Parking Slot Lines to know if your vehicle
placement is in line with the parking slot lines.
Transparent bottom view is based on image stored in the • Color coding (Red,Yellow,Green) on the static lines help in
memory based on past few image frames taken some time assessing the distance of the obstacles [at the ground
back and doesn’t display live feed. Pay attention and ensure plane] from the vehicle’s boundary.
safety before maneuvering the car.

• Dynamic Guidelines
Orange indicate the path • It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking
the vehicle will traverse area to park car safely.
with the current steering
angle.
You can select from settings Choose
to have parking guidelines Vertical
(Static and Dynamic) in 2D Parking icon
or/and 3D Views. from SVS settings. Below
overlays (Ref Img No:
W62K54) will appear on
9.3.4 Parallel and Vertical (Perpendicular) Parking either side.
Assistance
Disclaimer Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking
Parallel and Perpendicular Parking are only assistance and • Move the vehicle either forward or backward so that the
driver should take care of surrounding for collisions. end point of the shortest arc [either blue or green, based
on the side in which the vehicle will be parked], is
A. Vertical/Perpendicular Parking coinciding with the parking slot line. (Blue arc line as
shown in the image Ref. Img. No. W62K54)
Step 1:Selecting the Perpendicular Parking Mode
• Once it is done, turn the steering wheel in the direction of
Drive ahead of the parking slot so that Camera can have the the parking slot, till the rack end/extreme end move of
parking slot view. steering wheel.

9-38
Step 3: Parking the Vehicle B. Parallel Parking

• Start Reversing the vehicle until the static lines are Step 1: Choose the Parallel Parking Mode
parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering
straight, and reverse car until the vehicle is in final • Drive ahead of the parking slot, so that Camera can have
position in the slot. Parking is Complete the parking slot view and choose Parallel parking icon
• Steering will be straight if both dynamic and static lines from settings.
are overlapping
• In the below image (Ref

Img. No. W62K55)
vehicle is in line with the Two green rectangular
parking slot lines, so at boxes will appear on either
this instance, the side as below image (Ref
steering should be made Img. No. W62K56).
straight.
Step 2: Keeping the Vehicle Ready for parking

• Move the vehicle forward or backward, so that the one of
the rectangular box is placed inside the parking slot
• Make sure there are no obstacles in the green parking
slot after orange pole.
• Turn the steering wheel in the direction in which parking
is intended.

Step 3: Park the Vehicle • Now turn the steering in

• Hold the steering in the current position once selecting the opposite direction
the parking area after turning the steering wheel as the until the rack end/
area color turns green as in below image screens. extreme end move of
steering wheel [i. e full
rotation] and start
reversing the vehicle.
Below screen (Ref Img.
No. W62K61) will
appear.
• Continue reversing the vehicle until the static lines are

parallel to the parking slot lines. Then, keep the steering
straight, and keep reversing the vehicle until the vehicle is
in final position in the slot. Parking is Complete
• Now start reversing the

vehicle. An arc will • Steering will be straight
appear on the screen as as below (Ref Img. No.
below image (Ref Img. W62K62) if both
No. W62K60). Stop dynamic and static lines
reversing the vehicle are overlapping.
when the arc touches
the end of parking Slot

9-40
9.3.5 Blind-Spot View Monitor

Other Instrument Cluster warning messages and screens takes
Blind-Spot View Monitor displays the driver's and
priority over BVM hence BVM may not be available always when
passenger's side rear view area including some blind area you activate it.
which cannot be viewed from rear view mirror.
BVM view may not be visible clearly during night time due to
To activate the BVM, select Blind View Monitor from camera limitations.
Instrument Cluster Settings.
When the left/right turn indicator is activated, respective BVM is only view and may not detect, alert or control if any
video feed (left/right BVM) will be displayed in Instrument vehicles in blind area. Like all assistance function, BVM has
Cluster. limitations. Sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.
Objects are closer than they appear. Failure to visually confirm
Left Side Right Side that it is safe to change the lane before doing so may result in
crash and serious injury or death.
9.3.6 Drive Video Recording (If equipped)
The cameras installed on the vehicle body record the video

of the vehicle surroundings during driving which can be
used for fault diagnosis, accident evidence identification and
to capture special event during driving.
To turn off BVM, deactivate turn indicator. SD card is used to store the recorded video.
When there is no SD card, system shows “No SD card” text.

General and Emergency Recording How to access DVR screen

When the engine is started, video recording starts and files Open SVS settings and touch the "Drive Video Recording"
are saved in “General Video” folder inside DVR interface. icon to access the DVR function.
Below screen appears with “Live View”.
In General Video Folder, the old recording files will be
overwritten cyclically to keep the latest recordings.
It will be disabled in setting or if already in DVR screen it will
come out when vehicle speed > 5 kmph or Blind View
Monitor is ON or Vehicle is in Reverse Gear.
A: General Video
You can record special event during driving by SVS hard B: Emergency Video
switch long press (approximately 4 seconds). These videos
are saved in “Emergency Video” folder inside DVR interface.
Emergency Video Recording
Videos of deployed crash, Automatic Emergency Braking
events etc. are also saved in “Emergency Video” folder inside Under the DVR display interface, click "Back" icon to exit the
DVR interface. DVR screen.
Emergency Videos will be recorded and saved in memory

when the conditions met and battery connection is intact
and not disturbed by any means. The recording mark and recording time appear on the “Live
View” screen when a video is getting recorded.
Video clips stored in the Emergency Folder can’t be

overwritten and can be deleted by user only.. "Live View" can be accessed even if there is no SD card.

9-42
Video Playback
1: To close a video
• Under DVR interface, click "Emergency Video" folder or 2: To replay previous video
"General Video" folder to replay any video file.
3: To play video fast
• Saved video file name is as per date and time of recorded backward
video. Video files are saved with .AVI file extension. 4: Pause/play
1 2 3 4 5 6
Eg. File Name - 20151203_163028.AVI 5: To play video slow
20151203 - YYYYMMDD (Y-Year, M-Month, D-Day) forward
6: To replay next video
163028 - HHMMSS (H-Hour,M-Minute, S-Second)
• Click the “edit” button to delete/move video files. DVR Settings
Current recording will get paused during video playback. • In DVR mode, click
setting button to enter
the setting interface.
• Video length setting: DVR
video clip recording time
can be selected as 3
Playback and editing
minutes or 5 minutes
interface show as below:
based on settings.
When memory is full, System shows a text message for user

to delete files.

9.3.7 SVS Troubleshooting -When the head lights are not bright due to dirt on the lens
of if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
• When there is any error in system/camera lost
connection, the corresponding camera view on screen -When strong light rays falls on the camera. (For example,
shows green color with an icon indicating camera error. the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise
Visit nearest Mahindra Service Center for assistance. of sunset).
• In case of malfunction , system shows a pop-up message -When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example,
"Please Contact Service Center" when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge).
• Video may get blur if camera is exposed to bright light
9.3.8 System Limitations and area around is dark/shadowed.
• SVS Camera images are reproduced slightly delayed and
• Surround View System is subject to certain system not in real time due to processing and stitching.
limitation and may be unavailable or only partially
available in the following situations: • Sometimes during SVS activation , you may not see stable
video feed as some parameters update happens.
-During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When SVS is used in the area with AC light sources , black
-At night or in very dark places. bands might be seen running in the video feed.
-Display may get flicker, if the area around cameras area is • If video file is corrupted , you may observe black screen
lit by LED or fluorescent lighting. while replaying the video and system will reset to default
view.
-If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to
hot areas. • During video playback, you may observe green screen
sometimes.
-If your vehicle got damaged and if any camera position and
the settings got changed.
-When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres in front of the
camera lens..

9-44
System Maintenance
• DVR may not record properly if the power is interrupted • Always keep all camera lens clean. Foreign materials on
in between of usage. e. g during crash, low battery, the camera lens can cause system error and reduced
removal of battery and other reasons. visibility.
• Use SD card as fresh and formatted before first use and • Always use clean water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean
do not swap SD cards frequently. the lens
• SVS is only a supplementary function and may display • Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the
obstacles from a distorted perspective. cameras with a power washer.
• Avoid using SVS if you are having eye color blindness or • When SVS parts need to be replaced due to damage/
impaired color vision. non-functioning / any other reason or abnormal video
with "No Panoramic Calibration" text , Visit nearest
• Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be Mahindra Service Center for recalibration.
far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be
closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines • Always clean camera lens smoothly and don’t apply much
to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments pressure.
and increase the risk of collision with your car.
• SVS video is shown based on driver activation but it
cannot be used to see a complete surrounding view
which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior
and interior view mirrors.
• Some obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult
recognize due to stitched images, hence sole-reliance on
the system may result in a collision.

EMERGENCIES
10 EMERGENCIES 10.2 Towing
10.1 Hazard Warning Flashers Tow hook is a screw on type, and it is available in the tool kit
organizer behind the rear seats on the floor.
The hazard warning flasher
button is in the central Front Tow Hook Rear Tow Hook
bezel switch bank. Press the
DRIVE
button to turn ON the
hazard warning flashers, all
ON MODE
OFF OFF
directional turn signals will

flash to warn oncoming
traffic.
This is an emergency warning system and should be used

only when there is an emergency. Use it when your vehicle
is disabled and is a safety hazard for other motorists.
Hazard warning flasher will work in all positions of the Remove/pry out the tow hook cover in the Front/Rear
ignition key and even when the vehicle is fully locked. bumper using a screwdriver, Screw in the tow eye in the
anti-clockwise direction (tow eye is LH threaded) by holding
the cover and tighten. Fasten a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles to the towing hook.
With extended use, the hazard warning flasher may drain
your vehicle battery. The rear tow hook should be used when your vehicle is
utilized for towing other vehicles.
If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing
service. If a towing service is unavailable in an emergency,
your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a towing cable or
chain.

EMERGENCIES
10.2.1 Towing Equipment
Towing Wheels
Towing All Wheel
Option 2WD OFF the
Condition Drive Models
Ground
Flat Bed
Towing � On Trailer ALL �
Flat Towing ✗ Flat Tow NONE ✗
Sling Type
Towing
(Front Wheel � Front ✗
Lift)
Dolly Tow
Sling Type
Towing
Sling Type Towing
(Rear Wheel ✗ REAR ✗
Lift)
Towing equipment are of two types:

Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with
hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame
or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground.
This is not a good method of towing as it may damage the
vehicle's suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type
equipment
Flat Bed Towing
Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a
truck. This is the safest and best way of towing

10-2
EMERGENCIES
10.3 Emergency Assistance
In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps to connect with our Emergency assistance service either
from the car or through mobile phone.
Emergency Assistance From Vehicle SOS Call from vehicle^

e-Call# : 1 2
In an unfortunate event of your car meeting with an accident, triggering 2
the airbags, your XUV700 will initiate the following actions -
1. A call will be triggered automatically

from your XUV700 to emergency
services SOS switch near IRVM SOS button in infotainment
For SOS call, the driver can either operate the switch located in the
overhead console near IRVM  or touch SOS icon on Infotainment  .
2. Mahindra With You Hamesha team will call you back for By operating the SOS icon, a call will be triggered automatically from
support and guidance your XUV700 to the emergency services
RSA call from vehicle ^
3 3
^ This feature is available only in cars ﬁtted with telematics unit By touching the RSA icon in infotainment ,
your XUV700 will connect you to Mahindra
# On cars without telematics unit, this function will work if a mobile phone is Roadside Assistance for support.
paired through Bluetooth and connected to the car at the time of the incident.
 RSA icon in infotainment

EMERGENCIES

10-4
EMERGENCIES
10.4 Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks If the engine stalls while driving
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed • Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line.
the correct starting procedure and that you have sufficient Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
fuel. • Turn ON your hazard warning flashers and check for any
If the engine is not cranking or is cranking too slowly / malfunction lamps in the instrument cluster.
intermittently • Turn the ignition OFF, wait for approximately 90 seconds
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean. and try starting the engine again.
2. If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, switch ON • . If the vehicle still does not start, contact an Mahindra
the interior lamps. Authorised Dealer.
3. If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF

when the starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak If the engine stalls while running, the power assist for the brakes will not
or discharged battery. Try jumpstarting. Follow ‘jump work. Braking will be much harder than usual.
starting’ instructions given later in this chapter.
If the engine speed does not increase
4. Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box • If the engine speed does not increase when the
and Instrument Panel Fuse Box.
accelerator pedal is depressed, there may be a problem
If the engine cranks normally, but does not start in the Engine Management System, electrical or
electronic controls.
If the engine is cranking normally, but if the engine does not
start even after repeated cranking, Contact an Mahindra • In case of certain faults, the engine may go to limp home
Authorised Dealer. mode, which is indicated by the check engine lamp.
• Have your vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer as soon as possible.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than
15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

EMERGENCIES
10.5 Engine Overheating be too hot. Verify that the engine coolant level in the coolant
recovery tank is maintained between the 'Min' and 'Max'
If the temperature gauge moves beyond the normal mark. Check for possible fluid leakages. Check for damages
operating range toward “H” mark. it indicates the engine to heat exchangers and connecting hoses. Also verify that
overheating that may damage the engine. the radiator shrouds, cooling fan blades and the engine belt
all are in good condition.
When the engine overheats, the Engine Management
System reduces engine power substantially and may even If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest
shut the engine OFF; it is dangerous to continue driving Mahindra Authorised Dealer for help. In case, no system
when the engine has overheated. You need to first cool the leakage/ failure is suspected, driving can be continued.
engine down before starting to drive again.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any
Follow the below instructions to cool the engine down: system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated.
However, if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly,
• Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle
vehicle to a stop at the side of the road checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer as soon as
• Turn ON the hazard warning flashers possible.
• Keep the engine running at idle

• Engage the parking brake Refer to the 'High Engine Coolant Temperature' section
under the 'Instrument cluster features' chapter for details.
• Switch off the air conditioner
• Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops
sufficiently such that the temperature gauge is around If the high engine coolant temperature warning is ignored,
halfway between C and H the engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard engine
Now switch the engine OFF and carefully open the bonnet/ components from overheating and consequent failure.
hood to visibly inspect the engine cooling system parts. Be Abrupt engine shut-off can lead to uncontrollable driving
cautious while doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still condition and accidents.

10-6
EMERGENCIES
Stay clear of hot and rotating vehicle parts while visually both cables and terminals. Use a stiff wire brush to
inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the cooling system remove all corrosion. Reconnect the cables to the
is under high pressure and temperature. Never open the battery terminals before jump starting the vehicle.
pressure cap of the degassing tank when the engine is hot.
Not taking precautions may lead to serious injury to your 4. The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign
skin/eyes. (+) and will usually have a RED cable attached on it.
5. The negative terminal will be marked with a minus
sign (-) and will usually have a BLACK cable attached to
For optimum performance of the cooling system, you must it.
maintain the required coolant level and use only 6. A standalone booster battery can be used to start the
recommended engine coolant. engine when the vehicle battery is low.
7. Take jumper cables and unwind the red and black
10.6 Jump Starting cables.
Jump start can be performed when the battery charge is low 8. Wear safety gear and connect one end of red clamp of
which can be confirmed by performing the following the jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
operations: discharged battery and other end to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery.
1. Turn headlamp ON and check whether lights are dim
9. Similarly, connect one end of black clamp of the
2. Try to start the vehicle and check whether engine jumper cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
cranks slowly or not crank at all. booster battery and other end to the negative (-)
3. Open the bonnet and locate the battery. terminal of the discharged battery.
10. Once the jump starting assembly is done, crank the
engine for starting.
It may be necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s
battery cables from the battery terminals and clean

EMERGENCIES
11. Once the vehicle gets started, carefully remove the

Booster
jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment. Battery
• Once the vehicle gets

12. Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from
started, carefully remove
the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery and
the jumper cables in the
the other end of the black clamp from the negative (-)
reverse order of
terminal of the booster battery.
attachment
Positive (Red)
Discharged
13. Similarly, disconnect the red clamp of the jumper Battery
Negative (Black)
W12M04
cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
battery and the other end of the red clamp from the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
Make sure none of the cables are dangling into the engine
14. Close the bonnet compartment, where they could be exposed to moving parts.
15. Keep the vehicle's engine running and slightly • Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle starts. Do
accelerate the vehicle to charge the battery. this in the reverse of the order in which they were
attached, and don't let any of the cables or clamps touch
each other (or dangle into the engine compartment)
If the problem persists on next starting cycle, please visit • Disconnect the black clamp of the jumper cable from the
Mahindra Authorised Dealer negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery
• Disconnect the other end of the black clamp from the
negative (-) terminal of the booster battery
• Disconnect the red clamp of the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster battery
• Disconnect the other end of the red clamp from the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery

10-8
EMERGENCIES
Replace any positive (+) red post protective covers if applicable 10.7 Limp Home Mode
(You have had to remove or open these in the beginning) These
covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the battery Limp Home Mode is an emergency declared by
the EMS (Engine Management System) due to
• Keep the vehicle's engine running. Run the vehicle above failure or malfunction of one/more critical
idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the accelerator).
sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine
This should give the battery enough charge to start the
Management System) will revert back to basic minimum
vehicle again. If it does not start, either your battery
requirement (fuel quantity / injection timings) to aid the
might be dead or faulty alternator.
driver to bring the vehicle back to the nearest workshop.
The drivability & fuel consumption will be greatly affected.
Improper jump starting procedures can result in battery explosion If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle
and acid burn hazard. performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine
Loosely connected battery cables could damage the electronic management system which triggers/activates the Limp
control units. Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check
engine lamp illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this
To disconnect battery terminals, wait for at least 2 minutes to
allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to personal injury. mode, the vehicle speed is limited, and the accelerator
pedal may not function normally. It is recommended you
While disconnecting, always disconnect the -VE terminal first and contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately for
while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal last.
assistance.
Do not connect battery terminals with opposite polarity, it will lead
to alternator, Electronic control unit failures. If the above telltale is ON/blinking, It indicates an emergency
Towing a vehicle to start could be dangerous. The vehicle being situation declared by the EMS (Engine Management System)
towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing the two due to failure of one/more critical sensors/actuators and
vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants. triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode.
Modern vehicles with electronic management systems should not
be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter leads.

EMERGENCIES
10.8 Fuses & Relays

A fuse is electric protection device. A fuse is placed in an Fit replacement fuse with the same rating as the one you have
removed.
electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating
of the fuse, it blows off. The element in the fuse melts, opening
the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit from
being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses
element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it must except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller should be used
be replaced with a new one. to remove the fuse from its position.
10.8.1 Engine Compartment Fuse Box

Switch the ignition and all
electrical equipment OFF
before touching or
attempting to change a 5
A53 V21
12V
G.CARTIER
005321-OMR
80
30
+
5
20 240 077
fuse.
10
40A
85
87
T
10
5
20
12V
G.CARTIER
60
60
40
80
40
30
+
10 10
20 240 077
15
60
60
40A
15
85
87
T
60
60
40
40
10
10
40
40
12V
G.CARTIER
10 20
80
30
+
20 240 077
25
25
60
60
70A
G.CARTIER
>PARB-GF30<
86
87
5
85
87
40A
T
40
40
30
30
10
12V
30
15
10
03
R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13

FUSE
NO.
F1
FUSE
RATING (A)
15 (DIESEL)
LOAD DETAIL
Fuse puller is available at
the engine compartment
30 (PETROL) EMS BATT 1
F48 F36
EMS BATT 2 (DIESEL)
F35 R23 R22 F2 10 VVTIN/EX, VOP, CANISTER
R4 F47 R20
F34 R14 (PETROL)
10 (DIESEL) HFM/FMU/FEED PUMP RELAY (DIESEL)
F46 F3
Engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle

F33 15 (PETROL) IGNITION COILS (PETROL)
F45 R21 F4 -
F32 SPARE
R24 F5 - SPARE
F44 F31 F6 5 EMS ECU PERMANENT BATT
F20 F13 F7 -
F30 SPARE
F43 F12 R19 F8 20 HORN
R3 F29 F19
R15 F9 10 HEAD LAMP BATT +VE 1/ DRL RH
F42 R25 F11 F10 10 HEAD LAMP BATT +VE 2/ DRL LH
F28 F11 15 TCU BATT (AT ONLY)
F18 F10
F41 F27 EMS LOAD - RELAYS / WIF / EGR BP
F12 15
F9 (DIESEL)
F26 F17
fuse box .
F40 10 EMS LOADS - LAMBDA / (PETROL)
R26 F8 R18 F13 10
F25 R16 BRAKE LAMP (SWITCH)
R2 F39 F16 F7
F14 30 FRONT BLOWER
F24 F15 - SPARE
F38 F23 F15 F6 F16 25 ABS VALVE (ABS ESP)
battery. Release the lock to access the fuse box contents.

R27 40 ABS VALVE (ESP EPB)
F22 F5 F3 F17 - SPARE
F37 F14 F18 40
F21 F4 F19
ABS PUMP
R1 F2 R17 - SPARE
F51 F50 F49 F20 40 EMS MAIN
F1 F21-F24 - SPARE
ALT+ RAD F25 10 SCR RELAY (DIESEL)
EPS BAT+
USE SPECIFIED INTERCOOLER FAN (PETROL)
M&M PART NO. FUSES & RELAYS
F26-F29 - SPARE
F30 10 AC COMPRESSOR EVDC
RELAY NO. RELAY TYPE F31 20
APPLICATION DETAIL FUEL PUMP
R2 ISO POWER RELAY(70A) COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED
F32-F35 - SPARE
F36 5 SHIFTER SOLENOID (AT ONLY)
R3 ISO POWER RELAY(70A) GLOW PLUG (DIESEL ONLY) F37 30 STARTER
R6 ULTRA MICRO RELAY(20A)INTERCOOLER FAN F38 50
(PETROL ONLY) GLOW PLUG (DIESEL ONLY)
R8 ULTRA MICRO RELAY(20A) SHIFTER F39 60
SOLENOID (AT ONLY) F40
MAIN BATT - 3
R11 ULTRA MICRO RELAY(20A) 40 COOLING FAN LOW SPEED
Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the clips from both
FUEL PUMP F41 60
R13 ULTRA MICRO RELAY(20A) MAIN BATT - 2
HORN RELAY F42 60 MAIN BATT - 4
R14 MINI RELAY(40A) F43
EMS MAIN 60 MAIN BATT - 1
R15 MINI RELAY(40A) COOLING FAN LOW SPEED F44 5 ABS IGN
R16 MINI RELAY(40A) F45 5 TCU IGN (AT ONLY)
FRONT BLOWER F46 5
R22 ISO MICRO RELAY(35A) STARTER
EMS IGN
R23 ULTRA MICRO RELAY(20A) WATER PUMP (DIESEL)
AC COMPRESSOR F47 10 TURBO REC VALVE / IC FAN RELAY
R25 ULTRA MICRO RELAY(20A) SCR (DIESEL ONLY) (PETROL)
R1, R4, R5, R7, R9, R10, R12, F48 10 (DIESEL) NOx (DIESEL)
R17, R18, R19, R20, 5 (PETROL) EMS RELAY LOADS (PETROL)
SPARES F49 125
R21, R24, R26 & R27 EPS
F50 60 RADIATOR FAN (HIGH SPEED)
F51 150 ALTERNATOR
sides using both hands simultaneously. Spare fuses are

provided in the fuse box for replacement of blown fuses.

10-10
EMERGENCIES
Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown “EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses)
fuse.
Fuse Fuse
Circuit Rating
No.
R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 EMS Batt 1 (Diesel) 15A
F1
EMS Batt 1 (Petrol) 30A
F48 F36
R22 EMS Batt 2 (Diesel) 10A
F47
F35 R23 F2
R4 R20 R14 VVTIN/EX, VOP, Canister (Petrol) 10A
F34
F46
F33 R21 HFM/FMU/FEED Pump Relay (Diesel) 10A
F45 F3
F32 R24 Ignition Coils (Petrol) 15A
F44 F31 F20 F13 Spare —
F4
F43 F30
F12 R19 R15 —
R3 F29 F19 F5 Spare
F42 R25 F11
F28 F6 EMS ECU Permanent Batt 5A
F18 F10
F41 F27 F7 Spare —
F9
F17
F40
F26
R26 F8
F8 Horn 20A
F25
R18 R16
R2 F39 F16 F7 F9 Head Lamp Batt +ve 1/ DRL RH 10A
F24
F6 F10 Head Lamp Batt +ve 2/ DRL LH 10A
F38 F23 F15
R27 F5 F3 F11 TCU Batt (AT only) 15A
F22
F37 F14
F21 F4
F2 R17 EMS Loads – Relay /WIF/EGR BP 15A
R1
F51 F50 F49
F12 (Diesel)
F1
ALT+ RAD EPS BAT+ EMS Loads – Lambda/(Petrol) 10A
USE SPECIFIED
FUSES & RELAYS F13 Brake Lamp (Switch) 10A

EMERGENCIES
“EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses) “EF” Fuses (Mini Fuses)

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
Circuit Rating Circuit Rating
No. No.
F14 Front Blower 40A F39 Main Batt-3 60A
F15 Spare — F40 Cooling Fan Low Speed 40A
ABS Valve (ABS ESP) 25A F41 Main Batt - 2 60A
F16
ABS Valve (ESP EPB) 40A F42 Main Batt - 4 60A
F17 Spare — F43 Main Batt - 1 60A
F44 ABS IGN 5A
F18 ABS Pump 40A
F45 TCU IGN (AT Only) 5A
F19 Spare —
F46 EMS IGN 5A
F20 EMS Main 40A
Water Pump (Diesel)
F21 – Spare —
F24 F47 Turbo Rec Valve /IC Fan Relay 10A
SCR Relay (Diesel) (Petrol)
F25 10A NOx (Diesel) 10A
Intercooler Fan (Petrol) F48
Spare _ EMS Relay Loads (Petrol) 5A
F26 – 29
AC compressor EVDC 10A F49 EPS 125A
F30
F50 Radiator Fan (High Speed) 60A
F31 Fuel Pump 20A
F51 Alternator 150A
F32–F35 Spare _
F36 Shifter Solenoid (AT Only) 5A
F37 Starter 30A
F38 Glow plug (Diesel Only) 50A

10-12
EMERGENCIES
Relays 10.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Opening

Procedure
Relay Relay Type Application Detail
No. Wide open the driver door and slide the driver seat backwards.
R2 ISO Power Relay (70A) Cooling Fan High This fuse box as located below the Instrument Panel on the driver
Speed side
R3 ISO Power Relay (70A) Glow Plug (Diesel Follow the below procedure to access the IP fuse box,
Only)
R6 Ultra Micro Relay (20A) Intercooler Fan (Petrol
Only)
R8 Ultra Micro Relay (20A) Shifter Solenoid (AT • Partially detach the front
Only) RHS side door static
R11 Ultra Micro Relay (20A) Fuel pump panel seal.
R13 Ultra Micro Relay (20A) Horn relay
R14 Mini Relay (40A) EMS main
R15 Mini Relay (40A) Cooling fan low speed
R16 Mini Relay (40A) Front blower
R22 ISO Micro Relay (35A) Starter
• Pull & remove the IP RH
R23 Ultra Micro Relay (20A) AC compressor side cover.
R25 Ultra Micro Relay (20A) SCR (diesel only)
R1,R4, R5, R7, R9, R10, R12, R17,
R18, R19, R20, R21, R24, R26 & Spares
R27

EMERGENCIES
• Partially detach the IP driver lower trim assembly.

• Remove all the electrical connectors from IP driver lower
trim and outward the panel to access the Instrument
Panel fuse box.
• Using a star screw driver, loosen and remove the IP

driver lower trim bottom mounting star screws.

10-14
EMERGENCIES
25
30
30
30
5
5
15
5 25
52
25
25
01
5
10 30
5
5
15
30
30
15
7.5
01 5
5
5 5
5
5
7.5
10
5
10
5
5
5
10
30
15
5

EMERGENCIES
Fuses Fuses
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
Circuit Rating Circuit Rating
No. No.
F1 Spare 20A F23 MBFM Batt 4 20A
F2 Rear Power Window 30A F24 Sunroof Batt 20A
F3 Power Window LH 30A F25 Gateway Batt 5A
F4 Spare 15A F26 Batt - Cluster Display 7.5A
F5 Accessory Power 25A F27 Pke Batt 2/ Ignition Switch Batt 10A
F6 Power Window RH 30A F28 Batt Power Seat Switch, OBD, HVAC 5A
F7 ORVM Switch, WLC 5A F29 RLS Batt 5A
F8 Spare 5A F30 Rear Blower Batt 10A
F9 360 Camera Batt 5A F31 Batt - Key Lock Solenoid AT and ITS 5A
F10 ITM Batt 15A F32 Spare 20A
F11 Roof Lamp Batt 5A F33 Flush Handle Batt 2 10A
F12 Spare 10A F34 ESCL Batt 7.5A
F13 Spare 10A F35 Eng Comp IGN 5A
F14 Infotainment Batt 15A F36 IGN - Airbag 5A
F15 MBFM Batt 5 15A F37 IGN - APAS, 360/RVC, Flush Handle 5A
F16 MBFM Batt 1 25A IGN - WLC, Radar, Windshield 5A
F17 MBFM Batt 2 30A F38
Camera
F18 Flush Handle Batt 1 10A F39 IGN - EPS 5A
F19 PKE Batt1 / Immo Batt 10A IGN - CB Switch, Reverse Lamp MT, 7.5A
F20 ICC Batt 5A F40
DS Switch
F21 IGN - HVAC, Amplifier, Infotainment 5A F41 IGN - PKE/IMMO 5A
IGN - MBFM, Gateway, Cluster, 5A F42 IGN - ITM, EPB Switch, Power Seat 5A
F22 Display F43 IGN - Reverse Lamp AT 10A

10-16
EMERGENCIES
Fuses
Fuse Fuse
Circuit Rating Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre.
No. You could be hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until
F44 ACC - Amp, HVAC, Infotainment 5A you reach a safe location.
F45 SPARE 25A
F46 ACC - Power Seat Vent 10A Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is
F47 ACC - Rear Power Socket 15A very dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety
F48 Front Power USB 5A equipment and training. The jack provided along with the
F49 ACC - PKE, ICC 5A vehicle is to be used only for changing a spare tyre. It is
never to be used to perform any other maintenance or
F50 Start 5A
repair on the vehicle.
F51 MBFM Batt3 25A
F52 Spare 30A
F53 Power Seat Batt 15A
F54 Amplifier Batt 30A Never place any part of your body under any portion of the
vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be
* - if equipped crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders
away from the vehicle.
10.9 Changing a Flat Tyre Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you
cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat
In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming
gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the traffic. After changing a flat Tyre, never store the tyre or other
road to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This
spot with firm ground. Stop the engine and turn ON your loose equipment could strike an occupant in the event of a
hazard warning flashers. sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper
place.
Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of
the vehicle on the side away from traffic.

EMERGENCIES
The following sections outline the procedure for changing a When your safety is secured, contact your Mahindra
flat tyre; Authorised Dealer for your emergency service
10.9.1 Warning Triangle 10.9.2 Tool Kit

The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety. The tool kit is placed in the tool kit organizer behind the rear
seats on the floor. It consist of jack, Screwdriver (+and-), Jack
operating lever, Tow bar, DEO Spanner (10mm x 12mm) and
Wheel spanner
It is placed in the tool kit

organizer behind the rear
seats on the floor. A B C D
When you pull over your vehicle to a safe place, set up a

o c
warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Meters
behind, Night: 200 Meters behind) W62K36
G F E
When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving
Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of A Jack Assembly E Screwdriver
traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind B Wheel Spanner F Jack Operating Lever
your vehicle (Daytime: 100 Meters, Night: 200 Meters) to
DEO Spanner 10mm
warn other vehicles C G Tow Bar
x 12mm
Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away Diesel Filter water * – Diesel Variant Only
D
from the traffic. drain Tool*

10-18
EMERGENCIES
Jack is located on the tool kit organizer behind the rear seats
on the floor. To remove the jack out, follow the process
below:
Locate the plug covering

the securing nut below the
Lift the Luggage floor Lid as shown in the illustration rear luggage compartment
floor carpet and remove
Take the jack out from the tool kit organizer the plug
10.9.3 Spare Wheel Removal
Spare wheel is located below the floor at the rear end of the
vehicle. It is held in place by a securing nut underneath the
rear luggage compartment floor carpet. Loosen the securing nut
anticlockwise to winch
down/lower the secured
spare wheel to the ground

EMERGENCIES
• While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid

sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt
steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that
cause sudden engine braking.
• Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a
Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at

• Tilt and Remove the securing bracket out of the spare high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to
wheel hub an accident causing death or serious injury.
• Remove/pull away the spare wheel
Refer to “Temporary Spare Wheel” section in the Starting and Driving
chapter for more details.
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only.
Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running. The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is smaller in size (T155/90 R18
113M) and for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for
continuous running.
When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel
• Temporary Spare Wheel provided is specifically designed
for your vehicle.
• Do not use more than one Temporary Spare Wheel
simultaneously.
• Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary
Spare Wheel.

10-20
EMERGENCIES
10.9.4 Wheel Bolt Loosening

Before loosening the wheel bolt, Wheel cover/cap must be
removed. To remove the wheel cover, wrap the tip of a screwdriver
with cloth, insert it near the lugs of the wheel cover and pry the A: Flat Tyre
cover away from the wheel. B: Chocks Blocks
B
A
Do not try to pry off the wheel cover by hand alone. Take due care
in handling the wheel cover to avoid unexpected personal injury.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the
vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel,
place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind
3
one of the rear wheels.
1 Always loosen the wheel bolts
before raising the vehicle. Turn
4 5 the wheel bolts anti-clockwise 10.9.5 Jacking
to loosen as per the sequence.
2
Locate the jack points in the

To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the bolt so that the
handle is on the left side. Grab the spanner near the end of the
front or rear as needed.
handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner They can be identified by a
does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts but loosen them slot used to fit the jack
by one or two turns. precisely.
Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner
while tightening or Loosening the wheel bolts.

EMERGENCIES
damage the underbody of vehicle or may allow the vehicle

to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.
Position the jack at the • Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel
correct jacking point. Make changing
sure the jack is positioned
on a level and solid place. • When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top
of or underneath the jack
• Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle
• Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change
the wheel
To raise the vehicle, insert
the jack handle into the • Follow jacking instructions
jack. Fit the other end of the
lever into the square slot of • Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
the wheel spanner and turn supported by the jack
it clockwise to expand the
jack.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.
Ensure no one is in the vehicle. Raise it high enough so that the
spare tyre can be installed. Remember, you will need more ground Remove the wheel bolts. Lift the flat tyre straight off and place it
clearance when putting on the spare tyre than when removing the aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes in the
flat tyre. wheel with the hub. Lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt
inserted through its hole. Wiggle the wheel and press it back for
fitting balance bolts.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Before putting on the wheels, remove any corrosion on the
Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such. Installation of wheels
without good metal to metal contact at the mounting surface can

10-22
EMERGENCIES
cause wheel bolts to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come

off while driving.
1 3 Tighten each bolt a little at a
time in the diagonally
opposite order as shown.
4
Reinstall the wheel bolts with 5 Repeat the process until all
the tapered end inward and 2 the bolts are tight.
tighten by hand. Press the
wheel inward and tighten the
wheel bolts further.
Improperly or loosely tightened wheel bolts are dangerous. The

wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of vehicle
control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the
Never use oil or grease on the bolts. Doing so the spanner slips, wheel bolts are properly/securely tightened to the specified torque.
damaging the bolts and may cause personal injuries. Also, bolts When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body
may loosen, and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a and all other persons are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to
serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt, clean before the ground. Have the wheel bolts tightened with the torque
installing wheel bolts. spanner to 83-104Nm, as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the wheel bolts using the Put the wheel cover into position aligning the nozzle on the wheel
wheel spanner. Turn the jack-operating lever anti-clockwise using to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover. Tap it firmly on the
the wheel spanner to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle sides with your hand to snap it into place.
remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle extension. Do not use
other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands, such Restore the tools (jack, wheel spanner, Punctured tyre, etc.)
as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make sure the spanner is securely in their storage locations.
engaged over the bolt.

EMERGENCIES
Drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the

correct pressure. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking
or adjusting tyre pressure, dirt and moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage or valve damage.

10-24
MAINTENANCE
11 MAINTENANCE
11.1 Dimensions
DIMENSION mm Rear View

Wheel Base 2750
Overall Length 4695
Overall Width 1890
Overall Height 1755
Track Width (Front & Rear) 1630 1630
Front View Side View 1890
1755
2750
4695
1630

MAINTENANCE
11.2 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
ENGINE Diesel (MT/AT/AWD) Petrol (MT/AT)
Displacement/Cubic Capacity 2184 cc 1997 cc
Type 4 Stroke, Turbocharged, DI engine 4 Stroke, Gasoline Direct Injection
Compression Ratio 16 ± 0.5: 1 9.5 ± 0.5: 1
114 kW @ 3750 rpm or
Max. Engine Output 149.2 kW @ 5000 ± 50 rpm
136 kW @ 3500 rpm
360 Nm @ 1500 to 2800 rpm or
Max. Torque 420 Nm @ 1600 to 2800 rpm or 380 Nm @ 1750 to 3000 rpm
450 Nm @ 1750 to 2800 rpm
TRANSMISSION
Type 6 Speed Manual/Automatic
No. of Gears 6 Forward, 1 Reverse
STEERING
Type/Description Column mounted Electric Power Steering
SUSPENSION
Front: Coil Spring with side load compensation on McPherson Strut with Double acting
Hydraulic Shock Absorber
Type/Description
Rear: Multi Link Control Blade Suspension with Double acting Hydraulic Shock Absorber &
Linear Coil Spring

11-2
MAINTENANCE
Technical Specifications
BRAKES
Service Brake Hydraulic & Vacuum assisted Booster with ABS (Standard) & with ESP (Optional)
Front/Rear Disc
Parking Brake Mechanical Hand Operated (Conventional Type) (or)Electric Parking brake
WHEELS & TYRES
Rim Regular (Alloy & Steel) –7J X 17”, Optional – 7J X 18”, Spare wheel –4.5J x 18
Tyres Regular – P235/65 R17, Optional – P235/60 R18, Spare Wheel –T155 /90 R18
Type Radial Tubeless
Front / Rear - 32 (Up to 5 Persons), Front / Rear - 35 (6 Persons to Fully Laden)
Laden Tyre Pressure (Psi)
Spare Wheel Tyre – 60
FUEL
Fuel Tank Capacity 60 liters
DEF Tank Capacity 20 liters (only for Diesel)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage 12V
Battery Rating 72 Ah

MAINTENANCE
11.3 Bulb Specification
Lamp Bulb Wattage Bulb Type No. of Bulbs per Vehicle

Head Lamp - High Beam 12V 55W H7 55W/LED 2
Head Lamp - Low Beam 12V 55W H7 55W/LED 2
DRL / Position Lamp LED —
Turn Signal Lamp (Front) 12V 24W PY24W 2
Turn Signal Lamp (Front) LED
Turn Signal Lamp (Front) Sequential LED Light blade
Turn Signal Lamp (Rear) LEDs
Side Turn Indicator Lamp LEDs
Front Position Lamp 12V 5W W5W 2
Front Fog Lamp LEDs
Front Cornering Lamp LEDs
Rear Position Lamp - Tail gate LEDs
Rear Position Lamp - Quarter slide LEDs
Stop Lamp - Body Side 12V 21W P21W 2
Reverse Lamp 12V 16W W16W 2
Registration Plate Lamp LEDs
High Mounted Stop Lamp LEDs

11-4
MAINTENANCE
11.4 General Owner's Information Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance:
Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get
Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance the performance, dependability, long life and better resale
requirements with longer service intervals to save both your value you expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we've
time and money. However, each regular maintenance, as put together this Maintenance Section. It outlines the
well as day-to-day care is more important to ensure a services required to properly maintain your vehicle and
smooth, trouble-free, safe and economical operation. It is when they should be performed. The focus is on
the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified maintaining your vehicle while it's running great, which goes
maintenance, including general maintenance service is a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses
performed. Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty later.
and emission control system limited warranties specify that
proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on
Warranty and Service Information Guide for complete routine maintenance:
warranty information. • Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through
Where to go for service? your Owner's Manual
Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are • Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section
kept up to date with the latest service information through • Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled
technical bulletins, service tips and in dealership training maintenance in the warranty and Service Information
programmes. They learn to work on Mahindra vehicles Guide
before they work on your vehicle, rather than while they are
working on it. • Consult with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all
your vehicle's needs
You can be confident that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer
service department does the best job to meet the Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle
maintenance requirements on your vehicle reliably and Prepare for the Appointment: If you have warranty work
economically. to be done, be sure to have the right papers with you. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.

MAINTENANCE
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a the terms and provisions of Mahindra warranties applicable
maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants
and accessories are available at any Mahindra Authorised
Prepare a List: Make a written list of your vehicle's Dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance Protect your Warranty: Routine maintenance is not only
log, let the Service adviser/Relationship manager know the best way to help keep your vehicle performing as
about it. intended, it's also the best way to protect your warranty.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified in the
Be Reasonable with Requests: If your list has several items warranty and Service Information Guide will invalidate
and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of
discuss the situation with the Service adviser/Relationship maintenance. We can't stress enough how important it is to
manager and list the items in order of priority. keep records of all maintenance. Damage or failures due to
neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not covered
Need Assistance? : It is recommended talking to an
under warranty.
Mahindra Authorised Dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process. If for some Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and
reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general Service Information Guide’
manager or owner of the dealership.
It's important to document the maintenance of your vehicle.
If an Mahindra Authorised Dealer is unable to resolve the For your convenience to maintain records of service, the
concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care scheduled maintenance coupons are provided in the service
Executive. They would need the following information: coupon booklet. Every time you bring your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance, be sure to present this booklet and
Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number
certify the work. Also record the date of service and mileage
(home and office), Mahindra Authorised Dealer name,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date at the time of service. This will make record keeping easy
and, should your vehicle ever require warranty coverage,
and mileage.
you will have all the documentation to show you've properly
Warranty Information: Read the Warranty Information maintained it.
given in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ for

11-6
MAINTENANCE
Oils, Fluids and Flushing: In many cases, fluid discoloration is a determine the most appropriate mileage to perform the various
normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily maintenance services. This protects your vehicle at the lowest
indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, overall cost to you. Mahindra recommends that you do not deviate
discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or from the maintenance schedules presented in this Maintenance
foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately Schedule.
by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your
Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions
be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a
repair. • Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting
Chemicals and Additives: Non-Mahindra approved chemicals • Set the parking brake
or additives are not required for factory recommended
maintenance. In fact, Mahindra recommends against the use of
• Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving
such additive products unless specifically recommended by unexpectedly
Mahindra for a particular application. • Turn OFF the engine and remove the key
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex • Stay clear of hot vehicle parts
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and performance features. That's • Avoid repeated contact with fluids
why it's important to rely on your Mahindra Authorised Dealer to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle. • Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over
electrical and hot vehicle parts
When planning your maintenance services, consider your
Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs. • Keep all open flames and other burning material like
cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel-related parts
Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits:
Getting your vehicle serviced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways. Hence, it is
recommended to service your vehicle at an Mahindra Authorised Do not start/run the engine when any engine/peripheral
Dealer only. parts are removed.
Maintenance Interval: Mahindra establishes recommended
maintenance intervals based upon engineering testing to

MAINTENANCE
11.5 Engine Compartment
Petrol Layout
A B C D E F G
USE ONLY
MAHINDRA MAXIMILE
PREMIUM OIL
W62K32
A Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir D Engine Oil filling Cap G Engine Compartment Fuse Box
B Degassing Tank E Engine Oil Dipstick
C Brake Fluid Reservoir F Battery

11-8
MAINTENANCE
Diesel Layout
A B C D E F G
USE ONLY
MAHINDRA MAXIMILE
PREMIUM OIL
A Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir D Engine Oil filling Cap G Engine Compartment Fuse Box
B Degassing Tank E Engine Oil Dipstick
C Brake Fluid Reservoir F Battery

MAINTENANCE
11.6 General Maintenance • Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities
Inside the Vehicle
• Lights
Exercise extreme caution when the hood is open and engine
is ON. • Warning lamps
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should • Windshield wiper and wash
be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items
listed below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, • Steering wheel
smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take • Seats/Seat belts
your vehicle to your Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a
qualified service shop immediately. • Accelerator pedal/Brake pedal
• Brakes
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you • Parking brake
intend to run the engine. • Gear lever shift mechanism
In the Engine Compartment Outside the Vehicle
• Front windshield washer fluid level • Lamps
• Engine coolant level • Fluid leaks
• Battery condition • Doors and engine bonnet latches
• Brake/Clutch fluid level • Tyre inflation pressure
• Engine oil level • Tyre surface/thread and wheel Bolts
• Fluid leaks

11-10
MAINTENANCE
11.7 In the Engine Compartment 11.7.1 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil
Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the • Make sure the vehicle is on ground level
underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor
or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected • Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for
immediately. the oil to settle down into the oil sump
Engine Oil: Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating • Apply the parking brake
and cooling the inside of the engine. It plays a major role in
maintaining the engine in proper working order. Therefore, it is
• Open the bonnet, use stay rod to support the bonnet.
Protect yourself from engine heat
essential to check the engine oil regularly.
• Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick
Engine Oil Consumption: It is normal for engines to
consume some engine oil during operation. Causes of • Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully,
consumption in a normal engine are as follows: then remove it again
• Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. • If the oil level is between “Min” and “Max” marks, the oil
Thin films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL
are sucked into the combustion chamber due to high
negative pressure generated when the vehicle is
decelerating. This oil gets burnt in the combustion chamber
• Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some
of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together MAX
with the intake air and is burnt there
• Engine oil consumption depends upon the viscosity and MIN
quality of the oil, and upon the conditions in which the
vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to high W62J10
speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A

new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston
rings and cylinder walls are not conditioned

MAINTENANCE
• To access the engine oil filling remove the engine top 11.7.2 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant Level
cover.
• Park the vehicle on flat-horizontal surface.
• If the oil level is below or near the "Min" mark, add Keep the parking brake fully engaged. Shut-off
enough oil through the oil filler cap to raise the level
the engine
within the “Min” and “Max” marks. Wait for few minutes
after every top-up for the oil to settle down before • Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant
checking the level temperature comes down to normal room temperature
• Oil levels above the

“Max” mark may cause MAX
engine damage/poor MIN • The coolant level should
performance. Put the be between “MIN” and
dipstick and the oil filler “MAX” marking provided
cap back and ensure it is
MAX
MIN
on the degassing tank
fully/properly seated
• In case the coolant level is below the "MIN" marking, the

coolant should be topped-up
Kindly refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for
Engine oil capacity and grade. • The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the
Draining/Changing of engine oil should always be done by 'MIN' but remain below the “MAX” marking on the
an Mahindra Authorised Dealer. degassing tank
• However, if the degassing tank is found to be near empty,
it is recommended that the system be checked at
To avoid possible oil loss and injury due to hot blow-by gas, Mahindra Authorised Dealer
DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick
and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

11-12
MAINTENANCE
The brake fluid level will

drop slowly as the brakes
wear and will rise when the
Engine Coolant capacity and grade. MAX
brake components are
Top-up only with recommended Ready To Use (RTU) replaced. Fluid levels
coolants for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and between the “MIN” and
corrosion protection. Do not add water directly. Mixing with MIN “MAX” lines are within the
other brand of coolants is not recommended and should be normal operating range;
avoided. W62J12
there is no need to add
Draining or changing of engine coolant should always be fluid.
done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer. If the fluid levels are below the “MIN” mark, the performance of
the systems could be compromised; the brake/clutch operation
could be spongy and gear change harder. Top-up the
Never open the pressure cap when the engine is hot. Hot recommended brake/clutch fluid till the “MAX” mark or contact
coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.
severe burns by the erupting liquid. Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before you remove it
and be sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not keep the
11.7.3 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid reservoir open for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.
Use only brake/clutch fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.
The brake and clutch systems are supplied
fluid from the same reservoir (Applicable for
manual transmission vehicle).
Brake/Clutch Fluid capacity and grade.
Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done
by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

MAINTENANCE
11.7.4 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up 11.7.5 Fuel Filter Water Draining (If equipped)
Top-up the windshield washer reservoirs as and when The fuel filter needs to be drained when there is water entry
required. in the fuel filter and respective tell tale ON in cluster. Follow
the below procedure to drain the water;
The windshield washer is located behind the RH Head lamp
in the engine bay. 1. Park the vehicle on a ground level
In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with 2. Apply Parking brake and block the wheels.
washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.
3. Switch off the ignition
4. Turn the drain plug (Tool is available in the tool kit)
anti-clockwise 3–4 rounds, but DO NOT remove the
If you operate your vehicle in very low temperatures, use
plug
washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather 5. Wait till the water drains (few seconds)
could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident. 6. Turn the drain plug clockwise to close and tighten the
plug firmly

11-14
MAINTENANCE
11.8 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle 11.9 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle
Lights: Make sure the Head lights, stop lights, tail lights, The following checks should be carried out from time to
turn signal lights and other lights are all working. Check time, unless otherwise specified.
headlight aim.
Lamps: Check and ensure proper functioning of all exterior
Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps lamps.
appearing in the instrument cluster. Refer to the relevant
sections in this manual for further details. Fluid Leaks: Check the engine compartment and the
underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel
Seats: Check that all seat controls such as seat adjusters, vapor or notice any leak, have the cause found and
seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches corrected immediately.
lock securely in any position. Check that the head restraints
move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold Doors and Engine Hood: Check all doors and latches
securely in any latched position. including the tailgate for proper functioning. Make sure the
engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from
Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, opening when the primary latch is released.
retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly.
Make sure the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the Tyre pressure with a
damaged. pressure gauge every week.
Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation,

uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Check the foot well and
remove obstructions, if any.
Brake/Clutch Pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation
and proper clearance. Check the foot well and remove
obstructions, if any.

MAINTENANCE
11.10 Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra authorized While removing the battery, always disconnect the negative
genuine battery. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure the
the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the negative terminal is connected last.
battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal
terminals. be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your
vehicle for an extended period of time. This will minimise
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the discharge of your battery during storage.
the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush.
To prevent corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
terminals. Tighten loose terminals and hold down clamp battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over
nuts only enough to keep the battery firmly in place. battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch
Tightening excessively may damage the battery terminals. each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush
contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
For Best Battery Service water.
• Keep the battery securely mounted A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent
• Keep the battery top clean and dry holes.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts,
coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
components. Wash hands after handling batteries.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has
immediately with a solution of water and baking soda
been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio
(if equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
Do not disconnect battery terminals while the engine is The replacement battery must meet the specification of the
running. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers. originally fitted battery.

11-16
MAINTENANCE
Checking the Electrolyte Level 11.11.1 Changing the Wiper Blade

Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity at intervals of 1. Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at right
three months. Check all the six cells for proper electrolyte angles to the wiper arm.
levels. If the level is below the lower marker, add distilled
water until the level reaches the upper marker.
Adding distilled water:
• Remove the vent plugs
• Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid
and secure the plugs properly
W62K44 W62K43
11.11 Wiper Blades

2. Press the retaining clip in the opposite direction,
Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for disengage the wiper blade and pull it off the arm.
inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied
with a soft sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass 3. Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are
satisfactorily or is worn-out, cut, cracked or bulging, get it free of the metal support.
replaced at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer. 4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then install the
blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.
To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper

arm slap down on to it.

MAINTENANCE
11.12 Appearance Care and Protection 11.12.2 Engine Compartment
11.12.1 Washing the Exterior
• Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water

and a neutral pH soap
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as
dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces
• Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during
exposure to strong, direct sunlight
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of
water for best results
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois cloth or soft terry cloth
towel in order to eliminate water spotting
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly
during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are
difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel,
bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause
damage to the vehicle's paint work and trim over time
Do not wash the engine or engine compartment or
underbody with pressurized water.

11-18
MAINTENANCE
11.12.3 Exterior Chrome • Always read the instructions before using the products
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and

a neutral pH shampoo
11.12.5 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Covers (if
equipped)
• Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your
Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Apply the product as you would Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of
wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:
minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag
• Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available
• Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake
pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge.
Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water
• After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a
coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at your • Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel
Mahindra Authorised Dealer, or an equivalent quality rims or covers
product to help protect from environmental effects
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based
wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household
11.12.4 Paint Chips detergents
• Mahindra dealers have the exact touch-up paint to match 11.12.6 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts
your vehicle's color
• Take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These
products are available with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
paint touch-up or paint repairs
You can use these cleaners:
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect
deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before 1. For routine cleaning of plastic parts
repairing paint chips 2. For tar or grease spots

MAINTENANCE
3. For plastic head lamp lenses • Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any
glass parts
11.12.7 Windows and Wiper Blades If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the
glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky
The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the
blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
wipe properly, substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning,
blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellent windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these windshield with water.
contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from
the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield. Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove
decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear
To clean these items, follow these tips: windshield heater grid lines (if equipped).
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be
cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray 11.12.8 Interior Maintenance
Glass Cleaner, available at your Mahindra Authorised
Dealer For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner
Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at
your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. This washer fluid
• Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery
contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which cleaner
helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the
and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when area first with a stain remover
they appear worn or do not function properly
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and
affect the flame- retardant abilities of the seat materials

11-20
MAINTENANCE
• Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the • Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized
vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains.
belt webbing. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth
immediately.
11.12.9 Display Maintenance & Cleaning • The display visible surface must not come in contact with
sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger
Infotainment/Cluster Display Maintenance: rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, car keys etc…
Infotainment/Cluster display is a precise electrical product • When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it
and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.
Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care
for cleaning the display visible surface. • Display surface is not so strong for chemical agent. Glass
cleaner including alkali or acid, sunscreen must not be
Cleaning the display area: used. Alcoholic thinner, petrol, abrading agent must not
be used. This may cause discoloration or strain.
• It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free
cloth to clean the display visible surface. • Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it
is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or
• Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to discoloration.
scratch formation.
• Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or
steel wool. Display care: Your XUV700 has an exquisite display
integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display
• Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft
screen, since it is attached strongly. cloth.
• Do not add another commercial optical film on to the CONTINUED USAGE OF DISPLAY WITH DUST OR DIRT CAN
display visible area. CREATE MICRO-SCRATCHES DO NOT WIPE DUST OR DIRT
WITH DRY ROUGH CLOTH OR BY HAND

MAINTENANCE
11.12.10 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim • Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the
cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room
Use only soft microfiber, dry cloth to clean Instrument temperature for 30 minutes
Panel/Interior Trim.
• Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use
Clean the instrument panel/Interior trim areas with neutral this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60
PH soap and water using soft microfiber / cotton cloth / seconds
sponge, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you
may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument • Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton
panel and interior trim areas. cloth
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the

upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when
this area helps protect the driver from undesirable cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.
windshield reflection
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may 11.12.11 Leather Seats (where applicable)
damage the finish of the instrument pane and interior
trim Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the coating over the leather:
instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as • To clean, use a soft microfiber / cotton / sponge cloth
follows: with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the
• Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth area with a soft cloth
• Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around • To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather
evenly care kit, available from an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol
solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl
and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners.

11-22
MAINTENANCE
These products may cause premature wearing of the

clear, protective coating
Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced,
make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling
system. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use.
In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause
wet clothing meets leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean damage to the environment.
the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.
11.14 Vehicle Storage

11.12.12 Underbody
If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks you
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. may want to take stopping to protect your battery.
Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. You Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Anytime
can also use an anti-corrosion spray for the underbody to you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation)
avoid rusting and corrosion especially for vehicles in coastal for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at
places. idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and high
blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate system
11.13 Air Conditioning System Maintenance lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean,
maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a dry, well levelled, ventilated and closed place.
qualified technician. However, you can do a few things by
yourself to make sure the air conditioning works efficiently.
11.15 Winter Care
Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even
during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten Dealing with Ice: Make sure you have window ice scrapers
minutes with the engine running at normal operating and de-icers for the locks. When you're stuck, having a small
temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in shovel is useful to dig out of the snow. The weight of a bag
the refrigerant.

MAINTENANCE
of sand in the trunk will give added traction in rear-wheel • Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both
drive vehicles and can be used to sprinkle on the snow and for about 10 minute. Again, circulating fluids is essential
ice to gain better traction. And don't forget personal for good life of the system
protection such as a warm coat, hat, gloves and a blanket, in
case you get stuck in a storm. Exterior: Wash and wax your car to provide an extra layer
of protection to your paint.
Keep Enough Fuel in the Tank: Never let the fuel level in
Vinyl and Rubber: Use a good conditioner on all vinyl and
the tank drop below the half-full mark. A sudden storm with
rubber parts to prevent from drying out.
unexpected heavy rains could leave you stranded for hours.
Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle the engine Interior: Clean the glass, shampoo the carpets, dig in
from time to time to keep warm. between the seats to see what's there, clean the upholstery
Do not: Tap the ice on the window to crack it or chip it for a in all nooks and corners.
good place to start scraping. You could end up cracking Engine: Check all hoses and wires to make sure everything
more than the ice and end up with a cracked or shattered is in good condition and replace any that need to be. The
windshield/window last thing to do is to make sure the internal components of
the engine remain lubricated and don't corrode.
Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This
will crack your windshield
During Winter Storage: Start the engine occasionally, here If the engine is being started after a very long period of non-
are a few pointers to keep in mind: use, warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes
• Run it in a well-ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can before driving the vehicle.
build up quickly
• Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to
come up to the normal operating temperature. This will
allow the oil to circulate and will also open up the
thermostat so that your radiator anti-freeze circulates as
well

11-24
MAINTENANCE
11.16 Head Lamp Bulb Replacement (if equipped) High Beam bulb cap
Below procedure is applicable only for variants having Head

lamp bulbs. Low Beam bulb cap
To replace the head lamp bulb:

• Ensure ignition is switched OFF
W62K45
• Remove rear dust cover from the head lamp
• Remove the bulb assembly with connector from the head
lamp by unlocking the wire clamp Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination
will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with
• Detach the bulb assembly from the wiring connector any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
near to the head lamp To avoid burn injuries, do not replace the light bulbs when they
• Insert the connector into the new bulb (of the same are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and are to
wattage), and follow the reverse procedure to assemble be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause the
the bulb assembly in the headlight assembly bulb to burst or shatter. Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic
holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
• Clamp the bulb assembly by wire clamp properly Using bulbs with units of higher output capacity/wattage is
illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
Replacement bulbs must meet the specification of originally
The head lamp bulb can be replaced without removing the fitted bulbs.
head lamp assembly from the vehicle. The head lamp assembly
has been removed here for illustration purpose only.

ANNEXURE
12 ANNEXURE
12.1 Emission Control System – Multi Languages Alerts

3 4 100 120
Trip - A 80 140
X 1000 rpm km/h
2 5 60 160
Distance 8888.8 km
40 180
1 6 Time 88:88 hr
Avg. Speed 220 km/h 20 200
ENGINE!
7 220
999999 km
E F 5 C H
ZIP
A B C C A B
A B C
(and) REGEN
DPF Indicator Lamp REGEN Indicator Lamp DEF Indicator Lamp OBD Check Lamp

ANNEXURE
12.1.1 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Assames
(and) REGEN
DPF REGEN
DEF
REGEN
REGEN
REGEN

12-2
ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE
12.1.2 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Bengali
(and) REGEN
DPF REGEN
DEF
REGEN
REGEN

12-4
ANNEXURE
অব�ায়

ANNEXURE
12.1.3 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Gujarathi
(and) REGEN
DPF REGEN
E31
DEF
E32/E33
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13
E14
E15
REGEN E21
E22/E23
E24
REGEN
E25

12-6
ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE
12.1.4 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Hindi
(and) REGEN
DPF REGEN
एरर कोड
E31
DEF E32/E33
E34
E35
E11
२० से ३० िमनट के िलए ६० िकमी /
घंटे र तार से वेिहकल को हायवे पर E12/E13
ाइव करे
या E14
REGEN E15
E21
E22/E23
REGEN
E24
E25

12-8
ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE
12.1.5 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Kannada
(and) REGEN
DPF REGEN
DEF
REGEN
REGEN

12-10
ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE
12.1.6 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Malayalam
(and) REGEN
DPF REGEN
DEF OBD
REGEN
REGEN

12-12
ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE
12.1.7 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Marathi

एससीआर संबंिधत अलट
(and) REGEN
एरर कोड ल टर म ये अलट मेसेज काम काय होईल
DPF REGEN
E31 डीईएफ़ लेवल लो, इजं न २४०० िकमी म ये सु होणार नाही २४०० िकमी म ये डीईएफ भरा
E32/E33 डीईएफ़ लेवल लो, इजं न ८०० िकमी /... िकमी म ये सु होणार नाही ८०० िकमी म ये डीईएफ भरा
DEF
डीपीएफ संबंिधत अलट E34 र टाट ची परवानगी नाही, डीईएफ़ भरा डीईएफ लगेच भरा
वािनग लै प काय इिं डके ट
म िसंबोल इज
ं न परफ़ोम स काम काय होईल E35 र टाट ची परवानगी नाही, डीईएफ़ भरा डीईएफ लगेच भरा
टेटस करे ल
२० ते ३० िमिनट पयत ६० िकमी / E11 चकु चे डीईएफ़ आहे असे समजले / चकु चे डीईएफ़ आहे असे समजले यो य डीईएफ भरा
ऑन डीपीएफ तास पीड ने वेिहकल हायवे वर
चोक जाऊन ाइव करा चकु चे डीईएफ़ आहे, इजं न ८०० िकमी /... िकमी म ये सु होणार नाही / चकु चे
िकंवा E12/E13 यो य डीईएफ भरा
हो यास डीईएफ़ आहे, इजं न ८०० िकमी /... िकमी म ये सु होणार नाही
नॉमल पाक रनजनरे शन करा
सु वात िकंवा
झाली िसफ़ा रश केले या मिहं ा डीलर कड़े
E14 र टाट ची परवानगी नाही, डीईएफ़ चेक करा यो य डीईएफ भरा
REGEN ऑन
वेिहकल घेऊन जा
E15 र टाट ची परवानगी नाही, डीईएफ़ चेक करा यो य डीईएफ भरा
डीपीएफ पाक रनजनरे शन करा
ि लंिकंग िकंवा
जवळ जवळ E21 डीईएफ़ डोिझंग मालफं शन मिहं ा डीलरशी संपक करा
िलंप होम िसफ़ा रश के ले या मिहं ा डीलर कड़े
चोक झाला
REGEN ऑन वेिहकल घेऊन जा डीईएफ़ डोिझंग मालफं शन, इजं न ८०० िकमी म ये सु होणार नाही
E22/E23 मिहं ा डीलरशी सपं क करा
डीपीएफ डीईएफ़ डोिझंग मालफं शन, इजं न ... िकमी म ये सु होणार नाही
ि लंिकंग पूणपणे चोक िसफ़ा रश के ले या मिहं ा डीलर कड़े
िलंप होम E24 र टाट ची परवानगी नाही, डोिझगं मालफं शन मिहं ा डीलरशी सपं क करा
झाला वेिहकल घेऊन जा
ऑन
E25 र टाट ची परवानगी नाही, डोिझंग मालफं शन मिहं ा डीलरशी संपक करा

12-14
ANNEXURE
20

ANNEXURE
12.1.8 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Oriya
(and) REGEN
DPF REGEN
E31
DEF
E32/E33
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13
REGEN
E14
E15
E21
REGEN
E22/E23
E24
E25

12-16
ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE
12.1.9 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Tamil
(and) REGEN
DPF ,d;bNfl;lh; tpsf;F REGEN ,d;bNfl;lh; tpsf;F
E31
DEF ,d;bNfl;lh; tpsf;F OBD nrf; tpsf;F
E32/E33 800 800
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13 800
REGEN E14
E15
(my;yJ) E21
REGEN 800
E22/E23
E24
E25

12-18
ANNEXURE

ANNEXURE
12.1.10 Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Telugu
(and) REGEN
DPF REGEN
E31
OBD E32/E33
DEF
E34
E35
E11
E12/E13
E14
REGEN
E15
E21
REGEN E22/E23
E24
E25

12-20
ANNEXURE

Alphabetical Index
A Automatic Emergency Braking ON/OFF Warning Collision Mitigation System ...................................... 7-30
Lamp ....................................................................... 3-53 Console Storage ......................................................... 8-8
ACC Switches ............................................................ 7-10 Automatic Emergency Braking Warning/ Controls and functions ............................................... 9-1
Activation of AVH ...................................................... 6-41 Malfunction Lamp................................................... 3-53 Cornering Lamp........................................................ 8-27
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Lamp ......... 3-54 Automatic Transmission........................................... 6-17 Creep Function ......................................................... 6-23
Adaptive Cruise Control (Only for Automatic Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE) .................................... 3-12 Cruise Control............................................................. 7-4
Transmission variant) ............................................... 7-9 Average Speed.......................................................... 3-10 Cruise Control Activation............................................ 7-5
ADRENOX connect .................................................... 1-13 AWD Lock.................................................................. 6-25 Cruise Control De-activation ...................................... 7-5
ADRENOX connect Features..................................... 1-15 AWD Torque Distribution ......................................... 3-15 Cruise Indicator ........................................................ 3-44
After Driving Off-Road or through Water ................... 6-9
Air Conditioning System Maintenance ................... 11-23
Air Vents ................................................................... 9-11
Airbag Deployment .................................................. 2-35
Airbag Inflation/Deployment.................................... 2-32 B D
Airbag Service ........................................................... 2-38 Battery .................................................................... 11-16 D : Drive position ...................................................... 6-20
Airbag System Malfunction Lamp ............................ 2-31 Battery Charging System Warning Lamp ................. 3-50 DATC – Auto Operation Mode .................................. 9-24
Airbag Warning Lamp............................................... 3-46 Bottle and Umbrella Holder ..................................... 8-10 DATC – Climate Control Through Infotainment
Alert History.............................................................. 3-25 Brake Disc Wiping..................................................... 6-50 Screen ..................................................................... 9-26
All Wheel Drive (AWD) .............................................. 6-24 Brakes....................................................................... 6-34 DATC – Manual Operation Mode.............................. 9-25
All Wheel Drive Malfunction (AWD) .......................... 3-55 Bulb Specification ..................................................... 11-4 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp...... 8-27
Aluminium Wheels and Wheel Covers ................... 11-19 Deactivation of AVH.................................................. 6-41
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)................................... 6-43 DEF Alert ..................................................................... 4-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Malfunction Lamp ........ 3- DEF Dosing Malfunction ............................................. 4-7
45
Appearance Care and Protection ........................... 11-18 C DEF Indicator Lamp .................................................. 3-48
DEF Level .................................................................. 3-13
Applying EPB............................................................. 6-36 Center Fascia Switch................................................. 8-13 DEF Level Indication ................................................... 4-5
AT Warning Lamp ..................................................... 3-51 Central Locking System .............................................. 5-5 DEF Quality ................................................................. 4-6
AUTO Apply EPB ....................................................... 6-37 Changing a Flat Tyre .......................................6-62, 10-17 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) ..................................... 4-7
Auto Hazard Warning Lamp ..................................... 8-29 Changing the Wiper Blade...................................... 11-17 Digital Speedo Meter................................................ 3-13
Auto Head Lamp Booster ......................................... 3-49 Check Engine Lamp .................................................. 3-50 Dimensions............................................................... 11-1
Auto Locking ............................................................... 5-8 Checking/Topping Brake/Clutch Fluid .................... 11-13 Display Layout .......................................................... 3-17
Auto Re-locking........................................................... 5-8 Checking/Topping Engine Coolant ......................... 11-12 Distance to Empty (DTE) ........................................... 3-12
AUTO Releasing EPB ................................................. 6-38 Checking/Topping the Engine Oil ........................... 11-11 Door Ajar Warning Lamp.......................................... 3-47
Auto Unlocking ........................................................... 5-8 Door Lock/Unlock Switch ........................................... 8-2
Child Restraint and Airbag........................................ 2-34
Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) ........................................... 3-55 Child Restraint System (CRS) .................................... 2-21 Doors .......................................................................... 5-1
Auto Vehicle Hold/Auto Hold (AVH) (if equipped) ........ 6- Clock & Date ............................................................. 3-10 DPF Indicator Lamp .................................................. 3-48
40 Drive Info .................................................................... 3-9
Cluster Features ....................................................... 3-32
AUTO Wash............................................................... 8-33 Cluster Setting .......................................................... 3-18 Drive Mode ................................................................. 3-6
Alphabetical Index
Drive Modes (Only for Diesel Variant) ...................... 6-25 EPS Warning Lamp ................................................... 3-49 G
Drive Time .................................................................. 3-9 ESP OFF..................................................................... 6-46
Driver and Front Passenger Airbag .......................... 2-27 ESP OFF Lamp........................................................... 3-47 Gear Lever ................................................................ 6-13
Driver Assistance (If equipped) ................................ 3-16 ESP ON...................................................................... 6-45 Gear Recommendation ......................................3-5, 6-14
Driver Door Power Window Switch ............................ 8-1 ESP System Warning Lamp....................................... 3-47 Gear Selector Lever .................................................. 6-17
Driver Drowsiness Detection System (DDD) ............ 6-51 Exhaust Gases ............................................................ 6-5 Gear Shift Interlock system ...................................... 6-22
Driver Drowsiness Index .......................................... 3-10 Exterior Chrome ..................................................... 11-19 Gears 1-6 .................................................................. 6-15
Driver Seat Belt Reminder Indication ....................... 2-19 General Driving Precautions ...................................... 6-6
Driving and Operation.............................................. 6-76 General Maintenance ............................................. 11-10
Driving Through Water ............................................... 6-8 General Owners Information ................................... 11-5
Driving Your Vehicle ................................................... 6-5
Dual Automatic Temperature Control...................... 9-18
F General Safety Information and Instructions............. 1-2
Glove Box/Tab Holder ................................................ 8-7
Fastening the Seat Belt (2-Point Lap type) ............... 2-18 Glow Plug Indicator .................................................. 3-49
Fastening the Seat Belt (3-Point type) ...................... 2-18 Grip Handle and Coat Hook ..................................... 8-11
Feature Description .................................................. 6-81
E Flowing Water............................................................. 6-9
Fog Lamps ................................................................ 8-27
ECO Score ................................................................. 3-13 Follow-Me Home (FMH) (if equipped) ...................... 8-30 H
Electric Adjustable ORVM (If equipped)...................... 8-4 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor
Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD) .................... 6-44 (RLS) ........................................................................ 8-29 Hazard Warning Flashers ......................................... 10-1
Electric Brake Prefill - EBP......................................... 6-50 Forgot & Change Password and Forgot & Hazard Warning Lamp.............................................. 8-28
Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Alert ............................. 6-43 Change Pin.............................................................. 1-14 HDC Malfunction ...................................................... 3-51
Electric Parking Brake Malfunction (EPB) ................. 3-46 Front Cup Holder/Rear Cup Holder and Armrest Head Lamp Bulb Replacement (If equipped) ......... 11-25
Electric Parking Brake-EPB (if equipped) .................. 6-36 (if equipped).............................................................. 8-9 Head Lamp High Beam............................................. 3-49
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............................ 6-45 Front Fog Lamp ........................................................ 3-47 Head Restraint.......................................................... 2-11
Electronic Temperature Control............................... 9-13 Front Seat ................................................................... 2-2 HHC malfunction ...................................................... 3-46
Emergency Close Feature........................................... 9-5 Fuel Info.................................................................... 3-12 High Beam Assist Lamp............................................ 3-53
Engine Braking.......................................................... 6-24 Fuel Level Gauge ........................................................ 3-4 High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp ...... 3-
Engine Compartment .....................................11-8, 11-18 Fuel-BS VI .................................................................. 6-32 50
Engine Compartment Fuse Box.............................. 10-10 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing................................... 5-25 Hill Descent Control (HDC) (if equipped) .................. 6-47
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.......................... 3-5 Fuelling during Winter .............................................. 6-33 Hill Hold Control (HHC) (if equipped) ....................... 6-48
Engine Immobiliser System ...................................... 5-23 Functionalities of Tiretronics System ....................... 6-67 Horn.......................................................................... 6-13
Engine Number .......................................................... 1-7 Fuses & Relays ........................................................ 10-10 How to turn ACC ON/OFF ......................................... 7-11
Engine Overheating .................................................. 10-6 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) (If equipped) .............. 6-46
Engine Stop/Start Lamp............................................ 3-48 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC) ....................... 6-49
Entry and Exit Conditions ......................................... 6-86
EPB Warning Lamp /Parking Brake Warning Lamp...... 6-
39
Alphabetical Index
I K N
If PKE/RKE is Lost ...................................................... 5-22 Kick-down Function .................................................. 6-23 N : Neutral position .................................................. 6-19
If your vehicle is submerged ...................................... 6-8 Knee Airbag (If equipped)......................................... 2-28 Navigation ................................................................ 3-15
Ignition Key Interlock system (If equipped).............. 6-21 Neutral Position........................................................ 6-14
Ignition Switch .......................................................... 6-12
Immobiliser .............................................................. 3-44
Inflating Your Tyres .................................................. 6-57 L
Initializing The Power Skyroof .................................... 9-6
Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) ........................... 3-12 Lane Keep Assist System Limitations ....................... 7-58
O
Instrument Cluster Control Switches ......................... 3-7 LDW System Warning Lamp ..................................... 3-51 OBD Check Lamp...................................................... 3-49
Instrument Cluster Display....................................... 7-11 Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV) ......................................... 8-31 Odometer ................................................................... 3-6
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES ............................. 3-1 Leather Seats.......................................................... 11-22 Off-Road Driving Precautions..................................... 6-7
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale ..................................... 4-10 Life of Tyre ................................................................ 6-59 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE....................... 5-1
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Assames..................... 12-2 Limitations of RPAS .................................................. 6-80 Operation of RPAS .................................................... 6-77
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale -Bengali ....................... 12-4 Limp Home Mode..................................................... 10-9 Operation of Tiretronics ........................................... 6-63
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale –Tamil ....................... 12-18 Limp Home Mode (LHM) .......................................... 6-24 ORVM Folding/Unfolding............................................ 8-4
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale- Telugu ...................... 12-20 LKA System Warning Lamp ...................................... 3-52 Outside Ambient Temperature .................................. 3-5
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Gujarathi..................... 12-6 Login & Registration ................................................. 1-13 Override Function....................................................... 7-6
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Hindi ........................... 12-8 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp .................. 3-50
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Kannada ................... 12-10 Low Fuel Warning Lamp ........................................... 3-47
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Malayalam ................ 12-12 Luggage Board............................................................ 8-6
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Marathi ..................... 12-14
Instrument Cluster Tell-Tale-Oriya ......................... 12-16
P
Instrument Panel Fuse Box Opening Procedure........ 10- P : Park Position........................................................ 6-18
13
Instrument Panel Overview...................................... 1-10
M Paint Chips.............................................................. 11-19
Park Lamp................................................................. 3-46
Instrument Panel/Interior Trim .............................. 11-22 M : Manual Shift........................................................ 6-20 Parking Brake – Manual (if equipped) ...................... 6-35
Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC) ....................... 8-17 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle ........................... 11-15 Parking Brake Lamp ................................................. 3-45
Interior Lamps .......................................................... 8-20 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle ........................ 11-15 Parking on a Hill/Incline............................................ 6-34
Interior Maintenance.............................................. 11-20 Maintenance Guidelines for Camera and Radar Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation ............... 2-31
Interior Rear-view Mirror (IRVM) ................................ 8-5 Sensor ....................................................................... 7-8 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS)
Manual ORVM (if equipped) ....................................... 8-4 & Seat Belt Reminder Indication............................. 2-19
Manual Transmission ............................................... 6-13 Pay Attention ............................................................ 6-78
Microphone .............................................................. 8-11 Pinch Protection For The Power Skyroof.................... 9-5
J Minimum Fuel Requirement .................................... 6-33
Mirrors........................................................................ 8-4
Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts ....................... 11-19
Points to Remember................................................. 9-30
Jacking..................................................................... 10-21 Mute/Unmute Function.............................................. 5-9 Power & Torque........................................................ 3-14
Jump Starting............................................................ 10-7 Power Outlet............................................................. 8-14
Alphabetical Index
Power Window Lock Switch........................................ 8-2 S Stopping the Engine ................................................... 6-4
Storage Compartments .............................................. 8-6
Safety Symbols ........................................................... 1-1 Sun Glass Holder ........................................................ 8-7
Safety Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle .................. 6-1 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ...................... 2-27
Q Search Function.......................................................... 5-9
Seat Back/Magazine Pocket...................................... 8-11
SVS Troubleshooting ................................................ 9-44
System Limitations ...........................................6-87, 9-44
Quick Guide Front Overview ...................................... 1-8 Seat Belt.................................................................... 2-12
Seat Belt Configuration ............................................ 2-15
Seat Belt Height Adjuster ......................................... 2-20
Seat Belt Pretensioner.............................................. 2-16
Seat Belt Release (both 3-Point & 2 Point) ............... 2-19
T
R Seat Belt Warning Lamp ........................................... 3-48 Tachometer ................................................................ 3-3
R : Reverse position .................................................. 6-19 Second Collision Mitigation System (SCM) ............... 6-51 Technical Specifications ........................................... 11-2
Radial Ply Tyres......................................................... 6-58 Second Row Seats ...................................................... 2-6 Temporary Spare Wheel........................................... 6-61
Rapid Cabin Cooling ................................................. 9-28 Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR) ............................. 4-2 TFT Instrument Cluster screen flow ........................... 3-8
Rapid Cabin Heating ................................................. 9-29 Self Learning The Power Skyroof ............................... 9-7 Theft Alarm............................................................... 5-10
Rear AC Control ........................................................ 9-28 Servicing and Summary Data ..................................... 1-1 Third Row Seats (If equipped) .................................. 2-10
Rear Overview ............................................................ 1-9 SET - Button ................................................................ 7-6 Tilt Steering................................................................. 7-2
Rear Wash................................................................. 8-34 SET+ Button ................................................................ 7-5 Tips for Better Fuel Economy ................................... 6-10
Rear Wiper-INT Mode ............................................... 8-34 Side Curtain Airbag (If equipped) ............................. 2-30 Tiretronics................................................................. 3-48
Rear Wiper-ON Mode ............................................... 8-34 Side Impact Airbag (If equipped) .............................. 2-29 Tiretronics (if equipped) ........................................... 6-63
Recommended Gear Shifting Speeds ...................... 6-15 Skyroof Close.............................................................. 9-3 Tiretronics Manual Learning .................................... 6-71
REGEN....................................................................... 3-11 Skyroof Control by Authorised Mobile Phone Tiretronics Sensor Installation ................................. 6-64
Regen Indicator Lamp .............................................. 3-51 Application ................................................................ 9-4 Tiretronics Sensor Removal ..................................... 6-65
Releasing EPB ........................................................... 6-36 Skyroof Open.............................................................. 9-2 Tiretronics Warning Lamp ........................................ 6-64
Remote Engine Start................................................. 8-31 Skyroof Service Checking Procedure.......................... 9-9 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE ....................... 5-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........................... 5-7 skyroof Tilt Open/Close Position ................................ 9-4 To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle.................................. 1-2
RESUME Button .......................................................... 7-6 Smart Pilot Assist System ......................................... 7-59 Tool Kit.................................................................... 10-18
Reverse ..................................................................... 6-16 Smart Pilot Assist System Limitations ...................... 7-64 Towing ...................................................................... 10-1
RKE Operating Range ............................................... 5-10 Smart Pilot Assist Warning Lamp ............................. 3-54 Towing Equipment ................................................... 10-2
Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)....................................... 6-49 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch ....................... 8-2 Tread Wear Indicators (TWI) ..................................... 6-58
Rollo Shade Close ....................................................... 9-2 Snow Chains ............................................................. 6-59 Trip Meter ................................................................... 3-9
Rollo Shade Open ....................................................... 9-2 Spare Wheel Removal ............................................ 10-19 Turn Lamps............................................................... 3-44
Roof Overview .......................................................... 1-11 Speedometer.............................................................. 3-3 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS) ............... 3-31
RPAS Information on Instrument Cluster................. 6-77 Starting and Driving Off............................................ 6-22 Tyre Pressure....................................................3-14, 6-56
Starting the Engine ..................................................... 6-2 Tyre Rotation Recommendations............................. 6-60
Steering ...................................................................... 7-1
Steering Controls - Audio ........................................... 7-2
Steering Lock Alerts .................................................. 5-20
Alphabetical Index
U
Underbody.............................................................. 11-23
Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE ................... 5-8
Uphill and Downhill Driving...................................... 6-17
V
Vanity Mirror and Lamp (if equipped) ...................... 8-12
Vehicle Does Not Start - Checks ............................... 10-5
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 1-7
Vehicle Info ............................................................... 3-14
W
Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the Instrument
Cluster..................................................................... 3-33
Warning Triangle .................................................... 10-18
Washing the Exterior .............................................. 11-18
Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp ................................... 3-44
Wheel Bolt Loosening............................................. 10-21
Wheel Tightness ....................................................... 6-62
Wind Buffeting............................................................ 9-8
Windows and Wiper Blades.................................... 11-20
Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up ........................... 11-14
Windshield Washer Jet - Front & Rear ...................... 8-35
Windshield Wipers.................................................... 8-32
Winter Care............................................................. 11-23
Wipe/Wash ............................................................... 8-32
Wiper Blades........................................................... 11-17
Wiper Control Stalk................................................... 8-32
Wireless Mobile Charging (If equipped) ................... 8-16

XUV700 OM 03jan2022

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

XUV700 OM 03jan2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner’s Manual

Issue Date: August 2021

Thank you for choosing Mahindra vehicle.

MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.

1 Warranty Coverage............................................................................................. Refer WSIG* (P.g. 15)

Partial Alerts ..................................................................3-30 Passive Keyless Entry (PKE) System (if

Manual Transmission ...............................................6-13 Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) (If

Heating, Ventilation And Air-Conditioning Engine Compartment ...............................................11-8

1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION

1.2 Safety Symbols

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-1

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

Mobile Phones Warning Running-in

Driving Long Distances Mahindra Genuine Parts

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-3

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-5

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

1.5 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 1.6 Engine Number

VIN Plate VIN Punch Petrol Diesel

The engine number is punched on the LHS face of the

Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-7

1.7 Front Overview

A Front Windshield Wiper

O Head Lamp High Beam

P Front Radar Module*

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

1.8 Rear Overview

A Outside Rearview Mirror (ORVM)

P Temporary Spare Wheel

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-9

1.9 Instrument Panel/Door Trim Overview

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

1.10 Roof Overview

A Switches On Roof Console Lamp F Skyroof Controls A Front Roof Lamp

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-11

1.11 Alexa Reference Guide

Alexa Built-in Quick Start Guide for XUV700

Start using Alexa in your XUV700

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

1.12 ADRENOX Connect 1.12.2 Login & Registration

1.12.1 KYC ( Know Your Customer) Registration Forgot Password?

To activate connected car features including access to Adrenox

• Customer must produce valid mobile number,

registration purpose. W62A15

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-13

Forgot your password

• Enter the OTP and click on Next button

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

1.12.4 ADRENOX connect Features

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-15

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-17

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 1-19

The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 2-1

When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021

The driver seat back

Do not adjust the height of seat while vehicle is in motion.

© Copyright Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd. 102021 2-3